Contents

Mitsubishi Electric Melfa RH6FHD,12FHD Series Manual PDF

1 of 268
1 of 268

Summary of Content for Mitsubishi Electric Melfa RH6FHD,12FHD Series Manual PDF

Mitsubishi Industrial Robot CR750-D/CR751-D Controller

RH-6FH-D/12FH-D/20FH-D Series RH-3FHR-D Series

Standard Specifications Manual

BFP-A8863-AT

All teaching work must be carried out by an operator who has received special training. (This also applies to maintenance work with the power source turned ON.) Enforcement of safety training

For teaching work, prepare a work plan related to the methods and procedures of operating the robot, and to the measures to be taken when an error occurs or when restarting. Carry out work following this plan. (This also applies to maintenance work with the power source turned ON.) Preparation of work plan

Prepare a device that allows operation to be stopped immediately during teaching work. (This also applies to maintenance work with the power source turned ON.) Setting of emergency stop switch

During teaching work, place a sign indicating that teaching work is in progress on the start switch, etc. (This also applies to maintenance work with the power source turned ON.) Indication of teaching work in progress

Provide a fence or enclosure during operation to prevent contact of the operator and robot. Installation of safety fence

Establish a set signaling method to the related operators for starting work, and follow this method. Signaling of operation start

As a principle turn the power OFF during maintenance work. Place a sign indicating that maintenance work is in progress on the start switch, etc. Indication of maintenance work in progress

Before starting work, inspect the robot, emergency stop switch and other related devices, etc., and confirm that there are no errors. Inspection before starting work

Always read the following precautions and the separate "Safety Manual" before starting use of the robot to learn the required measures to be taken.

Safety Precautions

CAUTION

CAUTION

WARNING

CAUTION

DANGER

CAUTION

CAUTION

CAUTION

The points of the precautions given in the separate "Safety Manual" are given below. Refer to the actual "Safety Manual" for details.

When automatic operation of the robot is performed using multiple control devices (GOT, programmable controller, push-button switch), the interlocking of operation rights of the devices, etc. must be designed by the customer.

Use the robot within the environment given in the specifications. Failure to do so could lead to a drop or reliability or faults. (Temperature, humidity, atmosphere, noise environment, etc.)

Transport the robot with the designated transportation posture. Transporting the robot in a non-designated posture could lead to personal injuries or faults from dropping.

Always use the robot installed on a secure table. Use in an instable posture could lead to positional deviation and vibration.

Wire the cable as far away from noise sources as possible. If placed near a noise source, positional deviation or malfunction could occur.

Do not apply excessive force on the connector or excessively bend the cable. Failure to observe this could lead to contact defects or wire breakage.

Make sure that the workpiece weight, including the hand, does not exceed the rated load or tolerable torque. Exceeding these values could lead to alarms or faults.

Securely install the hand and tool, and securely grasp the workpiece. Failure to observe this could lead to personal injuries or damage if the object comes off or flies off during operation.

Securely ground the robot and controller. Failure to observe this could lead to malfunctioning by noise or to electric shock accidents.

Indicate the operation state during robot operation. Failure to indicate the state could lead to operators approaching the robot or to incorrect operation.

When carrying out teaching work in the robot's movement range, always secure the priority right for the robot control. Failure to observe this could lead to personal injuries or damage if the robot is started with external commands.

Keep the jog speed as low as possible, and always watch the robot. Failure to do so could lead to interference with the workpiece or peripheral devices.

After editing the program, always confirm the operation with step operation before starting automatic operation. Failure to do so could lead to interference with peripheral devices because of programming mistakes, etc.

Make sure that if the safety fence entrance door is opened during automatic operation, the door is locked or that the robot will automatically stop. Failure to do so could lead to personal injuries.

Never carry out modifications based on personal judgments, or use non- designated maintenance parts. Failure to observe this could lead to faults or failures.

DANGER

CAUTION

CAUTION

CAUTION

CAUTION

CAUTION

CAUTION

WARNING

WARNING

CAUTION

WARNING

CAUTION

CAUTION

CAUTION

CAUTION

When the robot arm has to be moved by hand from an external area, do not place hands or fingers in the openings. Failure to observe this could lead to hands or fingers catching depending on the posture.

Do not stop the robot or apply emergency stop by turning the robot controller's main power OFF. If the robot controller main power is turned OFF during automatic operation, the robot accuracy could be adversely affected. Moreover, it may interfere with the peripheral device by drop or move by inertia of the arm.

Do not turn off the main power to the robot controller while rewriting the internal information of the robot controller such as the program or parameters.

If the main power to the robot controller is turned off while in automatic operation or rewriting the program or parameters, the internal information of the robot controller may be damaged.

Do not connect the Handy GOT when using the GOT direct connection function of this product. Failure to observe this may result in property damage or bodily injury because the Handy GOT can automatically operate the robot regardless of whether the operation rights are enabled or not.

Do not remove the SSCNET III cable while power is supplied to the controller. Do not look directly at light emitted from the tip of SSCNET III connectors or SSCNET III cables. Eye discomfort may be felt if exposed to the light. (Reference: SSCNET III employs a Class 1 or equivalent light source as specified in JIS C 6802 and IEC60825-1 (domestic standards in Japan).)

Attach the cap to the SSCNET III connector after disconnecting the SSCNET III cable. If the cap is not attached, dirt or dust may adhere to the connector pins, resulting in deterioration connector properties, and leading to malfunction.

Make sure there are no mistakes in the wiring. Connecting differently to the way

specified in the manual can result in errors, such as the emergency stop not being released. In order to prevent errors occurring, please be sure to check that all functions (such as the teaching box emergency stop, customer emer- gency stop, and door switch) are working properly after the wiring setup is com- pleted.

Use the network equipments (personal computer, USB hub, LAN hub, etc) confirmed by manufacturer. The thing unsuitable for the FA environment (related with conformity, temperature or noise) exists in the equipments connected to USB. When using network equipment, measures against the noise, such as measures against EMI and the addition of the ferrite core, may be necessary. Please fully confirm the operation by customer. Guarantee and maintenance of the equipment on the market (usual office automation equipment) cannot be performed.

To maintain the security (confidentiality, integrity, and availability) of the robot

and the system against unauthorized access, DoS*1 attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks from unreliable networks and devices via network, take appropriate measures such as firewalls, virtual private networks (VPNs), and antivirus solutions.

Mitsubishi Electric shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving robot trouble and system trouble by unauthorized access, DoS attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks.

*1 DoS: A denial-of-service (DoS) attack disrupts services by overloading sys- tems or exploiting vulnerabilities, resulting in a denial-of-service (DoS) state.

WARNING

CAUTION

CAUTION

DANGER

DANGER

DANGER

CAUTION

CAUTION

CAUTION

*CR751-D or CR751-Q controller

Notes of the basic component are shown.

Please install the earth leakage breaker in the primary side supply power supply of the controller of CR751-D or CR751-Q because of leakage protection.

1) Please prepare the following: Leakage current breaker (with the terminal cover), cable for connecting the primary power supply (AWG #14 (2mm2 or above), cables to ground the primary power supply (AWG #12 (3.5mm2 or above). The secondary power cable (with the ACIN connector) for single phase or three phase power is supplied with the product to match the specifications. When you build a cable suitable for your environment using the ACIN connector and the ACIN terminal supplied, prepare a secondary power cable (AWG #14 (2mm2) or above).

2) Confirm that the primary power matches the specifications. 3) Confirm that the primary power is OFF and that the earth leakage breaker power switch is OFF. 4) Connect the secondary power cable.

a) When using the supplied power cable with the ACIN connector Refer to the figure above and connect the cable from the secondary side of the earth leakage breaker.

b) When building a power cable using the ACIN connector and the ACIN terminals supplied Connect the ACIN terminals with the secondary power cable (prepared by customers), and insert the ACIN terminals to the ACIN connector pins with the following numbers. Crimping caulking is recommended to connect the ACIN terminals. For single phase: 1 and 3 For three phase: 1, 2, and 3

Refer to the figure above and connect the cable from the secondary side of the earth leakage breaker. 5) Connect this ACIN connector to the ACIN connector on the front of the controller. 6) Connect the grounding cable to the PE terminal. (M4 screw) 7) Connect the primary power cable to the primary side terminal of the earth leakage breaker.

CAUTION

PE terminal

Grounding screw

Controller

ACIN connector

AC200V AC200V

Primary

Secondary

PE terminal

Grounding screw

1 2 3 1 2 3

ACIN connector

ACIN connector

Note 2)

Note 1) Crimping swage is recommended for connecting the attachment ACIN connector (soldering is also possible) Recommendation compression tools: 234171-1(Tyco Electronics)

Note 2) The earth leakage breaker is the customer preparation. Always use the cover below. Recommendation: For single primary power supply ......... NV30FAU-2P-10A-AC100-240V-30mA, (Cover: TCS-05FA2)

For three primary power supply .......... NV30FAU-3P-10A-AC100-240V-30mA, (Cover: TCS-05FA3) Note 3) If necessary, as shown in the figure, connects the noise filter between ACIN terminal blocks and primary power supply.

(Recommended noise filter: SUP-EL20-ER6 *OKAYA ELECTRIC INDUSTRIES)

Controller

<4> LINE/LOAD

<3> LINE/LOAD <1> LINE/LOAD

<2> LINE/LOAD

Noise filter

Label

ACIN connector or power cable (Attachment)

Note 1)

For three phaseFor single phase

Three phase Single phase

Earth leak- age breaker

(NV)

Note 3)

* The controller is an example.

Be careful of interference with peripheral equipment. Especially don't give a shock to the shaft (J3 axis). When you install the hand, be careful not to knock at the shaft end by the hammer etc. The shaft may be damaged.

Collision detection function is valid condition for both of automatic and jog operation at shipping in RH-3FHR series. However, damage to the ball screw shaft cannot be prevented completely.

Refer to the separate instruction manual "Detailed explanations of functions and operations" for collision detection function.

Take care also of the following items.

(1)The robot's locus of movement may change with specified speed. Especially as for the corner section, short cut distance may change. Therefore, when begin- ning automatic operation, moves at low speed at first, and you should gather speed slowly with being careful of interference with peripheral equipment.

(2)It can be confirmed whether the specified position exist in the defined area by using the instruc- tion command "Zone". It can utilize as one of the methods for collision evasion. Refer to the "detailed description of the instructions manual/function, and operation" of the separate volume for the details of the instruction command.

CAUTION

Short cut

Arch movement (example)

Revision history

Date of print Specifications No. Details of revisions

2012-02-01 BFP-A8863 First print.

2012-03-21 BFP-A8863-A The painting color was corrected. (Error in writing) Notes were added to the example of safety measures. (The measure against the noise,

The electric specification of the output terminal)

2012-04-03 BFP-A8863-B CE specification was added.

2012-05-17 BFP-A8863-C The position repeatability was corrected (improvement).

ON voltage/ON current and OFF voltage/ OFF current of the parallel input-and-output

interface were corrected (error in writing).

The mechanical stopper position to change the operating range to +/-130 degree was

corrected to N12 (Error in writing)

EC-Statement of compliance was added.

2012-06-05 BFP-A8863-D The details of RH-12FH/20FH were added. Limitation of the electric current value of the relays (coil) connected to the external

emergency stop input was added.

The connection method of the Fig.3-16 AXMC terminal connector (CR750) corrected to

"soldering."

The description of the capability value of pose repeatability was deleted.

Internal wiring/piping set for hand optional (for RH-6FH series: 340mm stroke) was added.

2012-06-11 BFP-A8863-E The specification (the suction flow rate, the vacuum generator quantity) of inside suction for

clean type of RH-12FH/20FH was changed.

The note about the load center-of-gravity position of RH-20FH was added, and the related

graph of the offset length and the maximum-speed was corrected.

2012-06-14 BFP-A8863-F The specification and dimension of duct was added.

The upper limit of load center-of-gravity position was added.

The quantity of the coupling for the internal suction of RH-12FH / 20FH clean specification

was changed.

2012-06-21 BFP-A8863-G The graph of "Relationship Between Height of Shaft (J3 Axis) and Acceleration/Deceleration

Speed" was corrected. (error in writing)

The error in writing of connection method of CNUSR2 was corrected. (fig. 3-9)

2012-07-21 BFP-A8863-H The input voltage range (1-phase: AC207 to 253V) was added to RH-12FH/20FH series.

The connector name of hand input signal/output signal of "Fig.2-48: Wiring and piping for

hand" was corrected.

The outside dimension (moving position of the 340mm stroke type) of RH-6FH series clean/

oil mist specification were corrected.

2012-09-03 BFP-A8863-J The power supply capacity of RH-6FH/12FH/20FH was corrected.

The attachments of optional Internal Wiring/Piping set for hand were corrected.

2012-10-04 BFP-A8863-K The notes were added to "Fig 3-13: Example of EMC noise filter installation".

The lithium battery (ER6) was added to The United NationsRecommendations on the

Transport of Dangerous Goods.

The notes about installation of the controller and the robot arm were added. (neither direct

rays nor the heat of lighting)

2012-10-18 BFP-A8863-M The user's guide of KC mark was added.

2012-11-20 BFP-A8863-N The statement about trademark registration was added.

The center distance of Pilot hole of Installation surface was added. (RH-6FH)

The die center distance of Pilot hole of Installation surface was added and changed. (RH-

12FH/20FH)

The notes about the input-output connected to the controller were added. (do not ground

the + side of 24V power supply prepared by customer)

Declaration of Incorporation was updated.

The metal plate which fixes "Hand internal wiring and piping set (option)" was changed to

attachment of the robot arm in standard.

2012-12-05 BFP-A8863-P The terminal name to connect when using the three phase specification by the single phase

power supply was added.

EC-Statement of Compliance was updated.

2013-01-11 BFP-A8863-R Note of the external emergency stop were added (opens the connector terminal at factory

shipping).

The specification description of CR750-MB was added.

2013-03-19 BFP-A8863-S The metal plate which fixes CR750 controller vertically was changed. (upward compati- bility)

The mass of the controller was shown which was divided by each robot type.

2013-07-19 BFP-A8863-T The simple spanner for resin nuts was added to the attachments of the external wiring/

piping box (option).

Declaration of Incorporation and EC-Statement of Compliance were updated.

Fig.2-54: Wiring and piping system diagram for hand and example the solenoid valve instal- lation was modified.

The cautions of operating in a low temperature environment or after a prolonged stop in 6.3

Precautions for handling were modified.

The caution about fumigation of wood packing was added to 6.3 Precautions for handling.

2013-09-19 BFP-A8863-U RH-3FHR-D series were added.

Fig.6-6: Limitations when connecting the relay etc. (CR750) was corrected.

(Error output Emergency stop output, Contactor controleoutput for additional axes

Error output)

The descriptions about CE marking specification were corrected. (CE marking specification

(IP54) was deleted.)

The description of Internal Wiring/Piping set for hand for RH-12FH/20FH series were cor- rected.

The numbers of hand curl tube for RH-12FH/20FH series was corrected.

The following descriptions of (5) in Fig.2-48 Wiring and piping for hand were corrected.

The power source wire only for the multifunctional hand Spare wire

The connector pins name of robot side and connector name of counter side were added.

The connector pins name of counter side was corrected.

The descriptions of solenoid valve set were corrected, and explanations were added.

Fig.2-50 Location of screw holes for fixing wiring/piping (RH-12FH/20FH) was cor- rected

Fig.2-54 Wiring and piping system diagram for hand and example the solenoid valve

installation was corrected.

The descriptions about the ventilation duct which the robot of clean specification has were

corrected.

2014-01-08 BFP-A8863-V Fig. 2-10: Relationship of the offset length and maximum velocity was corrected.

Conditions for the flexed type cables were corrected.

The note about an ambient temperature was added to 2.1.1 Basic specifications.

The station numbers of the parallel I/O interface and the parallel I/O unit was corrected.

The description of "MELFA BASIC IV" was added to Table 3-1: Specifications of control- ler.

2014-03-31 BFP-A8863-W The grounding representation was corrected.

The types of the ACIN terminal were added.

2014-07-04 BFP-A8863-X Type name of the optional solenoid valve set of the clean specification for RH-3FHR series

was corrected.

2014-08-20 BFP-A8863-Y The cover and corporate logo mark of this manual was changed.

The statement about trademark registration was modified.

The explanation of CR751 controller was added.

A connection space for a machine cable was added.

The description about screw holes using for tooling wiring and piping was added.

Correction of errors in the hand input cable (Option).

The note of turning ON the power supply for control (DCcable-2) for parallel I/O unit was

added.

A safety relay in example of safety measures wiring example 5 both CR750 and

CR751 controller were changed.

Declaration of Incorporation and EC-Statement of Compliance were updated.

2014-12-17 BFP-A8863-AA Allowance value of the offset amount were added to "2.2.2 Mass capacity".

The description of how to change the operating range moved into INSTRUCTION MAN- UAL/ROBOT ARM SETUP & MAINTENANCE.

Correction of errors in the Specifications discussion materials. (Network vision sensor: 4D-

2CG5***-PKG was deleted.)

The corporate logo mark of illustrations in this manual was changed.

2015-02-10 BFP-A8863-AB The description in case the ethernet cable is used as a backup wiring for data

communication was added.

2015-11-17 BFP-A8863-AC Declaration of Incorporation and EC-Statement of Compliance were updated.

Transportation precaution of the lithium battery was modified.

List of parts and manufacturer of parallel I/O unit was corrected.

Note1) in Table3-6: Function of the key switch interface was corrected.

2015-12-14 BFP-A8863-AD Circuit diagrams in 3.6.1 Connection of the external emergency stop and 6.1.7 Examples

of safety measures were modified.

2016-04-07 BFP-A8863-AE Windows10 was supported by RT ToolBox2.

EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY pages were deleted.

2017-05-22 BFP-A8863-AF Configuration device of CC-Link interface option was modified.

Contact information of the authorized representative was updated.

Date of print Specifications No. Details of revisions

2017-09-25 BFP-A8863-AG "2.8 About Overhaul" was modified.

2018-06-01 BFP-A8863-AH Description of countermeasures against unauthorized access was added.

Referenced Standard (Requirement of Chinese standardized law) was added.

Notes were added to section 3.6.

Environmental conditions of electromagnetic noise was modified.

3.9 Magnet contactor control connector output (AXMC) for addition axes was modified.

2018-12-25 BFP-A8863-AJ The attachments for the external wiring/piping box were corrected.

3.7 Mode changeover switch input was modified.

2019-04-19 BFP-A8863-AK Correction of figures. (Fig. 2-30, 32, 34, 36, 38, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 52 to 54)

2020-01-24 BFP-A8863-AM Added information on the space required for installing and removing the cover. (Fig. 2-18, 20,

22, 24, 26, 28)

Correction of errors.

Corrected the specifications of valves for solenoid valve sets. (Table 2-23)

2020-10-30 BFP-A8863-AN Amended the precautions regarding the prevention of unauthorized access.

Added "Appendix 1: Origin position adjustment of J2 axis".

Corrected the battery name. (ER6 ER6V)

Corrected other mistakes and changed some sections.

2021-01-29 BFP-A8863-AP Updated contents for the optional product "MELFA-3D Vision 3.0 (3F-53U-WINM)".

2021-06-25 BFP-A8863-AR Corrected examples of safety measures. (Fig. 6-1 to 6-4, 6-6 to 6-9)

Corrected limitations when connecting the relay etc. (Fig. 6-11, 12)

Added "Appendix 1: Classification of functions using external input/output signals".

2021-11-30 BFP-A8863-AS Corrected the explanation of the parameter "SRVON".

Corrected other mistakes and changed some sections.

2022-01-31 BFP-A8863-AT Revised "6.4 EMC installation guideline".

Corrected other mistakes and changed some sections.

Date of print Specifications No. Details of revisions

Introduction

This series offers small-size industrial robots developed using Mitsubishi's latest technology. They are especially designed to handle and assemble mechanical parts. They are Mitsubishi's answer to the cus- tomer's need to achieve a compact manufacturing facility capable of highly flexible production, as neces- sitated by the diffusion of high-density product groups and the shorter product life cycles that have become common-place in recent years.

About RH-3FHR-D series, because the installation surface does not give limitation to the operating range, it can work to the layout in the customer flexibly.

However, to comply with the target application, a work system having a well-balanced robot arm, periph- eral devices or robot and hand section must be structured.

When creating these standard specifications, we have edited them so that the Mitsubishi robot's charac- teristics and specifications can be easily understood by users considering the implementation of robots. However, if there are any unclear points, please contact your nearest Mitsubishi branch or dealer.

Mitsubishi hopes that you will consider these standard specifications and use our robots.

Note that in this specification document the specifications related to the robot arm is described Page 16, "2 Robot arm", the specifications related to the controller Page 127, "3 Controller", and software func- tions and a command list Page 207, "4 Software" separately.

This document has indicated the specification of the following types robot.

On floor type...........*RH-6FH-D series

*RH-12FH-D series

*RH-20FH-D series

Hanging type ...........*RH-3FHR-D series

About CE Marking in the automization system The Guidelines of the measures against EMC in the automization system manufactured by the cus- tomer is shown in Page 231, "6.4 EMC installation guideline". Please refer to it and carry out the measures against EMC of the automization system of the cus- tomer.

No part of this manual may be reproduced by any means or in any form, without prior consent from Mit- subishi.

The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice. The specifications values are based on Mitsubishi standard testing methods. The information contained in this document has been written to be accurate as much as possible.

Please interpret that items not described in this document "cannot be performed." or "alarm may occur". Please contact your nearest dealer if you find any doubtful, wrong or skipped point.

This specifications is original. Microsoft, Windows, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10 are

either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

The official name of Windows is MicrosoftWindowsOperating System. WindowsXP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10 are either prod-

uct names of Microsoft Corporation in the United States. Ethernet is registered trademarks or trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States. All other company names and production names in this document are the trademarks or registered

trademarks of their respective owners. Referenced Standard (Requirement of Chinese standardized law): This Product is designed and manu-

factured accordance with GB 11291.1. Illustrations in this Instruction Manual may differ from the actual products.

Copyright(C) 2012-2022 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

Contents

i

Page

1 General configuration .................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Structural equipment ............................................................................................................................................................. 1-1 1.1.1 Standard structural equipment .................................................................................................................................. 1-1 1.1.2 Special specifications .................................................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.3 Options ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-1 1.1.4 Maintenance parts ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2 Model type name of robot .................................................................................................................................................... 1-2 1.2.1 How to identify the robot model ................................................................................................................................ 1-2

(1) Floor installation type ................................................................................................................................................ 1-2 (2) Hanging installation type .......................................................................................................................................... 1-3

1.2.2 Combination of the robot arm and the controller .............................................................................................. 1-4 (1) CR750 controller ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-4 (2) CR751 controller ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-5

1.3 CE marking specifications .................................................................................................................................................... 1-6 (1) CR750 controller ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-6 (2) CR751 controller ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-7

1.4 Indirect export .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-7

1.5 Instruction manuals ................................................................................................................................................................ 1-7

1.6 Contents of the structural equipment ............................................................................................................................ 1-8 1.6.1 Robot arm ........................................................................................................................................................................... 1-8

(1) Floor installation type ................................................................................................................................................ 1-8 (2) Hanging installation type ........................................................................................................................................ 1-10

1.6.2 Controller .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-11 (1) CR750controller ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-11 (2) CR751 controller ....................................................................................................................................................... 1-12

1.7 Contents of the Option equipment and special specification ............................................................................ 1-13

2 Robot arm ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-16

2.1 Standard specifications ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-16 2.1.1 Basic specifications ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-16

(1) RH-6FH series ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-16 (2) RH-12FH series ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-18 (3) RH-20FH series ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-20 (4) RH-3FHR series ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-22

2.1.2 The counter-force applied to the installation surface ................................................................................... 2-23 2.1.3 RH-3FHR installation stage ....................................................................................................................................... 2-24

(1) Example which uses the iron material .............................................................................................................. 2-24 (2) Example which uses the aluminum ..................................................................................................................... 2-25

2.2 Definition of specifications ................................................................................................................................................ 2-26 2.2.1 Pose repeatability .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-26 2.2.2 Mass capacity .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-27 2.2.3 Relationships Among Mass Capacity, Speed, and Acceleration/Deceleration Speed ...................... 2-29

(1) Setting Load Capacity and Size (Hand Conditions) .................................................................................... 2-29 2.2.4 Vibrations at the Tip of the Arm during Low-Speed Operation of the Robot ..................................... 2-29 2.2.5 Vibration of shaft (J3 axis) position and arm end ............................................................................................ 2-30

(1) Relationship Between Mass Capacity and Speed ....................................................................................... 2-30 (2) Relationship Between Height of Shaft (J3 Axis) and Acceleration/Deceleration Speed ........... 2-31 (3) Relation between offset length and the maximum speed ......................................................................... 2-33 (4) Time to reach the position repeatability ......................................................................................................... 2-35

2.2.6 About moving speed at singular point and near singular point. (RH-3FHR series) ........................... 2-36 2.2.7 Collision detection ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-37 2.2.8 Protection specifications ............................................................................................................................................ 2-38

(1) Types of protection specifications .................................................................................................................... 2-38 (2) About the use with the bad environment ........................................................................................................ 2-39

2.2.9 Clean specifications ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-40 (1) Types of clean specifications ............................................................................................................................... 2-40

Contents

ii

Page

2.3 Names of each part of the robot .................................................................................................................................... 2-42

2.4 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram ........................................................................................................ 2-44 2.4.1 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram (RH-6FH series) ............................................................. 2-44

(1) Standard Specification ............................................................................................................................................ 2-44 (2) Clean Specification and oil mist specification .............................................................................................. 2-50

2.4.2 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram (RH-12FH series) .......................................................... 2-56 (1) Standard Specification ............................................................................................................................................ 2-56 (2) Clean Specification and oil mist specification .............................................................................................. 2-62

2.4.3 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram (RH-20FH series) .......................................................... 2-68 (1) Standard Specification ............................................................................................................................................ 2-68 (2) Clean Specification and oil mist specification .............................................................................................. 2-72

2.4.4 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram of RH-3FHR series ....................................................... 2-76 (1) Standard Specification ............................................................................................................................................ 2-76 (2) Clean/Waterproof Specification .......................................................................................................................... 2-77

2.4.5 Mechanical interface and Installation surface ................................................................................................... 2-78 (1) Mechanical interface and Installation surface of RH-6FH series ......................................................... 2-78 (2) Mechanical interface and Installation surface of RH-12FH series ...................................................... 2-79 (3) Mechanical interface and Installation surface of RH-20FH series ...................................................... 2-80 (4) Mechanical interface and Installation surface of RH-3FHR series (Standard specification) .... 2-81 (5) Mechanical interface and Installation surface of RH-3FHR series (Clean/Waterproof specification)

2-82 2.4.6 Outside dimensions of machine cables ................................................................................................................ 2-83

(1) Connection with the CR750 controller ............................................................................................................ 2-83 (2) Connection with the CR751 controller ............................................................................................................ 2-83

2.5 Tooling ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-84 2.5.1 Wiring and piping for hand .......................................................................................................................................... 2-84 2.5.2 Internal air piping ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-86

(1) Floor installation type .............................................................................................................................................. 2-86 (2) Hanging installation type ........................................................................................................................................ 2-86

2.5.3 Internal wiring for the hand output cable ............................................................................................................ 2-86 (1) Floor installation type .............................................................................................................................................. 2-86 (2) Hanging installation type ........................................................................................................................................ 2-86

2.5.4 Internal wiring for the hand input cable ................................................................................................................ 2-87 (1) Floor installation type .............................................................................................................................................. 2-87 (2) Hanging installation type ........................................................................................................................................ 2-87

2.5.5 Ethernet cable (For RH-6FH/12FH/20FH series) .......................................................................................... 2-87 2.5.6 Spare Wiring (For FH-3FHR series) ....................................................................................................................... 2-88 2.5.7 About the Installation of Tooling Wiring and Piping (Examples of Wiring and Piping) ....................... 2-89

(1) RH-6FH series ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-89 (2) RH-12FH/20FH series ............................................................................................................................................ 2-90 (3) RH-3FHR series ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-91 (4) Example of wiring and piping <1> ........................................................................................................................ 2-92 (5) Wiring and piping example <2> ............................................................................................................................. 2-93 (6) Precautions for the oil mist/clean specification .......................................................................................... 2-94

2.5.8 Wiring and piping system diagram for hand ......................................................................................................... 2-95 2.5.9 Electrical specifications of hand input/output .................................................................................................. 2-97 2.5.10 Air supply circuit example for the hand ............................................................................................................. 2-98

2.6 Shipping special specifications, options, and maintenance parts ...................................................................... 2-99 2.6.1 Shipping special specifications ................................................................................................................................. 2-99

(1) Machine cable .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-100

2.7 Options .................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-101 (1) Machine cable extension ..................................................................................................................................... 2-102 (2) Stopper for changing the operating range ................................................................................................... 2-108 (3) Solenoid valve set .................................................................................................................................................. 2-109 (4) Hand input cable ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-115 (5) Hand output cable .................................................................................................................................................. 2-117 (6) Hand curl tube ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-118

Contents

iii

Page

(7) Hand tube .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-119 (8) Internal Wiring/Piping set for hand ................................................................................................................. 2-120 (9) External Wiring/Piping box ................................................................................................................................. 2-122

2.8 About Overhaul ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-125

2.9 Maintenance parts .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-126

3 Controller ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-127

3.1 Standard specifications ................................................................................................................................................... 3-127 3.1.1 Basic specifications ................................................................................................................................................... 3-127 3.1.2 Protection specifications and operating supply ............................................................................................. 3-128

3.2 Names of each part ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-129 3.2.1 Controller ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3-129

(1) CR750 controller .................................................................................................................................................... 3-129 (2) CR751 controller .................................................................................................................................................... 3-132

3.3 Outside dimensions/Installation dimensions ........................................................................................................... 3-134 3.3.1 Outside dimensions .................................................................................................................................................... 3-134

(1) CR750 controller .................................................................................................................................................... 3-134 (2) CR751 controller .................................................................................................................................................... 3-135

3.3.2 Installation dimensions .............................................................................................................................................. 3-136 (1) CR750 controller .................................................................................................................................................... 3-136 (2) CR751 controller .................................................................................................................................................... 3-138

3.4 External input/output ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-140 3.4.1 Types ............................................................................................................................................................................... 3-140

3.5 Dedicated input/output ................................................................................................................................................... 3-141

3.6 Emergency stop input and output etc. ...................................................................................................................... 3-144 3.6.1 Connection of the external emergency stop ................................................................................................... 3-144

(1) CR750 controller .................................................................................................................................................... 3-145 (2) CR751 controller .................................................................................................................................................... 3-149

3.6.2 Special stop input (SKIP) ........................................................................................................................................ 3-152 (1) CR750 controller .................................................................................................................................................... 3-152 (2) CR751 controller .................................................................................................................................................... 3-153

3.6.3 Door switch function ................................................................................................................................................. 3-154 3.6.4 Enabling device function .......................................................................................................................................... 3-154

(1) When door is opening ............................................................................................................................................ 3-154 (2) When door is closing ............................................................................................................................................. 3-154 (3) Automatic Operation/Jog Operation/Brake Release and Necessary Switch Settings ........... 3-155

3.7 Mode changeover switch input ..................................................................................................................................... 3-156 (1) Specification of the key switch interface .................................................................................................... 3-156 (2) Connection of the mode changeover switch input .................................................................................. 3-158

3.8 Additional Axis Function .................................................................................................................................................. 3-159 3.8.1 Wiring of the Additional Axis Interface .............................................................................................................. 3-159

(1) CR750 controller .................................................................................................................................................... 3-159 (2) CR751 controller .................................................................................................................................................... 3-160 (3) Example of the installation of the noise filter ............................................................................................ 3-161

3.9 Magnet contactor control connector output (AXMC) for addition axes ..................................................... 3-163 (1) Example circuit ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-163 (2) Image of how to connect the controller connector ................................................................................. 3-165

3.10 Options ................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-166 (1) Teaching pendant (T/B) ...................................................................................................................................... 3-167 (2) Parallel I/O interface ............................................................................................................................................ 3-170 (3) External I/O cable .................................................................................................................................................. 3-175 (4) Parallel I/O unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-177 (5) External I/O cable .................................................................................................................................................. 3-188 (6) CC-Link interface .................................................................................................................................................. 3-190 (7) Controller protection box .................................................................................................................................... 3-193 (8) MELSOFT RT ToolBox2/RT ToolBox2 mini ............................................................................................... 3-203

Contents

iv

Page

(9) Instruction Manual (bookbinding) ..................................................................................................................... 3-205

3.11 Maintenance parts ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-206

4 Software ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-207

4.1 List of commands ............................................................................................................................................................... 4-207

4.2 List of parameters .............................................................................................................................................................. 4-210

5 Instruction Manual ..................................................................................................................................................................... 5-212

5.1 The details of each instruction manuals ................................................................................................................... 5-212

6 Safety .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-213

6.1 Safety ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-213 6.1.1 Self-diagnosis stop functions ................................................................................................................................ 6-213 6.1.2 External input/output signals that can be used for safety protection measures ........................... 6-214 6.1.3 Precautions for using robot .................................................................................................................................... 6-214

(1) Robot installation .................................................................................................................................................... 6-214 (2) Prevention of contact with operator .............................................................................................................. 6-214 (3) Work procedures ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-214 (4) Training ....................................................................................................................................................................... 6-214 (5) Daily inspection and periodic inspection ...................................................................................................... 6-215

6.1.4 Safety measures for automatic operation ........................................................................................................ 6-215 6.1.5 Safety measures for teaching ............................................................................................................................... 6-215 6.1.6 Safety measures for maintenance and inspections, etc. ........................................................................... 6-215 6.1.7 Examples of safety measures ................................................................................................................................ 6-216

(1) CR750 controller .................................................................................................................................................... 6-216 (2) CR751 controller .................................................................................................................................................... 6-221 (3) External emergency stop connection [supplementary explanation] ................................................. 6-226

6.2 Working environment ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-229 (1) Power supply ............................................................................................................................................................ 6-229 (2) Noise ............................................................................................................................................................................ 6-229 (3) Temperature and humidity .................................................................................................................................. 6-229 (4) Vibration ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6-229 (5) Installation environment ...................................................................................................................................... 6-229

6.3 Precautions for handling .................................................................................................................................................. 6-229

6.4 EMC installation guideline ............................................................................................................................................... 6-231 6.4.1 Outlines ........................................................................................................................................................................... 6-231 6.4.2 EMC .................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-231 6.4.3 EMC measures ............................................................................................................................................................. 6-232 6.4.4 Component parts for EMC measures ................................................................................................................. 6-232

(1) Ferrite core ............................................................................................................................................................... 6-232 (2) Line noise filter ....................................................................................................................................................... 6-232

7Appendix ........................................................................................................................................................................... Appendix-233 Appendix 1 Classification of functions using external input/output signals ................................ Appendix-233 Appendix 2 Origin position adjustment of J2 axis .................................................................................. Appendix-234 Appendix 3 Specifications discussion material (RH-6FH series: Floor installation type) ...... Appendix-235 Appendix 4 Specifications discussion material (RH-12FH series: Floor installation type) .... Appendix-237 Appendix 5 Specifications discussion material (RH-20FH series: Floor installation type) .... Appendix-239 Appendix 6 Specifications discussion material (RH-3FHR series: Hanging installation type) .... Appendix-

241

1-1 Structural equipment

1General configuration

1 General configuration

1.1 Structural equipment

Structural equipment consists of the following types.

1.1.1 Standard structural equipment The following items are enclosed as a standard.

(1) Robot arm (2) Controller (3) Machine cable (4) Robot arm installation bolts (5) Safety manual, CD-ROM (Instruction manual) (6) Guarantee card

1.1.2 Special specifications For the special specifications, some standard configuration equipment and specifications have to be changed before factory shipping. Confirm the delivery date and specify the special specifications at the order.

1.1.3 Options User can install options after their delivery.

1.1.4 Maintenance parts Materials and parts for the maintenance use.

1General configuration

Model type name of robot 1-2

1.2 Model type name of robot This robot has arranged the type name corresponding to load mass, arm length, and environment specification. Details are shown below, please select the robot suitable for the customer's use.

1.2.1 How to identify the robot model There are two types of robot, one is "Floor installation type" and the other is "Hanging installation

type", each of which are different in installation posture.

(1) Floor installation type

RH - FH - D - SMxx (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) ( i ) j

(a). RH ..............................................Indicates the horizontal multiple-joint robot.

(b). .........................................Indicates the maximum load. Ex.

6: 6kg 12: 12kg 20: 20kg

(c). FH..............................................Indicates the FH series.

(d). ..........................................Indicates the arm length. Ex.

35: 350mm 45: 450mm 55: 550mm 70: 700mm 85: 850mm 100: 1000mm

(e). ..........................................Indicates the vertical stroke length. Ex.

20: 200mm stroke 34: 340mm stroke 35: 350mm stroke 45: 450mm stroke

(f). ................................................Indicates environment specification. Ex.

Omitted: General specifications C: Clean specifications M: Oil mist specifications

(g). ................................................Indicates the controller series. Ex.

Omitted: CR750 controller 1: CR751 controller

(h). D .................................................Indicates the controller type. D: Stand alone type

(i). .................................................Technical standard of Conformity. Ex.

Omitted: No conformity of technical standard. 1: Conforms to the CE Marking

(j). - S M xx........................... Indicates a special model. In order, limit special specification. [1] [2]

[1] S: Indicates a special model. [2] M: Indicates a specification with protection specification control-

ler. (The controller protection box is attached.

1-3 Model type name of robot

1General configuration

(2) Hanging installation type

RH - 3 FH R 35 - D - Sxx (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) ( i ) ( j ) (k)

(a). RH ............................................. Indicates the horizontal multiple-joint robot.

(b). 3................................................. Indicates the maximum load. Ex.

3: 3kg

(c). FH............................................. Indicates the FH series.

(d). R ................................................ Indicates the installation posture is hung.

(e). .......................................... Indicates the arm length. Ex.

35: 350mm

(f). ........................................... Indicates the vertical stroke length. Ex.

12: 120mm stroke 15: 150mm stroke

(g). ............................................... Indicates environment specification. Ex.

Omitted: General specifications C: Clean specifications W: Waterproof specifications (IP 65)

(h). ............................................... Indicates the controller series. Ex.

Omitted: CR750 controller

( i ). D............................................... Indicates the controller type. D: Stand alone type

( j ). ............................................. Technical standard of Conformity. Ex.

Omitted: No conformity of technical standard. 1: Conforms to the CE Marking

(k). - S xx .................................. Indicates a special model. In order, limit special specification.

1General configuration

Model type name of robot 1-4

1.2.2 Combination of the robot arm and the controller (1) CR750 controller

Table 1-1 Combination of the robot arm (floor installation type) and the CR750 controller

Protection specification Robot arm

(Floor installation type)

Arm length (mm)

J3-axis stroke (mm)

Controller Note1)

Note1) When you use by adverse environment, please use the controller protection box.

RH-6FH series General-purpose environment RH-6FH3520-D 350

200

CR750-06HD-1

RH-6FH4520-D 450 RH-6FH5520-D 550 RH-6FH3534-D 350

340RH-6FH4534-D 450 RH-6FH5534-D 550

Clean specifications RH-6FH3520C-D 350 200RH-6FH4520C-D 450

RH-6FH5520C-D 550 RH-6FH3534C-D 350

340RH-6FH4534C-D 450 RH-6FH5534C-D 550

Oil mist specifications RH-6FH3520M-D 350 200RH-6FH4520M-D 450

RH-6FH5520M-D 550 RH-6FH3534M-D 350

340RH-6FH4534M-D 450 RH-6FH5534M-D 550

RH-12FH series General-purpose environment RH-12FH5535-D 550

350

CR750-12HD-1

RH-12FH7035-D 700 RH-12FH8535-D 850 RH-12FH5545-D 550

450RH-12FH7045-D 700 RH-12FH8545-D 850

Clean specifications RH-12FH5535C-D 550 350RH-12FH7035C-D 700

RH-12FH8535C-D 850 RH-12FH5545C-D 550

450RH-12FH7045C-D 700 RH-12FH8545C-D 850

Oil mist specifications RH-12FH5535M-D 550 350RH-12FH7035M-D 700

RH-12FH8535M-D 850 RH-12FH5545M-D 550

450RH-12FH7045M-D 700 RH-12FH8545M-D 850

RH-20FH series General-purpose environment RH-20FH8535-D 850

350

CR750-20HD-1

RH-20FH10035-D 1000 RH-20FH8545-D 850

450 RH-20FH10045-D 1000

Clean specifications RH-20FH8535C-D 850 350

RH-20FH10035C-D 1000 RH-20FH8545C-D 850

450 RH-20FH10045C-D 1000

Oil mist specifications RH-20FH8535M-D 850 350

RH-20FH10035M-D 1000 RH-20FH8545M-D 850

450 RH-20FH10045M-D 1000

1-5 Model type name of robot

1General configuration

Table 1-2 Combination of the robot arm (hanging installation type) and the CR750 controller

(2) CR751 controller Table 1-3 Combination of the robot arm (floor installation type) and the CR751 controller

Protection specification Robot arm

(Hanging installation type)

Arm length (mm)

J3-axis stroke (mm)

Controller Note1)

Note1) When you use by adverse environment, please use the controller protection box.

RH-3FHR series General-purpose environment RH-3FHR3515-D 350 150

CR750-03HRD-1Clean specifications RH-3FHR3512C-D 350 120 Waterproof specifications (IP65) RH-3FHR3512W-D 350 120

Protection specification Robot arm

(Floor installation type)

Arm length (mm)

J3-axis stroke (mm)

Controller Note1)

RH-6FH series General-purpose environment RH-6FH3520-1D 350

200

CR751-06HD-0

RH-6FH4520-1D 450 RH-6FH5520-1D 550 RH-6FH3534-1D 350

340RH-6FH4534-1D 450 RH-6FH5534-1D 550

Clean specifications RH-6FH3520C-1D 350 200RH-6FH4520C-1D 450

RH-6FH5520C-1D 550 RH-6FH3534C-1D 350

340RH-6FH4534C-1D 450 RH-6FH5534C-1D 550

Oil mist specifications RH-6FH3520M-1D 350 200RH-6FH4520M-1D 450

RH-6FH5520M-1D 550 RH-6FH3534M-1D 350

340RH-6FH4534M-1D 450 RH-6FH5534M-1D 550

RH-12FH series General-purpose environment RH-12FH5535-1D 550

350

CR751-12HD-0

RH-12FH7035-1D 700 RH-12FH8535-1D 850 RH-12FH5545-1D 550

450RH-12FH7045-1D 700 RH-12FH8545-1D 850

Clean specifications RH-12FH5535C-1D 550 350RH-12FH7035C-1D 700

RH-12FH8535C-1D 850 RH-12FH5545C-1D 550

450RH-12FH7045C-1D 700 RH-12FH8545C-1D 850

Oil mist specifications RH-12FH5535M-1D 550 350RH-12FH7035M-1D 700

RH-12FH8535M-1D 850 RH-12FH5545M-1D 550

450RH-12FH7045M-1D 700 RH-12FH8545M-1D 850

1General configuration

CE marking specifications 1-6

Table 1-4 Combination of the robot arm (hanging installation type) and the CR751 controller

1.3 CE marking specifications The robot shown in Table 1-5 or Table 1-6 are the CE marking/KC mark specification.

(1) CR750 controller Table 1-5 Robot models with CE marking specifications

RH-20FH series General-purpose environment RH-20FH8535-1D 850

350

CR751-20HD-0

RH-20FH10035-1D 1000 RH-20FH8545-1D 850

450 RH-20FH10045-1D 1000

Clean specifications RH-20FH8535C-1D 850 350

RH-20FH10035C-1D 1000 RH-20FH8545C-1D 850

450 RH-20FH10045C-1D 1000

Oil mist specifications RH-20FH8535M-1D 850 350

RH-20FH10035M-1D 1000 RH-20FH8545M-1D 850

450 RH-20FH10045M-1D 1000

Note1) When you use by adverse environment, please use the controller protection box.

Protection specification Robot arm

(Hanging installation type)

Arm length (mm)

J3-axis stroke (mm)

Controller Note1)

Note1) When you use by adverse environment, please use the controller protection box.

RH-3FHR series General-purpose environment RH-3FHR3515-1D 350 150

CR751-03HRD-0Clean specifications RH-3FHR3512C-1D 350 120 Waterproof specifications (IP65) RH-3FHR3512W-1D 350 120

Robot type Note1)

Note1) The "xx" indicate the arm length, "yy"indicate J3-axis stroke.

Controller Note2)

Note2) The specification and the handling method of the controller are the same as standard type controller.

External signal logic Language setting

RH-6FHxxyy-D1-S13

CR750-06HD1-1-S13

Source type English (ENG)

RH-6FHxxyyC-D1-S13 Note3)

Note3) This robot is the clean specification. As long as there is no special description about CE marking specification, refers to the contents of standard type clean specification.

RH-6FHxxyyM-D1-S13 Note4)

Note4) This robot is the oil mist specification. As long as there is no special description about CE marking specification, refers to the contents of standard type oil mist specification.

RH-12FHxxyy-D1-S15

CR750-12HD1-1-S15RH-12FHxxyyC-D1-S15 Note3)

RH-12FHxxyyM-D1-S15 Note4)

RH-20FHxxyy-D1-S15

CR750-20HD1-1-S15RH-20FHxxyyC-D1-S15 Note3)

RH-20FHxxyyM-D1-S15 Note4)

Protection specification Robot arm

(Floor installation type)

Arm length (mm)

J3-axis stroke (mm)

Controller Note1)

1-7 Indirect export

1General configuration

(2) CR751 controller Table 1-6 Robot models with CE marking specifications

1.4 Indirect export The display in English is available by setting parameter LNG as "ENG."

1.5 Instruction manuals The instruction manuals supplied in CD-ROM, except for the Safety Manual. This CD-ROM (electronic manual) includes instruction manuals in both Japanese and English versions.

Robot type Note1)

Note1) The "xx" indicate the arm length, "yy"indicate J3-axis stroke.

Controller Note2)

Note2) The specification and the handling method of the controller are the same as standard type controller.

External signal logic Language setting

RH-6FHxxyy-1D1-S13

CR751-06HD1-0-S13

Source type English (ENG)

RH-6FHxxyyC-1D1-S13 Note3)

Note3) This robot is the clean specification. As long as there is no special description about CE marking specification, refers to the contents of standard type clean specification.

RH-6FHxxyyM-1D1-S13 Note4)

Note4) This robot is the oil mist specification. As long as there is no special description about CE marking specification, refers to the contents of standard type oil mist specification.

RH-12FHxxyy-1D1-S15

CR751-12HD1-0-S15RH-12FHxxyyC-1D1-S15 Note3)

RH-12FHxxyyM-1D1-S15 Note4)

RH-20FHxxyy-1D1-S15

CR751-20HD1-0-S15RH-20FHxxyyC-1D1-S15 Note3)

RH-20FHxxyyM-1D1-S15 Note4)

1 General configuration

Contents of the structural equipment 1-8

1.6 Contents of the structural equipment

1.6.1 Robot arm The list of structural equipment is shown in below.

(1) Floor installation type

Fig.1-1 Structural equipment (RH-6FH series)

* Refer to Page 16, "2.1 Standard specifi- cations" for details on the specifications.

Horizontal four-axis multiple-jointed type RH-6FH series

Hand output cable 1F-GR60S-01 4sets

Hand input cable 1F-HC35C-01

Hand curl tube 1E-ST0408C-300

Solenoid valve set 1F-VD0*-01 (Sink type) 1F-VD0*E-01 (Source type) (*: 1 to 4 = 1 set to 4 set)

*With hand output cable.

Pneumatic hand customer-manu- factured parts

Caution Standard configuration

Special specifications

Option equipment

Prepared by customer

RH-6FH series

Stopper for changing the operating range 1F-DH-01

Internal Wiring/Piping set for hand 1F-HS408S-01 (200mm stroke) 1F-HS408S-02 (340mm stroke)

This option

External Wiring/Piping box 1F-UT-BOX

Pull out Wiring/Piping

This option

Machine cable Standard product: 5m attachment

For CR751 controllerFor CR750 controller

Machine cable (Fixed type: 2m) For CR750 controller: 1S-02UCBL-01 For CR751 controller: 1F-02UCBL-02

Machine cable extension CR750 controller

Fixed type: 1S- CBL-01 (extension type) Flexed type: 1S- LCBL-01 (extension type)

1S- LUCBL-01 (direct type) CR751 controller

Fixed type: 1F- UCBL-02 (direct type) Flexed type: 1F- LUCBL-02 (direct type)

Note1) refer the length. Refer to Table 1-7 for details.

1-9 Contents of the structural equipment

1 General configuration

Fig.1-2 Structural equipment (RH-12FH/20FH series)

* Refer to Page 16, "2.1 Standard specifi- cations" for details on the specifications.

Horizontal four-axis multiple-jointed type RH-12FH/20FH series

Hand output cable 1F-GR60S-01 4sets

Hand input cable 1F-HC35C-02

Hand curl tube 1N-ST0608C-01

Solenoid valve set 1S-VD0*-01 (Sink type) 1S-VD0*E-01 (Source type) (*: 1 to 4 = 1 set to 4 set)

* With hand output cable.

Pneumatic hand customer-manu- factured parts

Caution Standard configuration

Special specifications

Option equipment

Prepared by customer

RH-12FH/20FH series

Stopper for changing the operating range 1F-DH-02

Internal Wiring/Piping set for hand 1F-HS604S-01(350mm stroke) 1F-HS604S-02(450mm stroke)

This option

External Wiring/Piping box 1F-UT-BOX-01

Pull out Wiring/Piping

This option

Machine cable Standard product: 5m attachment

For CR751 controllerFor CR750 controller

Machine cable (Fixed type: 2m) For CR750 controller: 1S-02UCBL-01 For CR751 controller: 1F-02UCBL-02

Machine cable extension CR750 controller

Fixed type: 1S- CBL-01 (extension type) Flexed type: 1S- LCBL-01 (extension type)

CR751 controller Fixed type: 1F- UCBL-02 (direct type) Flexed type: 1F- LUCBL-02 (direct type)

Note1) refer the length. Refer to Table 1-7 for details.

1 General configuration

Contents of the structural equipment 1-10

(2) Hanging installation type

Fig.1-3 Structural equipment (RH-3FHR series)

* Refer to Page 16, "2.1 Standard specifi- cations" for details on the specifications.

Horizontal four-axis multiple-jointed type RH-3FHR series

Hand output cable

1S-GR35S-02 4sets

Hand input cable

1S-HC00S-01

Hand tube

1S-ST0304S Caution Standard configuration

Special specifications

Option equipment

Prepared by customer

RH-3FHR series

Solenoid valve set 1S-VD04-05 (Sink type) 1S-VD04E-05 (Source type)

* With hand output cable.

1S-VD04W-05 (Sink type) 1S-VD04WE-05 (Source type)

Pneumatic hand customer- manufactured parts

Stopper for changing the operating range For J1 axis: 1S-DH-05J1 For J2 axis: 1S-DH-05J2

*Refer to Table 1-7 for the angle which can be changed.

*Installed by customer.

Machine cable Standard product: 5m attachment

For CR751 controllerFor CR750 controller

Machine cable (Fixed type: 2m) For CR750 controller: 1S-02UCBL-01 For CR751 controller: 1F-02UCBL-02

Machine cable extension CR750 controller

Fixed type: 1S- CBL-01 (extension type) Flexed type: 1S- LCBL-01 (extension type)

CR751 controller Fixed type: 1F- UCBL-02 (direct type) Flexed type: 1F- LUCBL-02 (direct type)

Note1) refer the length. Refer to Table 1-7 for details.

1-11

1 General configuration

1.6.2 Controller The devices shown below can be installed on the controller.

The controllers that can be connected differ depending on the specification of the robot. (Refer to Page 2, "1.2 Model type name of robot".)

(1) CR750controller

Fig.1-4 Structural equipment

MELSOFT RT ToolBox2/RT ToolBox2 mini RT ToolBox2 3D-11C-WINE(CD-ROM)

(Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7,

Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10)

RT ToolBox2 mini 3D-12C-WINE(CD-ROM)

(Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7,

Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10)

*)Refer to Table 1-9 for USB cable

Personal computer Prepared by customer

Instruction Manual (bookbinding)

RH-6FH/12FH/20FH-D series:

5F-FB01-PE01

RH-3FHR-D series:

5F-FP01-PE01

CC-Link interface 2D-TZ576

Parallel I/O unit 2A-RZ361(Sink)/ 2A-RZ371(Source)

External I/O cable 2D-CBL05 (5m) 2D-CBL15 (15m)

PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) External device Prepared by customer

Teaching pendant (T/B) R32TB

R56TB

Parallel I/O interface 2D-TZ368(Sink)/ 2D-TZ378(Source)

*2)

External I/O cable 2A-CBL05 (5m) 2A-CBL15 (15m)

Controller RH-6FH: CR750-06HD-1 RH-12FH: CR750-12HD-1 RH-20FH: CR750-20HD-1 RH-3FHR: CR750-03HRD-1

Controller protection box CR750-MB

Standard configuration

Special specifications

Options

Prepared by customer

Caution

equipment

The photograph is the image figure.

1 General configuration

1-12

(2) CR751 controller

Fig.1-5 Structural equipment

MELSOFT RT ToolBox2/RT ToolBox2 mini RT ToolBox2 3D-11C-WINE(CD-ROM)

(Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7,

Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10)

RT ToolBox2 mini 3D-12C-WINE(CD-ROM)

(Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7,

Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10)

*)Refer to Table 1-9 for USB cable

Personal computer Prepared by customer

Instruction Manual (bookbinding)

RH-6FH/12FH/20FH-D series:

5F-FB01-PE01

RH-3FHR-D series:

5F-FP01-PE01

CC-Link interface 2D-TZ576

Parallel I/O unit 2A-RZ361(Sink)/ 2A-RZ371(Source)

External I/O cable 2D-CBL05 (5m) 2D-CBL15 (15m)

PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) External device Prepared by customer

Teaching pendant (T/B) R33TB

R57TB

Parallel I/O interface 2D-TZ368(Sink)/ 2D-TZ378(Source)

*2)

External I/O cable 2A-CBL05 (5m) 2A-CBL15 (15m)

Controller RH-6FH: CR751-06HD-0 RH-12FH: CR751-12HD-0 RH-20FH: CR751-20HD-0 RH-3FHR: CR751-03HRD-0

Controller protection box CR751-MB

Standard configuration

Special specifications

Options

Prepared by customer

Caution

equipment

The photograph is the image figure.

1-13 Contents of the Option equipment and special specification

1 General configuration

1.7 Contents of the Option equipment and special specification

A list of all Optional equipment and special specifications are shown below.

Table 1-7 The list of the robot arm option equipment and special specification

Item Type Specifications

Classification Note1)

Description

CR750 CR751

Stopper for changing the

operating range

1F-DH-01 The stopper parts for J1 axis

This must be installed by the customer. For RH-6FH series

1F-DH-02 The stopper parts for J1 axis

This must be installed by the customer. For RH-12FH/20FH series

1S-DH-05J1 The stopper parts for J1 axis Plus side / Minus side both are 90 degree. * Change both simultaneously Standard specification is +/- 225 degree.

This must be installed by the customer. For RH-3FHR series

1S-DH-05J2 The stopper parts for J2 axis Plus side / Minus side both are 60 degree. * Change both simultaneously Standard specification is +/- 225 degree.

Machine cable (Replaced to shorter cable)

1S-02UCBL-01 For fixing

(Set of power and signal) -

2m (A 2m cable is supplied instead of the 5m cable that is supplied as standard)

1F-02UCBL-02 For fixing

(Set of power and signal) -

Extended machine cable (extension type)

1S- CBL-01 For fixing (Set of power and signal) - " " in type shows the length of the cables as follows.

05=5m, 10=10m, 15=15m1S- LCBL-01 For flexing (Set of power and signal) -

Extended machine cable

(direct type)

1S- LUCBL-01 For flexing (Set of power and signal) -

1F- UCBL-02 For fixing (Set of power and signal) - " " in type shows the length of the cables as follows.

10=10m, 15=15m, 20=20m1F- LUCBL-02 For flexing (Set of power and signal) -

Solenoid valve set 1F-VD01-01/VD01E-01 1 set (Sink type)/(Source type) The solenoid-valve set for the hand of the customer setup. For RH-6FH series. 1F-VD02-01/VD02E-01 2 set (Sink type)/(Source type)

1F-VD03-01/VD03E-01 3 set (Sink type)/(Source type)

1F-VD04-01/VD04E-01 4 set (Sink type)/(Source type)

1S-VD01-01/VD01E-01 1 set (Sink type)/(Source type) The solenoid-valve set for the hand of the customer setup. For RH-12FH/20FH series. 1S-VD02-01/VD02E-01 2 set (Sink type)/(Source type)

1S-VD03-01/VD03E-01 3 set (Sink type)/(Source type)

1S-VD04-01/VD04E-01 4 set (Sink type)/(Source type)

1S-VD04-05/

1S-VD04E-05

4 set (Sink type)/(Source type)

For Standard specification

The solenoid-valve set for the hand of

the customer setup. For RH-3FHR series. 1S-VD04W-05/

1S-VD04WE-05

4 set (Sink type)/(Source type)

For Clean/Waterproof specification

Hand input cable 1F-HC35C-01 Robot side: connector. Hand side: wire.

The cable is connected to the sensor by the customer. Attaches the cable clamp (drip proof type) For RH-6FH series

1F-HC35C-02 Robot side: connector. Hand side: wire.

The cable is connected to the sensor by the customer. Attaches the cable clamp (drip proof type) For RH-12FH/20FH series

1S-HC00S-01 Robot side: connector. Hand side: wire.

The cable is connected to the sensor by the customer. For RH-3FHR series

Hand output cable 1F-GR60S-01 Robot side: connector. Hand side: wire

This cable can be used for the solenoid valve prepared by the customer.

1S-GR35S-02 Robot side: connector. Hand side: wire

This cable can be used for the solenoid

valve prepared by the customer.

Hand curl tube 1E-ST0408C-300 For solenoid valve 4set.:4x8

Curl type air tube For RH-6FH series

1N-ST0608C-01 For solenoid valve 4set.:6x8

Curl type air tube For RH-12FH/20FH series

1 General configuration

Contents of the Option equipment and special specification 1-14

Table 1-8 The list of the controller option equipment and special specification

Hand tube 1S-ST0304S For solenoid valve 4set.:3x4

The tube for piping the hand through the

ball screw shaft by the customer. For RH-3FHR series

External Wiring/Piping box 1F-UT-BOX For solenoid valve 4set.:4x8

Box which pulls out the Wire/Piping

(Hand I/O cable, Hand curl tube) For RH-6FH series

1F-UT-BOX-01 For solenoid valve 4set.:6x8

Box which pulls out the Wire/Piping

(Hand I/O cable, Hand curl tube) For RH-12FH/20FH series

Internal Wiring/Piping set for hand

1F-HS408S-01 Hand input cable (eight signal lines and two power lines), 4 eight hoses

Wiring/Piping to pass in the shaft For RH-6FH series (200mm stroke)

1F-HS408S-02 Hand input cable (eight signal lines and two power lines), 4 eight hoses

Wiring/Piping to pass in the shaft For RH-6FH series (340mm stroke)

1F-HS604S-01 Hand input cable (eight signal lines and two power lines), 6 four hoses

Wiring/Piping to pass in the shaft For RH-12FH/20FH series (350mm stroke)

1F-HS604S-02 Hand input cable (eight signal lines and two power lines), 6 four hoses

Wiring/Piping to pass in the shaft For RH-12FH/20FH series (450mm stroke)

Note1) : option, : special specifications.

Item Type Specifications

Classification Note1)

Description

CR750 CR751

Simple teaching pendant R32TB Cable length 7m - With 3-position enable switch IP65

R32TB-15 Cable length 15m -

R33TB Cable length 7m -

R33TB-15 Cable length 15m -

Highly efficient teaching

pendant

R56TB Cable length 7m -

R56TB-15 Cable length 15m -

R57TB Cable length 7m -

R57TB-15 Cable length 15m -

Parallel I/O Interface 2D-TZ368(Sink type)/

2D-TZ378(Source type)

DO: 32 point DI: 32 point Insulated type output signal

(0.1A/24V /point)

Insulated type input signal

(9mA/ 24V /point)

The card type external input-and-output. Interface. Install to the slot of controller.

External I/O cable

(For Parallel I/O Interface) 2D-CBL05 5m Use to connect the external peripheral

device to the parallel input/output interface.2D-CBL15 15m

Parallel I/O Unit 2A-RZ361(Sink type)/ 2A-RZ371(Source type)

DO: 32 point/ DI: 32 point Insulated type output signal

(0.1A/24V /point)

Insulated type input signal

(7mA/ 24V /point)

The unit for expansion the external input/output. Electrical isolated Type (100mA/Point)

External I/O cable (For Parallel I/O Unit)

2A-CBL05 5m Use to connect the external peripheral device to the parallel input/output unit

2A-CBL15 15m

CC-Link interface 2D-TZ576 Only Intelligent device station, Local station For MELSEC PLC with CC-Link con-

nection.

Controller protection box CR750-MB IP54 - The controller protection box is used to protect the controller from an oil mist or other operating environment.CR751-MB -

RT ToolBox2 (Personal computer Sup- port software)

3D-11C-WINE CD-ROM

Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10 (With the simulation function)

RT ToolBox2 mini (Personal computer Sup- port software mini)

3D-12C-WINE CD-ROM

Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10

Item Type Specifications

Classification Note1)

Description

CR750 CR751

1-15 Contents of the Option equipment and special specification

1 General configuration

[Reference]:The recommendation products of the USB cable are shown below

Table 1-9 Recommendation article of the USB cable

Be careful to the USB cable to apply neither the static electricity nor the noise. Otherwise, it becomes the cause of malfunction.

Use the network equipments (personal computer, USB hub, LAN hub, etc) confirmed by manufacturer. The thing unsuitable for the FA environment (related with conformity, temperature or noise) exists in the equipments connected to USB. When using network equipment, measures against the noise, such as measures against EMI and the addition of the ferrite core, may be necessary. Please fully confirm the operation by customer. Guarantee and maintenance of the equipment on the market (usual office automation equipment) cannot be performed.

Instruction Manual 5F-FB01-PE01 RH-6FH/12FH/20FH-D series

5F-FP01-PE01 RH-3FHR-D series

Note1) : option, : special specifications.

Name Type name Supplier

USB cable

(USB A type-USB mini B type) KU-AMB530 SANWA SUPPLY INC.

USB-M53 ELECOM CO., LTD.

GT09-C30USB-5P MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC SYSTEM & SERVICE CO.,

LTD.

MR-J3USBCBL3M MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

USB adapter

(USB B type-USB mini B type) AD-USBBFTM5M ELECOM CO., LTD.

Item Type Specifications

Classification Note1)

Description

CR750 CR751

Caution

Caution

2Robot arm

Standard specifications 2-16

2 Robot arm 2.1 Standard specifications 2.1.1 Basic specifications

(1) RH-6FH series Table 2-1 Standard specifications of robot arm

Item Unit Specifications

TypeNote1) RH-6FH3520/3534

RH-6FH3520C/3534C

RH-6FH3520M/3534M

RH-6FH4520/4534

RH-6FH4520C/4534C

RH-6FH4520M/4534M

RH-6FH5520/5534

RH-6FH5520C/5534C

RH-6FH5520M/5534M

Environment Blank: Standard specification

C: Clean specification

M: Oil mist specification Note2)

Installation posture On floor

Degree of freedom 4

Structure Horizontal, multiple-joint type

Drive system AC servo motor

Position detection method Absolute encoder

Motor capacity J1 750

J2 400

J3 (Z) 200

J4 (axis) 100

Brake J1, J2, J4: no brake, J3: with brake

Arm length 1 arm mm 125 225 325

2 arm mm 225

Max.reach radius( 1+ 2) mm 350 450 550

Operating range J1 deg 170

J2 deg 145

J3 (Z)

mm RH-6FH**20/**20C/**20M: 200 (+133 to +333)

RH-6FH**34: 340 (-7 to +333)

RH-6FH**34C/**34M: 340 (-43 to +297)

J4 (axis) deg 360

Speed of motion Note3) J1 deg/s 400

J2 deg/s 670

J3 (Z) mm/s 2,400

J4 (axis) deg/s 2,500

Maximum horizontal composite speed Note4)

mm/s 6,900 7,600 8,300

Cycle time Note5) sec 0.29

Load Rating kg

(N)

3

Maximum 6

Z axis pressing force Note6)

Maximum N 165

Allowable inertia Rating kg m2 0.01

Maximum 0.12

Pose repeatability Note7) X-Y

direction mm 0.010 0.010 0.012

J3 (Z) mm 0.010

J4 (axis) deg 0.004

Ambient temperature Note8) 0 to 40

Mass k 36 37

Tool wiring Input 8 points/Output 8 points, (total 20 cores)

Dedicated signal cable for multifunctional hand (Two cores + Power cable two cores)

Ethernet cable one cable (100BASE-TX, eight cores) Note9)

Tool pneumatic pipes Primary: 6 x two hoses, Secondary: 4 x eight hoses Note10)

Supply pressure MPa 0.510%

Protection specification Note11) Standard specification: IP20

Clean specification: ISO class 3 Note12)

Oil mist specification: IP65 Note13) Note14)

Painting color Light gray (Equivalent to Munsell: 0.6B7.6/0.2)

2-17 Standard specifications

2Robot arm

Note1) The table is joint writing on the general environment and clean and oil mist (IP65) specification. If the type ends in a letter C, this corresponds to the clean specification, and where it ends in a letter M, it corresponds to the mist specification. The type in which operating range of J3 axis (Z) is 200mm and 340mm are shown together.

Note2) The oil-mist specification of CE specification is the standards. Note3) The maximum speed is the value which applied MvTune2 (high-speed movement mode). Note4) At the maximum speed on the X-Y flat surface in the robot's control point, it is obtained with each speed of J1, J2,

and J4. The control point is the position offset by the rated inertia from the flange. Note5) The value of the following movement which applied MvTune2 (high-speed movement mode) with the carrying mass of

2kg. The cycle time may increase with the case where the positioning accuracy of the work etc. is necessary, or by the

moving position.

Note6) This is the downwards pressing force that occurs at the end of the load when the maximum load is on board and the J1, J2 and J4 axis are in their resting state. Please operate at this level or below. When pressing for long periods of time, an excess load error may occur. Please operate in a manner that does not cause errors.

Note7) The pose repeatability details are given in Page 26, "2.2.1 Pose repeatability". Note8) Sets the robot's operating environmental temperature as parameter OLTMX. Corresponding to the environment, the con-

tinuous control action performance and the overload-protection function are optimized. (Refers to "Optimizing the over- load level" described in "Chapter 5 Functions set with parameters" of separate instruction manual/ Detailed explanations of functions and operations for details.)

Note9) The 8-wire cable designated for LAN wiring can also be used for backup wiring. Note10) The 4 secondary piping can be obtained with the electromagnetic valve (option). Details regarding the electro-

magnetic valve (optional) are shown on Page 109, "(3) Solenoid valve set". Note11) The protection specification details are given in Page 38, "2.2.8 Protection specifications". Note12) The details of the clean specifications are described in Page 40, "2.2.9 Clean specifications". The conditions nec-

essary to guarantee cleanliness are as follows: clean room down flow 0.3 m/s or greater, robot internal suction of 30-50L/min and installation of an exhaust duct at the rear of the robots main base. A 8 joint is prepared at the rear of the base for suction.

Note13) Direct jet flow to the bellows section is not included. Note14) If you use the controller in oil mist or similar environments, use the controller protection box to protect the con-

troller from the operation environment. A robot equipped with the controller protection box as standard is available.

300

2 5

2Robot arm

Standard specifications 2-18

(2) RH-12FH series

Table 2-2 Standard specifications of robot arm

Item Unit Specifications

TypeNote1)

Note1) The table is joint writing on the general environment and clean and oil mist (IP65) specification. If the type ends in a letter C, this corresponds to the clean specification, and where it ends in a letter M, it corresponds to the mist specification. The type in which operating range of J3 axis (Z) is 350mm and 450mm are shown together.

RH-12FH5535/5545

RH-12FH5535C/5545C

RH-12FH5535M/5545M

RH-12FH7035/7045

RH-12FH7035C/7045C

RH-12FH7035M/7045M

RH-12FH8535/8545

RH-12FH8535C/8545C

RH-12FH8535M/8545M

Environment Blank: Standard specification

C: Clean specification

M: Oil mist specification

Installation posture On floor

Degree of freedom 4

Structure Horizontal, multiple-joint type

Drive system AC servo motor

Position detection method Absolute encoder

Motor capacity J1 750

J2 750

J3 (Z) 400

J4 (axis) 200

Brake J1, J2, J4: no brake, J3: with brake

Arm length 1 arm mm 225 375 525

2 arm mm 325

Max.reach radius( 1+ 2) mm 550 700 850

Operating range J1 deg 170

J2 deg 145 153

J3 (Z) mm

RH-12FH**35/**35C/**35M: 350 (-10 +340)

RH-12FH**45/**45C/**45M: 450 (-110 +340)

J4 (axis) deg 360

Speed of motion Note2)

Note2) The maximum speed is the value which applied MvTune2 (high-speed movement mode).

J1 deg/s 420 280

J2 deg/s 450

J3 (Z) mm/s 2,800

J4 (axis) deg/s 2,400

Maximum horizontal composite speed Note3)

Note3) At the maximum speed on the X-Y flat surface in the robot's control point, it is obtained with each speed of J1, J2, and J4. The control point is the position offset by the rated inertia from the flange.

mm/s 11,435 12,535 11,350

Cycle time Note4) sec 0.30

Load Rating kg

(N)

3

Maximum 12

Z axis pressing force Note5)

Maximum N 200

Allowable

inertia

Rating kg m2 0.025

Maximum 0.3

Pose repeatability Note6) X-Y direc- tion

mm 0.012 0.015

J3 (Z) mm 0.010

J4 (axis) deg 0.005

Ambient temperature Note7) 0 to 40

Mass kg 65 67 69

Tool wiring Input 8 points/Output 8 points, (total 20 cores)

Dedicated signal cable for multifunctional hand (Two cores + Power cable two cores)

Ethernet cable one cable (100BASE-TX, eight cores) Note8)

Tool pneumatic pipes Primary: 6 x two hoses, Secondary: 6 x eight hoses Note9)

Supply pressure MPa 0.510%

Protection specification Note10) Standard specification: IP20

Clean specification: ISO class 3 Note11)

Oil mist specification: IP65 Note12) Note13)

Painting color Light gray (Equivalent to Munsell: 0.6B7.6/0.2)

2-19 Standard specifications

2Robot arm

Note4) The value of the following movement which applied MvTune2 (high-speed movement mode) with the carrying mass of 2kg.

The cycle time may increase with the case where the positioning accuracy of the work etc. is necessary, or by the moving position.

Note5) This is the downwards pressing force that occurs at the end of the load when the maximum load is on board and the J1, J2 and J4 axis are in their resting state. Please operate at this level or below. When pressing for long periods of time, an excess load error may occur. Please operate in a manner that does not cause errors.

Note6) The pose repeatability details are given in Page 26, "2.2.1 Pose repeatability". Note7) Sets the robot's operating environmental temperature as parameter OLTMX. Corresponding to the environment, the con-

tinuous control action performance and the overload-protection function are optimized. (Refers to "Optimizing the over- load level" described in "Chapter 5 Functions set with parameters" of separate instruction manual/ Detailed explanations of functions and operations for details.)

Note8) The 8-wire cable designated for LAN wiring can also be used for backup wiring. Note9) The 6 secondary piping can be obtained with the electromagnetic valve (option). Details regarding the electromag-

netic valve (optional) are shown on Page 109, "(3) Solenoid valve set". Note10) The protection specification details are given in Page 38, "2.2.8 Protection specifications". Note11) The details of the clean specifications are described in Page 40, "2.2.9 Clean specifications". The conditions

necessary to guarantee cleanliness are as follows: clean room down flow 0.3 m/s or greater, robot internal suction of 60-140L/min and installation of an exhaust duct at the rear of the robots main base. A 8 joint is prepared at the rear of the base for suction.

Note12) Direct jet flow to the bellows section is not included. Note13) If you use the controller in oil mist or similar environments, use the controller protection box to protect the con-

troller from the operation environment. A robot equipped with the controller protection box as standard is available.

300

2 5

2Robot arm

Standard specifications 2-20

(3) RH-20FH series

Table 2-3 Standard specifications of robot arm

Item Unit Specifications

TypeNote1)

Note1) The table is joint writing on the general environment and clean and oil mist (IP65) specification. If the type ends in a letter C, this corresponds to the clean specification, and where it ends in a letter M, it corresponds to the mist specification. The type in which operating range of J3 axis (Z) is 350mm and 450mm are shown together.

RH-20FH8535/8545

RH-20FH8535C/8545C

RH-20FH8535M/8545M

RH-20FH10035/10045

RH-20FH10035C/10045C

RH-20FH10035M/10045M

Environment Blank: Standard specification

C: Clean specification

M: Oil mist specification

Installation posture On floor

Degree of freedom 4

Structure Horizontal, multiple-joint type

Drive system AC servo motor

Position detection method Absolute encoder

Motor capacity J1 750

J2 750

J3 (Z) 400

J4 (axis) 200

Brake J1, J2, J4: no brake, J3: with brake

Arm length 1 arm mm 525

2 arm mm 325 475

Max.reach radius( 1+ 2) mm 850 1,000

Operating range J1 deg 170

J2 deg 153

J3 (Z) mm

RH-20FH**35/**35C/**35M: 350 (-10 +340)

RH-20FH**45/**45C/**45M: 450 (-110 +340)

J4 (axis) deg 360

Speed of motion Note2)

Note2) The maximum speed is the value which applied MvTune2 (high-speed movement mode).

J1 deg/s 280

J2 deg/s 450

J3 (Z) mm/s 2,400

J4 (axis) deg/s 1,700

Maximum horizontal composite speed Note3)

Note3) At the maximum speed on the X-Y flat surface in the robot's control point, it is obtained with each speed of J1, J2, and J4. The control point is the position offset by the rated inertia from the flange.

mm/s 11,372 13,283

Cycle time Note4) sec 0.30 0.36

Load Rating kg

(N)

5

Maximum 20

Z axis pressing force Note5)

Maximum N 230

Allowable

inertia

Rating kg m2 0.065

Maximum 1.05 Note6)

Pose repeatability Note7) X-Y direc- tion

mm 0.015 0.020

J3 (Z) mm 0.010

J4 (axis) deg 0.005

Ambient temperature Note8) 0 to 40

Mass kg 75 77

Tool wiring Input 8 points/Output 8 points, (total 20 cores)

Dedicated signal cable for multifunctional hand (Two cores + Power cable two cores)

Ethernet cable one cable (100BASE-TX, eight cores) Note9)

Tool pneumatic pipes Primary: 6 x two hoses, Secondary: 6 x eight hoses Note10)

Supply pressure MPa 0.510%

Protection specification Note11) Standard specification: IP20

Clean specification: ISO class 3 Note12)

Oil mist specification: IP65 Note13) Note14)

Painting color Light gray (Equivalent to Munsell: 0.6B7.6/0.2)

2-21 Standard specifications

2Robot arm

Note4) The value of the following movement which applied MvTune2 (high-speed movement mode) with the carrying mass of 2kg.

The cycle time may increase with the case where the positioning accuracy of the work etc. is necessary, or by the moving position.

Note5) This is the downwards pressing force that occurs at the end of the load when the maximum load is on board and the J1, J2 and J4 axis are in their resting state. Please operate at this level or below. When pressing for long periods of time, an excess load error may occur. Please operate in a manner that does not cause errors.

Note6) When offset hand is used, the adjustment of moving speed and acceleration/deceleration speeds may be the Required. Refers to it, because the details is shown in Page 27, "2.2.2 Mass capacity".

Note7) The pose repeatability details are given in Page 26, "2.2.1 Pose repeatability". Note8) Sets the robot's operating environmental temperature as parameter OLTMX. Corresponding to the environment, the

continuous control action performance and the overload-protection function are optimized. (Refers to "Optimizing the overload level" described in "Chapter 5 Functions set with parameters" of separate instruction manual/ Detailed explanations of functions and operations for details.)

Note9) The 8-wire cable designated for LAN wiring can also be used for backup wiring. Note10) The 6 secondary piping can be obtained with the electromagnetic valve (option). Details regarding the electro-

magnetic valve (optional) are shown on Page 109, "(3) Solenoid valve set". Note11) The protection specification details are given in Page 38, "2.2.8 Protection specifications". Note12) The details of the clean specifications are described in Page 40, "2.2.9 Clean specifications". The conditions

necessary to guarantee cleanliness are as follows: clean room down flow 0.3 m/s or greater, robot internal suction of 60-140L/min and installation of an exhaust duct at the rear of the robots main base. A 8 joint is prepared at the rear of the base for suction.

Note13) Direct jet flow to the bellows section is not included. Note14) If you use the controller in oil mist or similar environments, use the controller protection box to protect the con-

troller from the operation environment. A robot equipped with the controller protection box as standard is avail- able.

300

2 5

2Robot arm

Standard specifications 2-22

(4) RH-3FHR series

Table 2-4 Standard specifications of robot arm

Item Unit Specifications

Type Note1)

Note1) The table is joint writing on the general environment and clean and waterproof (IP65) specification. If the type ends in a letter C, this corresponds to the clean specification, and where it ends in a letter W, it corresponds to the waterproof specification.

RH-3FHR3515 RH-3FHR3512C RH-3FHR3512W

Environment Standard specification Clean specification Waterproof specification

Installation posture Hanging

Degree of freedom 4

Structure Horizontal, multiple-joint type

Drive system AC servo motor

Position detection method Absolute encoder

Motor capacity J1 750

J2 200

J3 (Z) 200

J4 (axis) 100

Brake J1, J2, J4: no brake J3: with brake

Arm length 1 arm mm 175

2 arm mm 175

Max.reach radius( 1+ 2) mm 350

Operating range J1 deg 225

J2 deg 225

J3 (Z) mm 150 120

J4 (axis) deg 720

Speed of motion Note2)

Note2) The maximum speed is the value which applied MvTune2 (high-speed movement mode).

J1 deg/s 672

J2 deg/s 708

J3 (Z) mm/s 1,500

J4 (axis) deg/s 3,146

Maximum horizontal composite speed Note3)

Note3) At the maximum speed on the X-Y flat surface in the robot's control point, it is obtained with each speed of J1, J2, and J4. The control point is the position offset by the rated inertia from the flange. Although based on specified speed, speed drops generally. Refer to Page 36, "2.2.6 About moving speed at sin- gular point and near singular point. (RH-3FHR series)" for details.

mm/s 6,267

Cycle time Note4) sec 0.32

Load Rating kg

(N)

1

Maximum 3

Allowable

inertia

Rating kg m2 0.005

Maximum 0.05 Note5)

Pose repeatability Note6) X-Y direc- tion

mm 0.01

J3 (Z) mm 0.01

J4 (axis) deg 0.01

Ambient temperatureNote7) 0 40

Mass kg 24 28

Tool wiring Input 8 points/Output 8 points, eight spare wires

Tool pneumatic pipes Primary: 6 x two hoses, Secondary: 4 x eight hoses Note8)

Supply pressure MPa 0.510%

Protection specification Note9) General-purpose environment:

IP20

Clean: ISO class 5 Note10) Waterproof: IP65 Note11)

Painting color Not painting. Plating (silver)

2-23 Standard specifications

2Robot arm

2.1.2 The counter-force applied to the installation surface The counter-force applied to the installation surface for the strength design of the robot installation surface is shown.

Table 2-5 Value of each counter-force

Note4) The value of the following movement which applied MvTune2 (high-speed movement mode) with the carrying mass of 1kg. The cycle time may increase with the case where the positioning accuracy of the work etc. is necessary, or by

the moving position.

The robot's moving time is influenced by the posture etc. As reference, the reduction method of cycle time is shown in Page 33, " [Supplementary explanation 1]: The setting which shortens execution time".

Note5) When offset hand is used, the adjustment of moving speed and acceleration/deceleration speeds may be the Required. Refers to it, because the details is shown in Page 27, "2.2.2 Mass capacity".

Note6) The pose repeatability details are given in Page 26, "2.2.1 Pose repeatability". Note7) Sets the robot's operating environmental temperature as parameter OLTMX. Corresponding to the environment, the

continuous control action performance and the overload-protection function are optimized. (Refers to "Optimizing the overload level" described in "Chapter 5 Functions set with parameters" of separate instruction manual/ Detailed explanations of functions and operations for details.)

Note8) The 4 secondary piping can be obtained with the electromagnetic valve (option). Details regarding the electro- magnetic valve (optional) are shown on Page 109, "(3) Solenoid valve set".

Note9) The protection specification details are given in Page 38, "2.2.8 Protection specifications". Note10) The details of the clean specifications are described in Page 40, "2.2.9 Clean specifications". Protection of the

cleanness of the robot is required if the down flow in a clean room is 0.3 m/s or more and robot internal suction is 30-50 L/min. A 8 joint is prepared at the base rear part for suction.

Note11) Direct jet flow to the bellows section is not included.

Item Unit Value

RH-6FH series Falls moment: ML Nm 1,640 Torsion moment: MT Nm 710 Horizontal translation force: FH N 1,653 Vertical translation force: FV N 2,318

RH-12FH/20FH series Falls moment: ML Nm 3,190 Torsion moment: MT Nm 1,840 Horizontal translation force: FH N 2,240 Vertical translation force: FV N 2,500

RH-3FHR series Falls moment: ML Nm 380 Torsion moment: MT Nm 410 Horizontal translation force: FH N 920 Vertical translation force: FV N 570

300

2 5

2Robot arm

Standard specifications 2-24

2.1.3 RH-3FHR installation stage RH-3FHR is the robot which hangs. Please manufacture the stage by the customer as shown below, and install

the robot.

As an example of the installation stage, the stage using the iron (cheap) and the stage using the aluminum (easy to process) are shown. Since the product made from the aluminum has strengthened reinforcement, both have the almost same weight.

(1) Example which uses the iron material

Fig.2-1 Installation stage (Example of iron-material use)

NO1 J1255

NO2 J1NO1410

4-10

60604.5t

60603.2t

4-3.2t

44-3.2t

501003.2t

4-

24-

22

900 450

170170(60)

9 0 0

45 0

8 0

80

25 0

220

240

24 0

7 6 0

16 00

7 8 0

Note1) The gross weight of this stage is about 200kg.

Note2) This stage is an example. Please design based on the conditions of the system.

Note3) Fixing the stage to the floor by anchor etc. If the center of gravity of the stage is in the high position, the stage may fall by movement of the robot.

* 1 )

* 1 )

The No1 arm end maximum operating range The radius 255 from J1 axis center

The No2 arm end maximum operating range The radius 410 from J1 axis center. (The No1 arm is included)

4-10 hole

(Robot installation bolt)

60x60 iron rectangular lumber 4.5t

The frame without specification is 60x60 iron rectangular lumber. 3.2t

4-reinforcing plate 3.2t of iron

4x4-reinforcing plate 3.2t of iron

50x10 steel pipe 3.2t

4-caster (Don't use united with adjuster)

2x4-adjuster

2x anchors

The center is reinforced as shown in the above.

*1) Please arrange operations height based on peripheral equipment, such as the work-piece and the hand.

2-25 Standard specifications

2Robot arm

(2) Example which uses the aluminum

Fig.2-2 Installation stage (Example of aluminum frame use)

NO1 J1255

NO2 J1NO1410

4-10

6060

8080

4-3.2t

64-3.2t

4-

24-

22

900

450 170170(80)

9 0 0

4 5 0

80 80

2 5 0

220

240

24 0

7 6 0

1 6 0 0

78 0

Note1) The gross weight of this stage is about 200kg.

Note2) This stage is an example. Please design based on the conditions of the system.

Note3) Fixing the stage to the floor by anchor etc. If the center of gravity of the stage is in the high position, the stage may fall by movement of the robot.

* 1 )

* 1 )

*1) Please arrange operations height based on peripheral equipment, such as the work-piece and the hand.

The No1 arm end maximum operating range The radius 255 from J1 axis center

The No2 arm end maximum operating range The radius 410 from J1 axis center. (The No1 arm is included)

4-10 hole (Robot installation bolt)

4-reinforcing plate 3.2t of iron

6x4-reinforcing plate 3.2t of iron

60x60 aluminum frame

The frame without specification is 80x80 aluminum frame.

The center is reinforced as shown in the above.

4-caster (Don't use united with adjuster)

2x4-adjuster

x2 anchors

2 Robot arm

Definition of specifications 2-26

2.2 Definition of specifications

The accuracy of pose repeatability mentioned in catalogs and in the specification manual is defined as follows.

2.2.1 Pose repeatability For this robot, the pose repeatability is given in accordance with JIS B 8432 (Pose repeatability). Note that the value is based on 100 measurements (although 30 measurements are required according to JIS).

Caution The specified "pose repeatability" is not guaranteed to be satisfied under the following conditions.

[1] Operation pattern factors 1) When an operation that approaches from different directions and orientations are included in rela-

tion to the teaching position during repeated operations

2) When the speed at teaching and the speed at execution are different

[2] Load fluctuation factor 1) When work is present/absent in repeated operations

[3] Disturbance factor during operation 1) Even if approaching from the same direction and orientation to the teaching position, when the

power is turned OFF or a stop operation is performed halfway

[4] Temperature factors 1) When the operating environment temperature changes

2) When accuracy is required before and after a warm-up operation

[5] Factors due to differences in accuracy definition 1) When accuracy is required between a position set by a numeric value in the robot's internal coor-

dinate system and a position within the actual space

2) When accuracy is required between a position generated by the pallet function and a position within the actual space

[6] Positioning movement near the singular point (RH-3FHR)

2-27

Robot arm

2.2.2 Mass capacity The robot's mass capacity is expressed solely in terms of mass, but even for tools and works of similar mass, eccentric loads will have some restrictions When designing the tooling or when selecting a robot, consider the fol- lowing issues.

(1) The tooling should have the value less or equal than the smaller of the allowable moment of inertia found in Page 16, "2.1.1 Basic specifications".

(2) Fig. 2-3 to Fig. 2-6 shows the distribution dimensions for the center of gravity in the case where the vol- ume of the load is relatively small. Use this figure as a reference when designing the tooling. Please use the robot in the allowable moment of inertia of maximum moment of inertia shown in Fig. 2-3 to Fig. 2-6.

[Caution] The mass capacity is greatly influenced by the operating speed of the robot and the motion posture. Even if you are within the allowable range mentioned previously, a vibration, an overload or generate an overcurrnt alarm could occur. In such cases, please reduce acceleration and deceleration (Accel com- mand) speeds and movement speed (Ovrd command). Although the standard value to reduce is 50% for each command, please adjust corresponding to the movement posture. Refer to separate "Instruction Manual/Detailed Explanation of Functions and Operations" for details of each command. Moreover, if hand/workpiece parameters are not set exactly, the similar phenomenon will be easier to occur.

[Caution] Refer to Page 29, "2.2.3 Relationships Among Mass Capacity, Speed, and Acceleration/Deceleration Speed", and set the values of the mass, magnitude, and distance to the centroid of a tool and a workpiece to parameters. If parameters are not set exactly, the lifetime of reduction gears, a belt, etc. is affected.

[Caution] The overhang amount of the load, such as the mass capacity and the allowable moment of inertia defined in this section, are dynamic limit values determined by the capacity of the motor that drives axes or the capacity of the speed reducer. Therefore, it does not guarantee the accuracy on all areas of tooling. Guaranteed accuracy is measured from the center point of the mechanical interface surface. Please note that if the point of operation is kept away from the mechanical interface surface by long and low-rigid tooling, the positioning accuracy may deteriorate or may cause vibration. Note that the allowable offset value (Z direction) from the lower edge of the shaft to the position of center of gravity is 100 mm.

[Caution] Even within the allowable range previously mentioned, an overload alarm may be generated if an ascend- ing operation continues at a micro-low speed. In such a case, it is necessary to increase the ascending speed.

[Caution] This robot will restrict speed automatically by internal controls when the load center-of-gravity position separates from the shaft center. Refer to Page 29, "2.2.3 Relationships Among Mass Capacity, Speed, and Acceleration/Deceleration Speed" in detail. The allowance distance (allowance offset amount) from the center of the shaft to the gravity center of loading weight are shown below. RH-6FH: less than 140mm, RH-12FH: less than 240mm, RH-20FH: less than 320mm, RH-3FHR: less than 50mm.

Fig.2-3 Position of center of gravity for loads (for loads with comparatively small volume): RH-6FH series

200mm (3kg)

mm

60mm(3kg)

140mm(6kg)

Unit: m

Shaft center

Allowable moment of inertia

Maximum

Rating

200 (less than 3kg)

Robot arm

2-28

Fig.2-4 Position of center of gravity for loads (for loads with comparatively small volume): RH-12FH series

Fig.2-5 Position of center of gravity for loads (for loads with comparatively small volume): RH-20FH series

Fig.2-6 Position of center of gravity for loads (for loads with comparatively small volume): RH-3FHR series

mm

85mm(3kg)

150mm(12kg)

170mm(10kg)

240mm(5kg)

Unit: m

Shaft center

Allowable moment of inertia

Maximum

Rating

(less than 5kg)

mm

110mm(5kg)

230mm(20kg)

260mm(15kg)

300mm(12kg)

320mm(10kg)

Unit: m

Shaft center

Allowable moment of inertia

Maximum

Rating

(less than 10kg)

mm

20mm(3kg)

40mm(1kg)

50mm(1kg)

Unit: mm

Shaft center

Allowable moment of inertia

Maximum

Rating

50mm (less than 1kg)

2-29

Robot arm

2.2.3 Relationships Among Mass Capacity, Speed, and Acceleration/Deceleration Speed This robot automatically sets the optimum acceleration and deceleration speeds and maximum speed, according to the load capacity and size that have been set, and operates using these automatically set speeds. To achieve that, it is necessary to correctly set the actual load data (mass and size of hand and work) to be used. However, vibration, overheating and errors such as excessive margin of error and overload may occur, depending on the robot operation pattern or ambient temperature.

In this case, reduce the speed and the acceleration and deceleration rate before continuing to use. This is done by accessing the robot program and adjusting the speed settings (Ovrd) and the acceleration and deceleration set- tings (Accel).

If a setting is performed in such a way that it falls below the mounted load, the life span of the mechanism ele- ments used in the robot may be shortened. In the case of a work requiring a high degree of accuracy, set up the load correctly and use the robot by lowering the ratios of the acceleration and deceleration speeds.

(1) Setting Load Capacity and Size (Hand Conditions) Set up the capacity and size of the hand with the "HNDDAT*" parameter (optimum acceleration/deceleration setting parameter), and set up the capacity and size of the work with the "WRKDAT*" parameter. Numbers 0 to 8 can be used for the asterisk (*) part. Designate the "HNDDAT*" and "WRKDAT*" parameters to be used using the "LoadSet" command in a program. For more details, refer to the separate "Instruction Manual/Detailed Explanation of Functions and Operations." It is the same meaning as "LoadSet 0.0" if not using the "LoadSet".

Note) The position of the center of gravity is located at the center of the surface at the bottom of the shaft. Set the X, Y and Z center of gravity positions for the tool coordinate directions (the Z center of gravity position will be a plus for downward directions).

2.2.4 Vibrations at the Tip of the Arm during Low-Speed Operation of the Robot Vibrations at the tip of the arm may increase substantially during the low-speed operation of the robot, depending on the combination of robot operation, hand mass and hand inertia. This problem occurs when the vibration count specific to the robot arm and the vibration count of the arm driving force are coming close to each other. These vibrations at the tip of the arm can be reduced by taking the following measures:

1) Change the robot's operating speed by using the Ovrd command. 2) Change and move the teaching points of the robot. 3) Change the hand mass and hand inertia.

Hand mass kg

size X mm

size Y mm

size Z mm

center-of-gravity position X mm

center-of-gravity position Y mm

center-of-gravity position Z mm

RH-6FH series

HNDDAT* 6.0 99.0 99.0 76.0 0.0 0.0 38.0

WRKDAT* 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

RH-12FH series

HNDDAT* 12.0 165.0 165.0 64.0 0.0 0.0 16.0

WRKDAT* 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

RH-20FH series

HNDDAT* 20.0 165.0 165.0 109.0 0.0 0.0 37.0

WRKDAT* 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

RH-3FHR series

HNDDAT* 3.0 76.0 76.0 58.0 0.0 0.0 24.0

WRKDAT* 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

Robot arm

2-30

2.2.5 Vibration of shaft (J3 axis) position and arm end Vibrations at the tip of the arm may increase substantially during operation under the shaft position near the

low end or the high end of the robot, depending on the combination of hand mass and hand inertia. This problem occurs according to that inertia, because the distance from the shaft support section to the shaft end becomes long. When this vibration affects the robot's operations, please change operating speed etc. like the above Page 29, "2.2.4 Vibrations at the Tip of the Arm during Low-Speed Operation of the Robot".

(1) Relationship Between Mass Capacity and Speed A function to optimize the maximum speed of each axis according to the setting value of the load capacity will be activated (Refer to Fig. 2-7).

However, this function does not work with the following load mass: RH-6FH/12FH series: 3kg or less RH-20FH series: 5kg or less RH-3FHR series: 1kg or less

When the load mass is changed to following, the maximum speed is compensated according to the load mass: RH-6FH/12FH series: exceed 3kg RH-20FH series: exceed 5kg RH-3FHR series: exceed 1kg

[CAUTION] Depending on the operation pattern, the speed and/or acceleration/deceleration at the front edge may not be parallel with the speed and the rate of change of acceleration/deceleration specified in a program.

Fig.2-7 Automatic compensation of speed

100

68

0 0

3

6

(%)

RH-6FH series

M ax

im u m

s pe

e d

ra ti o ( % )

Load capacity (kg)

RH-12FH series RH-20FH series

100

50

0 0

20

(%)

5 10 15

100

52

0 0

6

12

(%)

3 9M ax

im u m

s pe

e d

ra ti o ( % )

Load capacity (kg)

M ax

im u m

s pe

e d

ra ti o ( % )

Load capacity (kg)

100

80

0 0

1 3

RH-3FHR series

M ax

im u m

s pe

e d

ra ti o (

%)

Load capacity (kg)

2-31

Robot arm

(2) Relationship Between Height of Shaft (J3 Axis) and Acceleration/Deceleration Speed A function to optimize the acceleration/deceleration speed according to the height of the shaft (Refer to Fig. 2-8, Fig. 2-9) will be activated. This function is invalid if the shaft (axis J3) operates at a position above P3 in Fig. 2-8. Acceleration/deceleration is compensated for at a position below P3 in Fig. 2-8 if the position of the center of gravity of the load is located at the front edge of the shaft.

This function contains both a standard acceleration and deceleration pattern and a high acceleration and deceler- ation pattern, both of which can be selected in the parameters. The original settings are set to the standard acceleration and deceleration pattern, which enables operation while keeping vibration at the shaft tip (including residual vibration) to a minimum. Users are also able to select the high acceleration and deceleration pattern and operate the robot at high speed. When doing so, users should make sure that additional vibration will not have a negative impact on work carried out by the robot. Where necessary the pattern should be changed, allowing the robot to be used in the most effective way.

The relevant parameter names and their set values are shown below. For more details about parameters and how to change them, please refer to the separate Instruction Manual/Detailed Explanation of Functions and Opera- tions.

Parameter name.....................MAPMODE (acceleration and deceleration optimization pattern selected)

Set value and function.........0: Standard acceleration and deceleration pattern (original setting)

1: High acceleration and deceleration pattern The RH-3FHR series have standard acceleration-and-deceleration mode only.

Fig.2-8 Area in which acceleration/deceleration speed is compensated

Table 2-6 Area in which acceleration/deceleration speed is compensated

Type J3 axis stroke (mm) Compensation area

P2 to P3Stroke length P1(Upper end) P2(Lower end)

RH-6FH series Note1)

Note1) When stroke of J3 axis is 200mm this function is not operate.

340 333 -7 -7 to 133

RH-12FH/20FH series 350 340 -10 -10 to 240

450 340 -110 -110 to 155

RH-3FHR series 150 -583 -733 -733 to -643

P3

(J3)

P1

P2 Shaft (J axis)

Area in which speed and acceleration/deceleration speed are not compensated

Area in which speed and acceleration/deceleration speed are compensated

Robot arm

2-32

Fig.2-9 Automatic compensation of acceleration/deceleration speed

100

50

0 333 133 -7

mm

(%)

73

2

100

50

0 333 133 -7

mm

(%)

73

34

J3 axis (Z) stroke 340mm

A c c e le

ra ti o n / de

c e le

ra -

ti o n

sp ee

d ra

ti o (%

)

Shaft position (mm)

(Standard Acceleration/deceleration speed)

A c c e le

ra ti o n / de

c e le

ra -

ti o n

sp ee

d ra

ti o (%

)

Shaft position (mm)

(High acceleration and deceleration rate) J3 axis (Z) stroke 340mm

100

65

0 340 240 -110

mm

(%)

0

20

140

38

-10

100

65

0 340 240

mm

(%)

0

61

140 -10

-110

58

100

0 340

mm

(%)

0

50

155 70

30 41

-10 -110

100

0 340

mm

(%)

0

50

155 70

20 37

-10 -110

J3 (Z) 340mm( ) J3 (Z) 340mm( )

RH-12FH series

J3 (Z) 340mm( ) J3 (Z) 340mm( )

RH-20FH series

RH-6FH series

A cc

e le

ra ti o n / de

c e le

ra -

ti o n s

pe e d

ra ti o (%

)

Shaft position (mm)

(Standard Acceleration/deceleration speed) axis (Z) stroke 350/450mm

A c c el

e ra

ti o n / de

c e le

ra -

ti o n s

pe e d

ra ti o (%

)

Shaft position (mm)

(Standard Acceleration/deceleration speed) axis (Z) stroke 350/450mm

A c c e le

ra ti o n / de

c e le

ra -

ti o n s

pe e d

ra ti o (%

)

Shaft position (mm)

axis (Z) stroke 350/450mm

A c c e le

ra ti o n / de

c e le

ra -

ti o n s

p ee

d r

at io

(% )

Shaft position (mm)

axis (Z) stroke 350/450mm

(Standard Acceleration/deceleration speed)

(Standard Acceleration/deceleration speed)

Note) The high acceleration-and-deceleration pattern of the type without illustration of the high acceleration-and- deceleration pattern is the same as the standard acceleration-and-deceleration pattern.

100

24 36

0 -583 -643 -675 -713

mm

-733

J3 axis (Z) stroke: 150mm (Standard Acceleration/deceleration speed)

RH-3FHR series

A c c e le

ra ti o n / de

c e le

ra -

ti o n s

pe e d

ra ti o (%

)

Shaft position(mm)

2-33

Robot arm

(3) Relation between offset length and the maximum speed A function to optimize the maximum speed of each axis according to the offset length will be activated. (Refer to Fig. 2-10)

Fig.2-10 Relationship of the offset length and maximum velocity

[Supplementary explanation 1]: The setting which shortens execution time The execution time can be improved by using the following methods.

1) Perform continuous path operation using the Cnt command. 2) Control the optimum acceleration/deceleration using the Oadl command. 3) Control the optimum speed using the Spd command. 4) Setting a larger value in the optimum acceleration/deceleration adjustment rate parameter: JADL. (Maxi-

mum 100) The moving time can be shortened by setting a larger value in the optimum acceleration/deceleration adjustment rate parameter (JADL). In this robot, the acceleration/deceleration speed is initialized to allow continuous moving with a short wait time (setting of B in the Fig. 2-11). This setting is suited for continuous operations that have a short tact time, such as palletizing work. Conversely, if quick moves (short moving time) are required, such as L/UL work on machined parts, the acceleration/ deceleration speed can be increased by initial setting (setting of A in the Fig. 2-11). However, please note that some setting values of acceleration/deceleration speed tend to cause overload and overheat errors. In such a case, extend the wait time, reduce the acceleration/deceleration speed, or decrease the moving speed.

100

50

0 0 30 140

mm

(%)

60

76

100

70

0 0 20 140

mm

(%)

40

40

Offset length (mm) Offset length (mm)

100

0 0

mm

(%)

92

91

150

100

0 0

mm

(%)

60

26016060

20

Offset length (mm) Offset length (mm)

M ax

im u m

s pe

e d

ra ti o ( % )

M ax

im u m

s pe

e d

ra ti o ( % )

M ax

im um

s pe

e d

ra ti o ( % )

M ax

im um

s pe

e d

ra ti o ( % )

Robot arm

2-34

Fig.2-11 Relationship between Acceleration/deceleration Speed and Tact Time (Conceptual Drawing)

5) Move without changing the posture. (RH-3FHR series) The robot's moving time is influenced not only by the size of moving distance but by posture change. The example is shown in Fig. 2-12. When moving changing the posture (left side of the figure), the movement distance is shorter, but moving time may become long conversely. Conversely, When moving without changing the posture, moving time may become shorter (right side of the figure).

Fig.2-12 Moving time by posture change (Conceptual Drawing)

Tact time/ 1 cycle Operation time

Wait time B

A

Increased acceleration/deceleration speed

x Accel instruction [%] x parameter JADL [%]

Acceleration/deceleration speed [m/sec2] = optimum acceleration/deceleration speed [m/sec2]

+Y

+X

+Y

+X

Current position Left hand posture

Locus

Moving with posture change

Moving without posture change

The robot's posture (arm)

The robot's posture (arm)

Current position

Left hand posture

Target position Right hand posture

Target position

Left hand posture

Locus

2-35

Robot arm

(4) Time to reach the position repeatability When using this robot, the time to reach the position repeatability may be prolonged due to the effect of residual vibration at the time of stopping. If this happens, take the following measures:

1) Change the operation position of the Z axis to the location near the top as much as possible. 2) Increase the operation speed prior to stopping. 3) When positioning the work near the bottom edge of the Z axis, if no effectiveness is achieved in step "2)"

above, perform operation (robot path: O A C). In the case of operation (robot path: O B

C), residual vibration may occur. (Refer to Fig. 2-13.)

Fig.2-13 Recommended path when positioning at the bottom edge of the Z axis

O

A

B 1 5 0m

m

M o re

t h an

1 5 0 m

m

Robot arm

2-36

2.2.6 About moving speed at singular point and near singular point. (RH-3FHR series) The robot of our company has memorized the teaching position and calculates of linear interpolation movement

using the position data in the XYZ coordinate system. Even if it is the same position data, the robot can take two or more postures. For example, if X coordinate value is "0" and Y coordinate value is also "0", the rotation angle of J1 axis is not decided uniquely. This position is called singular point, and positioning or passing with XYZ JOG and linear interpolation will not be performed. And, even though based on the specified speed, when moving near singular point with linear interpolation , the error occurs , because the J1 axis must rotate at the big speed. ("a)" of Fig. 2- 14) However, in RH-3FHR series, speed was lowered automatically and it has the function which can be passed without the error. In addition, this function can be changed valid/invalid by setting of parameter:SPDOPT, and SpdOpt command. Refer to the separate manual "Detailed explanations of functions and operations" for details. And, the area in R2 shown in "b)" of Fig. 2-14 is the singular point, and positioning and passage with linear interpolation movement cannot be performed. In joint interpolation movement, positioning and passage are possible. It is in valid condition at shipping.

Fig.2-14 The singular point and the speed regulation near the singular point

J2

+Y

+X

J2

J4

J4

J1

Singular point

The J1 axis rotates at high speed.

(X=0,Y=0)

J2

+Y

+X

J2

J4

J4

J1

R1

R2

b) Speed regulation area

a) The singular point and the movement near the singular point

Speed regulation area (R1-R2)

V

The range of the speed regulation area RH-3FHR series

R1=240.0mm R2=1.0mm

Moving near of the singular point by linear interpolation.

c) Speed change in the speed regulation area

A

B

C

A

B

C

A: Starts the slowdown if robot goes into the speed regulation area.

B: Accelerates slowly towards going out. C: If robot goes out completely from speed regulation

area, it returns to specification speed.

Speed

Time

Speed regulation area

2-37

Robot arm

2.2.7 Collision detection This series have the "collision detection function" which detects the abnormalities by the collision of the robot arm, and the initial setting has set this function as the enable to suppress damage to the minimum. Although the enable/disable of this function can be changed by parameter: COL and command: ColChk, you should use in valid condition of this function for protection of the robot and of the peripheral equipment.

The abnormalities are detected by the robot's kinetics model, presuming torque necessary for movement at any time. Therefore, the setting parameter (HNDDAT*, WRKDAT*) of the hand and the work piece conditions should be right. And, it may be detected as the collision in movement as speed and motor torque are changed rapidly. (for example, the movement near the place of the origin by linear interpolation, the reversal movement, the cold con- dition, the operation after long term stoppage)

In such a case, by adjusting the value of the setting parameter (COLLVL, COLLVLJG) of the collision detection level according to actual use environment, the sensitivity of collision detection can be optimized and the damage risk can be reduced further. And, in the operation after the low temperature or long term stoppage, please operate by accustoming at low speed (warm-up), or use the warm-up operation mode.

Refer to the separate instruction manual "Detailed explanations of functions and operations" for details of related

parameter.

Table 2-7 Factory-shipments condition

JOG operation Automatic

RH-6FH/12FH/20FH series Valid Invalid

RH-3FHR series Valid Valid

Robot arm

2-38

2.2.8 Protection specifications (1) Types of protection specifications

The robot arm has protection specifications that comply with the IEC Standards. The protection specifications and applicable fields are shown in Table 2-8.

Table 2-8 Protection specifications and applicable fields

Use the controller protection box to protect the controller from the environment when the controller will be used in the environment such as the oil mist shown in the Table 2-8.

The IEC IP symbols define the degree of protection against solids and fluids, and do not indicate a protective structure against the entry of oil.

The IEC standard is described by the following "Information" And, the corrosion of the rust etc. may occur to the robot with the liquids.

Information

The IEC IP20

It indicates the protective structure that prevents an iron ball 12 0 +0.05mm diameter, which is being pressed

with the power of 3.1 kg10%, from going through the opening in the outer sheath of the supplied equipment.

The IEC IP65

Protection against water infiltration as specified in IP65 indicates a protective structure that is not harmfully affected when 12.55% liters of water is supplied from a test device at a position approx. 3m away in various directions and a water pressure of 30kPa at the nozzle section. The water is filled one minute per 1m2 of test device surface area for a total of three minutes.

Type Protection

specifications (IEC Standards value)

Classification Applicable field Remarks

RH-6FHxx20/xx34

RH-12FHxx35/xx45

RH-20FHxx35/xx45

RH-3FHR3515

Robot arm: IP20 General-purpose environment speci- fications

General assembly Slightly dusty environment

RH-6FHxx20M/xx34M

RH-6FHxx20-SM/xx34-SM Note1)

RH-12FHxx35M/xx45M

RH-12FHxx35M-SM/

xx45M-SM Note1)

RH-20FHxx35M/xx45M

RH-20FHxx35M-SM/

xx45M-SM Note1)

Note1) The "-SM" specification comes with the controller protection box as standard.

Robot arm: IP65 (Direct jet flow to the bellows section is not included.)

Oil mist specifica- tions

Machine tool (cutting) Machine shop with heavy oil mist Dusty work shop

Note that if the cutting machine is using abra- sive materials, the robot's life will be shortened.

RH-3FHR3512W Robot arm: IP65 (Direct jet flow to the bellows section is not included.)

Waterproof specifi- cations

Food processing (handling) The work shops which requires washing of a robot arm.

CAUTION

2-39

Robot arm

(2) About the use with the bad environment The protection specifications robot has protection methods that conform to IEC's IP65 standards. (Direct jet flow to the bellows section is not included.) It has protection structure designed to prevent harmful effects caused by splashing water coming from various directions, as the robot is operating. (Direct jet flow to the bellows section is not included.)

Recommended usage conditions 1) The robot is designed for use in combination with machining device. 2) Robot's protection performance can be improved by pressurizing its interior. If you use a robot in an envi-

ronment where oil mist is present, it is recommended that the interior of the robot be pressurized to ensure its reliability over a long period of time. Use the provided 8 joint (AIR PURGE) to supply dry air for pressurizing. The 8 joint (AIR PURGE) can be found at the base rear part of the robot arm.

Table 2-9 Specification of the dry air for pressurization

3) We are confirming examining with the cutting oil, and satisfying protection specification. Our warranty does not cover damages or failure resulting from the robot being operated in any environment where other cutting oils than those listed in the table are used (except cutting oils with respect to which the robot's compatibil- ity with the protection specification is verified through our operability evaluation) or where the robot body may be directly splashed with water, oil or dust in quantities larger than stated in the protection specifica- tion.

4) Take measures so that the robot will not be exposed to water, oil and/or chips for a long period of time. 5) The packing gets deteriorated with the passage of time and must be replaced as required. Table 2-10 pro-

vides guidelines for replacing the packing.

Table 2-10 Packing replacement guideline

Failure to replace deteriorated packing permits water or oil to enter the interior of the robot, possibly causing it to become inoperable.

Packing required and liquid gasket used therewith are available from dealer.

Also, entrained water droplets lead to the formation of rust on the robot, but would not usually affect the robot's ability to operate normally.

The warranty is invalid for any faults that occur when the robot is used under the following conditions.

Also, if the cover and/or other parts are damaged by interferences caused by the peripheral devices and the robot, the protection specification (seal performance, etc.) may be degraded. Therefore, please pay extra attention when handling the robot.

Refer to Page 229, "6.2 Working environment".

1) In surroundings that generate inflammable gases or corrosive gasses. 2) Atmosphere of the mist containing polish liquid etc. 3) Atmosphere in which the water, the oil, and the dust exceeding protection specification fall on the robot arm

directly. 4) Pressurization by the dry air exceeding the specification of Table 2-9.

Item Dew point Pressure

Specification The atmospheric pressure dew point is -

20 degree or less.

0 to 3kPa

Environment Whether or not robot is

pressurized When packing must be replaced

General environment Not pressurized Note1)

Note1) The pressurization inside the robot arm is unnecessary in general environment and clean room environ- ment.

When signs of cracking or peeling are noted in the packing.Clean room Not pressurized Note1)

Oil mist Pressurized

Not pressurized When removing and installing the cover.

Robot arm

2-40

2.2.9 Clean specifications (1) Types of clean specifications

The robot arm with clean specification is made by order. Please check the delivery schedule.

Table 2-11 Clean specifications

Precautions for use 1) A 8 VACUUM coupling is provided in the base section of the robot arm for vacuum inside the robot arm.

(Refer to Fig. 2-57 or Fig. 2-58) When using the robot, connect this coupling with the vacuum generating valve (Refer to Table 2-12) and vacuum pump (furnished by the customer).

2) To suck in the robot arm, use the vacuum generator of the specification shown in following a) and b). a) When using the vacuum generator

Table 2-12 Specifications of vacuum generation valve (Confirmed in our company

b) When using the vacuum pump Assure the vacuum flow rate of RH-6FH series: 30-50L/min, RH-12FH/20FH series: 60-140L/min, and RH-3FHR series: 3-5L/min . And, secure the exhaust course from the pump not to affect the power sup- ply and the cleanness for the vacuum pumps. RH-12FH/20FH has two VACUUM couplings. Please be sure to suck in using both of couplings.

Type Degree of cleanliness Internal suction Remarks

RH-6FHxx20C/xx34C

RH-12FHxx35C/xx45C

RH-20FHxx35C/xx45C

ISO class 3 Note1)

Note1) The conditions necessary to guarantee cleanliness are as follows: clean room down flow 0.3 m/s or greater, robot internal suction of RH-6FH series: 30-50L/min RH-12FH/20FH series: 60-140L/min, and installation of an exhaust duct at the rear of the robots main base. A 8 joint is prepared at the rear of the base for suction.

Suck the inside of robot arm with

vacuum pump. (prepared by cus- tomer)

Use it in the clean room with the

down flow (flow velocity 0.3 m/s

above).

The use of a vacuum generating valve

is recommended.

RH-3FHR3512C ISO class 5 Note2)

Note2) The conditions necessary to guarantee cleanliness are as follows: clean room down flow 0.3 m/s or greater, robot internal suction of 3-5L/min. A 8 joint is prepared at the rear of the base for suction.

Type Maker Air pressure Note1)

Note1) It is the vacuum pump maker's written specification.

Quantity

MEDT 14 KOGANEI CORPORATION Vacuum rate: 90.0 L/min(ANR) RH-6FH series : 1 RH-12FH/20FH series : 2

ME05 KOGANEI CORPORATION Vacuum rate: 6.3 L/min(ANR) RH-3FHR series : 1

2-41

Robot arm

3) The ventilation duct is attached to the robot arm rear (refer to Fig. 2-15). As the Z axis moves up and down the volume of the bellows varies, and air is sucked in and released out of the robots ventilation duct opening. Be sure to locate the ventilation ducts opening in a position that will not affect the robots clean- liness. Furthermore, whilst it is only a small amount, internal suction results in external air flows into the robot through the ventilation ducts opening, and therefore the following two points should be considered when deciding where to locate the ventilation ducts opening.

The opening should be facing downwards The opening should not be located in the vicinity of dust/dirt or liquids, etc.

(Recommended cleanliness of surrounding area: less than ISO class 5)

Fig.2-15 Installation of Ventilation Duct

4) When using the optional electromagnetic valve set, we recommend using the primary pipings spare piping (6 air hose) to release the exhaust fumes. Please take care as leaking exhaust fumes inside the robot may have an impact on the robots cleanliness.

Robot base

Ventilation duct

Opening

Internal suction

Machine cable

Robot arm

Names of each part of the robot 2-42

2.3 Names of each part of the robot

Fig.2-16 Names of each part of the robot (Floor installation type)

2

J4

J2

J1

J3

A

View A

Note 1) The operation method of the brake release switch. The brake of J3 axis can be released with this switch and the enabling switch of T/B. The brake is released in an off-and-on way. Please be sure to perform brake release operation by two-person operations. Always assign an operator other than the switch operator to prevent the arm from dropping. This operation must be carried out with the switch operator giving signals.

When releasing the brake the J3 axis will drop. Be sure to perform brake release operation by two- person operations.

(1) One person supports so that the J3 axis may not drop. (2) The one more person pushes the brake release switch of the robot arm, in the

condition that the enabling switch of T/B is turned on. Only when both switches are pressed, the brake is released in an off-and-on way.

CAUTION

Note1)

Brake release switch

No.1 arm

No.2 arm

J1 axis

J2 axis

Robot base

J3 axis

Shaft

J4 axis

T/B

Enabling switch

(Hold down to the left or the right.)

Brake release switch

2-43 Names of each part of the robot

Robot arm

Fig.2-17 Names of each part of the robot (Hanging installation type)

J4

J2

J3

J1

2

No.1 arm

J2-axis

Base

(Rear)

J1-axis

Brake release switch

No.2 arm

Shaft

J3-axis

J4-axis

Note 1) The operation method of the brake release switch. The brake of J3 axis can be released with this switch and the enabling switch of T/B. (RH-3FHR series: J3 axis) Please be sure to perform brake release operation by two-person operations. Always assign an operator other than the switch operator to prevent the arm from dropping. This operation must be carried out with the switch operator giving signals.

When releasing the brake the J3 axis will drop. Be sure to perform brake release operation by two- person operations.

(1) One person supports so that the J3 axis may not drop. (2) The one more person pushes the brake release switch of the robot arm, in the

condition that the enabling switch of T/B is turned on. Only when both switches are pressed, the brake is released in an off-and-on way.

CAUTION

T/B

Enabling switch

(Hold down to the left or the right.)

Note 1)

Robot arm

Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-44

2.4 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram

2.4.1 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram (RH-6FH series) (1) Standard Specification

Fig.2-18 Outside dimensions of RH-6FH35xx

340mm (200mm stroke) 480mm (340mm stroke)

*5)

Note *1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery. *2) Indicates screw holes (M4 depth 6mm) for fixing user wiring/piping. Six places on both-sides of No.2 arm, Two

places on front surface. *3) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *4) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *5) Required space to installing/removing the cover.

Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.

Note) Refer to Fig. 2-52 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.

2-45 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram

Robot arm

Fig.2-19 Operating range diagram of RH-6FH35xx

Installation surface

Robot arm

Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-46

Fig.2-20 Outside dimensions of RH-6FH45xx

340mm (200mm stroke) 480mm (340mm stroke)

*5)

Note *1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery. *2) Indicates screw holes (M4 depth 6mm) for fixing user wiring/piping. Six places on both-sides of No.2 arm, Two

places on front surface. *3) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *4) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *5) Required space to installing/removing the cover.

Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.

Note) Refer to Fig. 2-52 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.

2-47 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram

Robot arm

Fig.2-21 Operating range diagram of RH-6FH45xx

Installation surface

Robot arm

Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-48

Fig.2-22 Outside dimensions of RH-6FH55xx

340mm (200mm stroke) 480mm (340mm stroke)

*5)

Note *1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery. *2) Indicates screw holes (M4 depth 6mm) for fixing user wiring/piping. Six places on both-sides of No.2 arm, Two places

on front surface. *3) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *4) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *5) Required space to installing/removing the cover.

Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.

Note) Refer to Fig. 2-52 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.

2-49 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram

Robot arm

Fig.2-23 Operating range diagram of RH-6FH55xx

Installation surface

Robot arm

Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-50

(2) Clean Specification and oil mist specification

Fig.2-24 Outside dimensions of RH-6FH35xxC/M

340mm (200mm stroke) 480mm (340mm stroke)

*6)

Note *1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery. *2) Indicates screw holes (M4 depth 6mm) for fixing user wiring/piping. Six places on both-sides of No.2 arm, Two places on

front surface. *3) The duct (25, length: 3m) attached to the clean specification. Be careful for the hand etc. not to interfere and arrange the

duct. *4) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *5) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *6) Required space to installing/removing the cover.

Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.

Note) Refer to Fig. 2-52 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.

2-51 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram

Robot arm

Fig.2-25 Operating range diagram of RH-6FH35xxC/M

Installation surface

Robot arm

Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-52

Fig.2-26 Outside dimensions of RH-6FH45xxC/M

340mm (200mm stroke) 480mm (340mm stroke)

*6)

Note *1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery. *2) Indicates screw holes (M4 depth 6mm) for fixing user wiring/piping. Six places on both-sides of No.2 arm, Two places on

front surface. *3) The duct (25, length: 3m) attached to the clean specification. Be careful for the hand etc. not to interfere and arrange the

duct. *4) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *5) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *6) Required space to installing/removing the cover.

Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.

Note) Refer to Fig. 2-52 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.

2-53 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram

Robot arm

Fig.2-27 Operating range diagram of RH-6FH45xxC/M

Installation surface

Robot arm

Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-54

Fig.2-28 Outside dimensions of RH-6FH55xxC/M

340mm (200mm stroke) 480mm (340mm stroke)

*6)

Note *1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery. *2) Indicates screw holes (M4 depth 6mm) for fixing user wiring/piping. Six places on both-sides of No.2 arm, Two places on

front surface. *3) The duct (25, length: 3m) attached to the clean specification. Be careful for the hand etc. not to interfere and arrange

the duct. *4) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *5) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *6) Required space to installing/removing the cover.

Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.

Note) Refer to Fig. 2-52 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.

2-55 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram

Robot arm

Fig.2-29 Operating range diagram of RH-6FH55xxC/M

Installation surface

Robot arm

Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-56

2.4.2 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram (RH-12FH series) (1) Standard Specification

Fig.2-30 Outside dimensions of RH-12FH55xx

Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.

Note) Refer to Fig. 2-53 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.

Note

*1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery.

*2) Indicates screw holes for fixing user wiring/piping. (Refer to Fig. 2-59)

*3) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller.

*4) Required space to installing/removing the cover.

*5) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller.

2-57 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram

Robot arm

Fig.2-31 Operating range diagram of RH-12FH55xx

Installation surface

Robot arm

Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-58

Fig.2-32 Outside dimensions of RH-12FH70xx

Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.

Note) Refer to Fig. 2-53 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.

Note

*1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery.

*2) Indicates screw holes for fixing user wiring/piping. (Refer to Fig. 2-59)

*3) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller.

*4) Required space to installing/removing the cover.

*5) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller.

2-59 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram

Robot arm

Fig.2-33 Operating range diagram of RH-12FH70xx

Installation surface

Robot arm

Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-60

Fig.2-34 Outside dimensions of RH-12FH85xx

Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.

Note) Refer to Fig. 2-53 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.

Note

*1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery.

*2) Indicates screw holes for fixing user wiring/piping. (Refer to Fig. 2-59)

*3) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller.

*4) Required space to installing/removing the cover.

*5) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller.

2-61 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram

Robot arm

Fig.2-35 Operating range diagram of RH-12FH85xx

Installation surface

Robot arm

Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-62

(2) Clean Specification and oil mist specification

Fig.2-36 Outside dimensions of RH-12FH55xxC/M

Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.

Note) Refer to Fig. 2-53 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.

Note *1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery. *2) Indicates screw holes for fixing user wiring/piping. (Refer to Fig. 2-59) *3) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *4) Required space to installing/removing the cover. *5) The duct (50, length: 2m) attached to the clean specification. Be careful for the hand etc. not to interfere and arrange

the duct. *6) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller.

2-63 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram

Robot arm

Fig.2-37 Operating range diagram of RH-12FH55xxC/M

Installation surface

Robot arm

Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-64

Fig.2-38 Outside dimensions of RH-12FH70xxC/M

Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.

Note) Refer to Fig. 2-53 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.

Note *1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery. *2) Indicates screw holes for fixing user wiring/piping. (Refer to Fig. 2-59) *3) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *4) Required space to installing/removing the cover. *5) The duct (50, length: 2m) attached to the clean specification. Be careful for the hand etc. not to interfere and arrange the

duct. *6) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller.

2-65 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram

Robot arm

Fig.2-39 Operating range diagram of RH-12FH70xxC/M

Installation surface

Robot arm

Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-66

Fig.2-40 Outside dimensions of RH-12FH85xxC/M

Note *1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery. *2) Indicates screw holes for fixing user wiring/piping. (Refer to Fig. 2-59) *3) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *4) Required space to installing/removing the cover. *5) The duct (50, length: 2m) attached to the clean specification. Be careful for the hand etc. not to interfere and arrange

the duct. *6) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller.

Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.

Note) Refer to Fig. 2-53 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.

2-67 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram

Robot arm

Fig.2-41 Operating range diagram of RH-12FH85xxC/M

Installation surface

Robot arm

Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-68

2.4.3 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram (RH-20FH series) (1) Standard Specification

Fig.2-42 Outside dimensions of RH-20FH85xx

Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.

Note) Refer to Fig. 2-54 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.

Note

*1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery.

*2) Indicates screw holes for fixing user wiring/piping. (Refer to Fig. 2-59)

*3) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller.

*4) Required space to installing/removing the cover.

*5) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller.

2-69 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram

Robot arm

Fig.2-43 Operating range diagram of RH-20FH85xx

Installation surface

Robot arm

Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-70

Fig.2-44 Outside dimensions of RH-20FH100xx

Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.

Note) Refer to Fig. 2-54 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.

Note

*1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery.

*2) Indicates screw holes for fixing user wiring/piping. (Refer to Fig. 2-59)

*3) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller.

*4) Required space to installing/removing the cover.

*5) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller.

2-71 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram

Robot arm

Fig.2-45 Operating range diagram of RH-20FH100xx

Installation surface

Robot arm

Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-72

(2) Clean Specification and oil mist specification

Fig.2-46 Outside dimensions of RH-20FH85xxC/M

Note *1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery. *2) Indicates screw holes for fixing user wiring/piping. (Refer to Fig. 2-59) *3) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *4) Required space to installing/removing the cover. *5) The duct (50, length: 2m) attached to the clean specification. Be careful for the hand etc. not to interfere and arrange the

duct. *6) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller.

Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.

Note) Refer to Fig. 2-54 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.

2-73 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram

Robot arm

Fig.2-47 Operating range diagram of RH-20FH85xxC/M

Installation surface

Robot arm

Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-74

Fig.2-48 Outside dimensions of RH-20FH100xxC/M

Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.

Note) Refer to Fig. 2-54 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.

Note *1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery. *2) Indicates screw holes for fixing user wiring/piping. (Refer to Fig. 2-59) *3) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *4) Required space to installing/removing the cover. *5) The duct (50, length: 2m) attached to the clean specification. Be careful for the hand etc. not to interfere and arrange the

duct. *6) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller.

2-75 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram

Robot arm

Fig.2-49 Operating range diagram of RH-20FH100xxC/M

Installation surface

Robot arm

Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-76

2.4.4 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram of RH-3FHR series (1) Standard Specification

Fig.2-50 Outside dimensions, Operating range diagram of RH-3FHR series (Standard specification)

1. 2.J1=0J2=+180J3=-583mmJ4=0 3.*1M5 4.*2 5.*3 6.*4CR750/751 7.*5 8.*6

No.1

Operating range diagram

. arm circle radius

The locus of J2 axis center The locus

of J4 axis center

Maintenance space

4-9 Installation hole

2-M12 hole for hanging tools

4-M8 hole for the jack-up

Robot's origin

Maintenance space

View B

View A

Installation surface

J1 axis center J2 axis

center

J4 axis center

(Installation reference)

(I n st

al la

ti o n

re fe

re n c e )

Detailed drawing of T slot

Dimension a

Ra6.3

R a6

.3 Controller Dimension a

CR750 183

CR751 127

Note1) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot. Note2) Refer to Fig. 2-55 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions. Note3) Use of the optional solenoid valve set. The solenoid valve set installed at the side on the No.2 arm. (*1 mark) Take care

at layout design. Note4) The position on the vertical extension of the "robot origin" becomes the singular point. Positioning and passage to this

position with linear interpolation movement cannot be performed. Take care at layout design.

Notice 1. The outside dimensions exclude projecting parts. 2. The posture of the figure are J1=0 degree, J2=+180

degree, J3=-583mm, and J4=0 degree. 3. *1 is the T slot for piping, wiring, and solenoid valve instal-

lation. (Attach the M5 nut) 4. *2 is the installation stage (customer arrangements). 5. *3 is allowance stage dimensions. 6. *4 is the space necessary for connection of the machine

cable for CR750/751 controller. 7. *5 is the maintenance space necessary for battery

replacement etc. 8. *6 is the distance to a minimum bendable radius of the

machine cable for CR750/751 controller.

2-77 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram

Robot arm

(2) Clean/Waterproof Specification

Fig.2-51 Outside dimensions, Operating range diagram of RH-3FHR series (Clean/Waterproof specification)

1. 2.J1=0J2=+180J3=-583mmJ4=0 3.*1M5 4.*2 5.*3 6.*4CR750/751 7.*5 8.*6

No.1

Controller Dimension a

CR750 183

CR751 127

Operating range diagram

arm circle radius

The locus of J2 axis center The locus

of J4 axis center

Maintenance space

4-9 Installation hole

2-M12 hole for hanging tools

4-M8 hole for the jack-up

Robot's origin

Maintenance space

View B

View A

Installation surface

J1 axis center

J2 axis center

J4 axis center

(Installation reference)

(I n st

al la

ti o n

re fe

re n c e )

Detailed drawing of T slot

Bellows

(Dimension of J1 axis)

(Dimension of J2 axis)

Dimension a

Ra6.3

R a6

.3

Note1) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot. Note2) Refer to Fig. 2-56 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions. Note3) Use of the optional solenoid valve set. The solenoid valve set installed at the side on the No.2 arm. (*1 mark) Take care

at layout design. Note4) The position on the vertical extension of the "robot origin" becomes the singular point. Positioning and passage to this

position with linear interpolation movement cannot be performed. Take care at layout design.

Notice 1. The outside dimensions exclude projecting parts. 2. The posture of the figure are J1=0 degree, J2=+180 degree,

J3=-583mm, and J4=0 degree. 3. *1 is the T slot for piping, wiring, and solenoid valve installa-

tion. (Attach the M5 nut) 4. *2 is the installation stage (customer arrangements). 5. *3 is allowance stage dimensions. 6. *4 is the space necessary for connection of the machine

cable for CR750/751 controller. 7. *5 is the maintenance space necessary for battery replace-

ment etc. 8. *6 is the distance to a minimum bendable radius of the

machine cable for CR750/751 controller.

Robot arm

Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-78

2.4.5 Mechanical interface and Installation surface (1) Mechanical interface and Installation surface of RH-6FH series

Fig.2-52 Mechanical interface and Installation surface (RH-6FH series)

Note) Don't install the robot arm in the position where direct rays or the heat of lighting hits. The skin temperature of the robot arm may rise, and the error may occur.

(Base section of a robot arm)

2-79 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram

Robot arm

(2) Mechanical interface and Installation surface of RH-12FH series

Fig.2-53 Mechanical interface and Installation surface of RH-12FH series

Note) Don't install the robot arm in the position where direct rays or the heat of lighting hits. The skin temperature of the robot arm may rise, and the error may occur.

(Base section of a robot arm)

Robot arm

Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-80

(3) Mechanical interface and Installation surface of RH-20FH series

Fig.2-54 Mechanical interface and Installation surface of RH-20FH series

Note) Don't install the robot arm in the position where direct rays or the heat of lighting hits. The skin temperature of the robot arm may rise, and the error may occur.

(Base section of a robot arm)

2-81 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram

Robot arm

(4) Mechanical interface and Installation surface of RH-3FHR series (Standard specification)

Fig.2-55 Mechanical interface and Installation surface of RH-3FHR series (Standard specification)

Don't give a shock to the ball screw shaft at the time of hand installation. Especially don't strike the shaft end by hammer etc. The ball screw shaft may be damaged.

Y-Y

Section of Y-Y

Detail of Mechanical interface

(Installation reference)

(I n st

al la

ti o n

re fe

re n c e )

Maintenance space

Maintenance space

4-9 installation hole

2-M12 hole for hanging tools

4-M8 hole for the jack-up

Robot's origin

Installation surface

Installation dimension details

11

th ro

ug h h

ole

Ball screw shaft (J3 axis)

Ra6.3

R a6

.3

CAUTION

Robot arm

Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-82

(5) Mechanical interface and Installation surface of RH-3FHR series (Clean/Waterproof specification)

Fig.2-56 Mechanical interface and Installation surface of RH-3FHR series (Clean/Waterproof specification)

Don't give a shock to the ball screw shaft at the time of hand installation. Especially don't strike the shaft end by hammer etc. The ball screw shaft may be damaged.

Y-YSection of Y-Y Detail of Mechanical interface

(Installation reference)

(I n st

al la

ti o n

re fe

re n c e )

Maintenance space

Maintenance space

4-9 installation hole

2-M12 hole for hanging tools

4-M8 hole for the jack-up

Robot's origin

Installation surface

Installation dimension details

11

th ro

ug h

ho le

Ball screw shaft (J3 axis)

Ra6.3

R a6

.3

CAUTION

2-83 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram

Robot arm

2.4.6 Outside dimensions of machine cables

(1) Connection with the CR750 controller 1) Power cable

2) Signal cable

(2) Connection with the CR751 controller 1) Power cable

2) Signal cable

Approx. 82

Approx. 82

[Controller side] [Robot arm side]

Approx. 55

A p pr

ox . 7 0

Approx. 95

A p pr

ox .

2 4

Approx. 95

A p pr

o x.

7 0

Approx. 55

Note) If using an optional machine cable extension, refer to Page 102, "(1) Machine cable extension" in a diameter of the cable.

Approx. 78

A pp

ro x.

7 0

A pp

ro x.

7 0

Approx. 90

Approx. 90

A pp

ro x.

1 6

[Controller side] [Robot arm side]

Approx. 45

Approx. 78

Approx. 45

Note) If using an optional machine cable extension, refer to Page 102, "(1) Machine cable extension" in a diameter of the cable.

A pp

ro x.

88

[Controller side] [Robot arm side]

58

7 1

Approx. 15

Approx. 45 Approx. 90

A p p ro

x. 1

4 7

A p p ro

x.

1 5

Approx. 55 Approx. 23 Approx. 12

A p p ro

x. 1

6

Approx. 20

Note) If using an optional machine cable extension, refer to Page 102, "(1) Machine cable extension" in a diameter of the cable.

[Controller side] [Robot arm side]

A p p ro

x.

9

Approx. 45

7 1

52

Approx. 12

A pp

ro x.

85

Approx. 14

A p p ro

x. 4

5

Approx. 40 Approx. 40

Note) If using an optional machine cable extension, refer to Page 102, "(1) Machine cable extension" in a diameter of the cable.

Robot arm

Tooling 2-84

2.5 Tooling

2.5.1 Wiring and piping for hand Shows the wiring and piping configuration for a standard-equipped hand.

Fig.2-57 Wiring and piping for hand (Floor installation type)

Connector and pneumatic coupling

No. Name Qty. Robot side (Robot arm side) Counter side (customer-prepared)

Manufacturer Connectors, couplings Connector pins Connector Connector pins

(1) Coupling 2 UKBL6 - - - Koganei Corporation

(2) Coupling 1 or 2 Note1)

Note1) The clean specification RH-6FH series: one coupling, RH-12FH/20FH series: two couplings. The oil-mist specification is common to between the types, and is one coupling. The general-purpose environment specification is nothing.

UKBL8 - - - Koganei Corporation

(3) Connector 2 1-1717834-4 1318108-1 1-1318115-4 1318112-1 Tyco Electronics AMP

(4) Connector 2 1-1717834-3 1318108-1 1-1318115-3 1318112-1 Tyco Electronics AMP

(5) Connector 1 1-1318117-3 1318112-1 1-1318120-3 1318108-1 Tyco Electronics AMP

(6) Connector 1 2-1717834-4 1318108-1 2-1318115-4 1318112-1 Tyco Electronics AMP

(7) Connector 1 TM21P-88P - - -

View A

A

(4)Hand input signal connector (HC1, 2)

(3)Hand output signal connector (GR1, 2)

Secondary piping pneumatic hose (Option, or customer prepared) RH-6FH series: 4 hose (Max. 8 hoses) RH-12FH/20FH series: 6 hose (Max. 8 hoses)

Primary piping pneumatic hose (AIR OUT, RETURN)

Solenoid valve set (Option)

(3)Hand output signal connector (GR1, 2)

Primary piping pneumatic hose

(AIR OUT, RETURN)

(6)The signal wire only for the multifunctional hand.

(7)Ethernet cable (8 cores)

* If the LAN connector is cut and connector of customer preparation is connected, it can be use as other usages.

Pulling out wiring and piping

Wiring and piping can be passed through the inside of the shaft. It can also be pulled out externally from the rear of the No. 2 arm by using the Page 122, "(9) External Wiring/Piping box". Ethernet cables and the power supply chord for remote input/output can be pulled out from the grommet at the rear of the base section. Note) On the clean and oil mist

specifications it is necessary to seal the cable aperture closed.

(Robot arm side)

(Robot arm side)

No.2 arm

No.1 arm

Robot base

(two cores + two wires)

(5)Spare wire

(two wires)

B

(1) Primary piping pneumatic coupling (6) AIR IN, RETURN

Cable apertures of Ethernet cable and signal wire only for the multifunctional hand (Grommet)

Machine cable connector

(power supply) (AMP1, AMP2) (Inside the cover)

Machine cable connector

(for signal) (CN2) (Inside the cover)

(2)Clean specification: for suction (VACUUM)8 coupling

Oil mist specification: for pressurization (AIR PARGE)8 coupling

Machine cable connector (for

brake) (BRK) (Inside the cover)

Machine cable con- nector (for signal)

(CN2)

Machine cable con- nector (power supply)

(CN1)

Robot arm rear side: View B

2-85 Tooling

Robot arm

Fig.2-58 Wiring and piping for hand (Hanging installation type)

AWG#270.1mm28

CONBOX

(1)

()

(1)

AMP2 ()

AMP1 ()

CN2 ()

()

1 (62)

(2)

2 (44)

2 (44) ()

(1)1

(21)

1() (62)

(3)

2() (44)

2(44)

( )

( )

Connector and pneumatic coupling

No Name Qty. Robot side (Robot arm side) Counter side (customer-prepared)

Manufacturer Connectors, couplings Connector pins Connector Connector pins

(1) Coupling 4 UKBL6 Koganei Corporation

(2) Connector 2 1-1717834-3 1318108-1 1-1318115-3 1318112-1 Tyco Electronics AMP

(3) Connector 2 1-1717834-4 1318108-1 1-1318115-4 1318112-1 Tyco Electronics AMP

Wiring for power supply and signals

(1) Primary piping air coupling

Connector for spare wiring

Grommet

Spare wiring (AWG#27 (0.1mm2)8)

Hand input cable Hand output cable

Primary piping pneumatic hoses (62

(2) Hand input signal connector (Connect the optional hand input cable)

Secondary piping air coupling (4 4)

Secondary piping pneumatic hoses (44) (customer-prepared)

Connector for spare wiring

) Hand output signal connector

Secondary piping pneumatic hoses (44 Solenoid valve (optional)

installation section

Solenoid valve

(1)Primary piping air coupling

Piping/wiring cover

Spare cable inlet (grommet)

AMP2 connector (inside a cover)

AMP1 connector (inside a cover)

(1) Primary piping air coupling

Grommet

CN2 connector (inside a cover)

Spare cable inlet (grommet)

Primary piping pneumatic hoses (62) (customer-prepared)

Spare piping, electrical wiring opening Grommet (21))

Secondary piping air coupling (4 4) (Connect the optional hand hoses)

Robot arm

Tooling 2-86

2.5.2 Internal air piping (1) Floor installation type

1) Standard type/Oil mist specifications The robot has two 6 urethane hoses from the pneumatic entrance on the base section to the No.2 arm.

One hose is the primary piping for the pneumatic equipment, and the other pipe is used for air exhaust.

The pneumatic inlet in the base section has a 6 pneumatic coupling bridge.

The solenoid valve set (optional) can be installed to the side on No.2 arm.

Refer to Page 109, "(3) Solenoid valve set" for details on the electronic valve set (optional).

Protection performance can be improved by pressurizing the inside of the robot arm. Since the joint (AIR PURGE) of 8 is prepared at the rear of the base section, please supply the dry air for pressurization from this joint. Refer to Page 38, "2.2.8 Protection specifications" for the details of dry air.

2) Clean type The primary piping is the same piping as the standard type.

With the clean specification, a 8 coupling is provided in the base section for suction inside the machine. For use, connect it to the suction port of the vacuum pump or the coupling on the "VACUUM" side of the vacuum generating valve. Moreover, to clean the exhaust from the vacuum pump or vacuum generator, use the exhaust filter (prepared by the customer).

Refer to Page 40, "2.2.9 Clean specifications" for details of the vacuum for suction.

Supply clean air to the vacuum generator.

(2) Hanging installation type 1) Standard type/Waterproof type

The robot has two 6 urethane hoses from the pneumatic entrance on the base section to the No.2 arm. One hose is the primary piping for the pneumatic equipment, and the other pipe is used for air exhaust.

The pneumatic inlet in the base section has a 6 pneumatic coupling bridge.

The solenoid valve set (optional) can be installed to the side on No.2 arm.

Refer to Page 109, "(3) Solenoid valve set" for details on the electronic valve set (optional).

The four air hoses (4) are piped as the secondary from the No.2 arm back end to near the shaft.

2) Clean type The primary piping is the same piping as the standard type.

With the clean specification, a 8 coupling is provided in the base section for suction inside the machine. For use, connect it to the suction port of the vacuum pump or the coupling on the "VACUUM" side of the vacuum generating valve. Moreover, to clean the exhaust from the vacuum pump or vacuum generator, use the exhaust filter (prepared by the customer).

Refer to Page 40, "2.2.9 Clean specifications" for details of the vacuum for suction.

Supply clean air to the vacuum generator.

2.5.3 Internal wiring for the hand output cable (1) Floor installation type

1) The hand output primary cable extends from the connector PCB of the base section to the back side of the

No.2 arm. (AWG#24(0.2mm2): 10 cables) The cable terminals have connector bridges for eight hand out- puts.The connector names are GR1 and GR2. To pull the wiring out of the arm, following separate options are required.

Hand output cable ....................................1F-GR60S-01

External wiring and piping box .............1F-UT-BOX (RH-6FH series) 1F-UT-BOX-01 (RH-12FH/20FH series)

(2) Hanging installation type 1) The hand output primary cable extends from the connector of the base section to the back side of the No.2

arm. (AWG#24(0.2mm2)) The cable terminals have connector bridges for eight hand outputs.The connector names are GR1 and GR2. The separate cable (optional "hand output cable 1S-GR35S-02") is necessary, to extend the cable to outside of the arm.

2-87 Tooling

Robot arm

2.5.4 Internal wiring for the hand input cable (1) Floor installation type

1) The hand input cable extends from the connector PCB of the base section to the No.2 arm.

(AWG#24(0.2mm2): 10 cables) The cable terminals have connector bridges for eight hand inputs. The con- nector names are HC1 and HC2.

2) The hand check signal of the pneumatic hand is input by connecting this connector. To extend the wiring to the outside of the arm, following separate options are required.

Hand input cable........................................1F-HC35C-01 (RH-6FH series) 1F-HC35C-02 (RH-12FH/20FH series)

External wiring and piping box .............1F-UT-BOX (RH-6FH series) 1F-UT-BOX-01 (RH-12FH/20FH series)

(2) Hanging installation type 1) The hand input cable extends from the connector PCB of the base section to the No.2 arm.

(AWG#24(0.2mm2)) The cable terminals have connector bridges for four hand inputs. The connector names are HC1 and HC2.

2) The hand check signal of the pneumatic hand is input by connecting this connector.

2.5.5 Ethernet cable (For RH-6FH/12FH/20FH series) Ethernet cables are installed from the RH-6FH/12FH/20FH series robots base section up to the No. 2 arm

section, and can be used. Similar to on our previous models, these cables can also be used for backup wiring. For further details please refer to the separate Instruction Manual/Robot Arm Setup.

Example of use for backup wiring.

When connecting previously used tools to the robot

Folding back the hand output cable when attaching the electromagnetic valve to the robots exterior.

When attaching 8 devices or more to the hand section such as sensors, (8 input and 8 output dedicated points are available for hand signals.). In this case connect the signals (of the sensors, etc.) to parallel input/output signals.

When shipped from the factory, both ends are LAN connectors.

When using it as backup wiring, cut the LAN connectors off and use with user supplied connectors.

When using it as backup wiring for data communication, the shield wire must be grounded. If the shield wire is not grounded, it may cause a communication abnormality by noise superposed on the cable.

Table 2-13 Ethernet cable specification

Item Specification

Communication speed 100BASE-TX

Size AWG #26 (0.13mm2) x four pair (total eight cores)

Externality of insulator Approx. 0.98 mm

Robot arm

Tooling 2-88

2.5.6 Spare Wiring (For FH-3FHR series)

As spare wiring, four pairs of cab tire cables (AWG#27(0.1mm2), total is eight cores both) are preinstalled between the base section and the No.2 arm rear section in the RH-3FHR series robot. Customer can utilize it. Refer to the separate "Instruction Manual/ROBOT ARM SETUP & MAINTENANCE" for details.

Both ends of the wire terminals are unprocessed. Use them under the following circumstances:

For folding as the hand output cable when installing the solenoid valve in outside the robot. For when installing six or more hand I/O points for the sensor in the hand section

(Connects to the parallel I/O general purpose input.) Reference) Pin assignment of the connector, and the matching connector

Pin assignment

Pin Color

A1 Red

A2 Brown

A3 Green

A4 Black

B1 Orange

B2 White

B3 Yellow

B4 Blue

Robot side connector

Connection place Connector Contactor Maker

Base portion 2-1318115-4 - Tyco Electronics AMP K.K.

Fore arm portion 2-1717834-4 -

Other party connector (recommendation)

Connection place Connector Contactor Maker

Base portion 2-1717834-4 1318108-1 Tyco Electronics AMP K.K.

Fore arm portion 2-1318115-4 1318112-1

2-89 Tooling

Robot arm

2.5.7 About the Installation of Tooling Wiring and Piping (Examples of Wiring and Piping) The customer is required to provide tooling wiring, piping and metal fixtures. Screw holes are provided on the robot arm for the installation of tooling wiring, piping and metal fixtures. (Refer to the Fig. 2-59 to Fig. 2-61.) The length of wiring and piping and the installation position on the robot must be adjusted according to the work to be done by the robot. Please use the following example as reference.

A hand input cable and a hand curl cable are available as optional accessories for your convenience. After performing wiring and piping to the robot, operate the robot at low speed to make sure that each part does not interfere with the robot arm and the peripheral devices. Confirm that there is no interference also with bellows of the shaft section by clean specification and oil mist specification.

Please be aware that dust may be generated from friction if wires and pipes come into contact with the robot arm when using it according to the clean specifications.

If you install metal fixtures and a solenoid valve using the screw holes on the No.2 arm portion, add the mass of the metal fixtures and the solenoid valve to mass of a hand then set the HNDDAT parameter. Moreover, Fix the parts, such as a solenoid valve, firmly to prevent the parts getting shaky during operation of a robot.

(1) RH-6FH series

Fig.2-59 Location of screw holes for fixing wiring/piping (RH-6FH)

164 102

2-M46 () 10

2-M48 ()

2-M48 ()

25

55

B

2-M48

20

B A

11

11 0

4- M5

11

A

2-M4, depth 8

2-M4, depth 8

View B

(Usable on opposite side too.)

2-M4, depth 6

2-M4, depth 8 (Usable on opposite side too.)

View

4- M5 s

cre w, d

ep th

11

(Usable on opposite side too.)

Robot arm

Tooling 2-90

(2) RH-12FH/20FH series

Fig.2-60 Location of screw holes for fixing wiring/piping (RH-12FH/20FH)

B

A

RH-12FH55xx RH-12FH70xx

RH-12FH/20FH85xx

RH-20FH100xx

2-M4, depth 8 2-M4, depth 8 (Usable on opposite side too.)

2-M4, depth 8 (Usable on opposite side too)

View B

View A

2-M4, depth 8 (Usable on opposite side too)

4-M5 screw, depth 15 4-M5 screw, depth 15

2-91 Tooling

Robot arm

(3) RH-3FHR series

Fig.2-61 Location of screw holes for fixing wiring/piping (RH-3FHR series)

Example which installed the solenoid valve

M5 nut for T slot (Four attachments)

2-M5 x 8 screw

Note)

Note) T slot The T slot is on the side of the No.2 arm. (Two of right and left) Utilize the M5 screw and T slot for fixing the hose or wire. Refer to "Page 76, "Fig.2-50 Outside dimensions, Operating range diagram of RH-3FHR series (Standard specification)"or Page 77, "Fig.2-51 Outside dimen- sions, Operating range diagram of RH-3FHR series (Clean/Water- proof specification)" for detail of T slot. The Clean/Waterproof robot are supplied with the packing. After fixation of wirings and pipings, stuff the packing into the T slot.

10

Robot arm

Tooling 2-92

(4) Example of wiring and piping <1> By feeding wiring and piping through the inside of the shaft, the wiring and piping to the hand becomes compact.

Fig.2-62 Example of wiring and piping <1> (RH-6FH series)

Fig.2-63 Example of wiring and piping <1> (RH-12FH/20FH series)

2-M5M6

M5

23

60

()

1(AIR OUTRETURN)(2)

(GR1GR2)()

(GR1GR2)(2)

()

2 () (48(82)) ()

Solenoid valve set (Option)

Cable fixed plate for Internal Wiring/Piping set for hand (Option)

Secondary piping air hose, etc Internal Wiring/Piping set for hand (Option)

(Hand tube: 4 x 8 hoses, Hand input cable (For signal: 8 cable, For power: 2 cable)) or Hand tube (Customer prepared)

Primary piping air hose (AIR OUT, RETURN)

Inside the No.2 arm

Hand output signal connector ( 1, GR2)

(Solenoid valve (option) side)

Hand output signal connector (GR1, GR2)

(Inside the No.2 arm)

Example of the customer preparation tool

Two set screws M5-M6

Slot set screw M5

Example of a flange

2

12

1

2-M4M5

M4

30 20

23

40

50

20

RH-6SDH

2-M5M6

M5

23

60

RH-12SDH/18SDH/20SDH

2-M5M6

M5

23

60

()

1(AIR OUTRETURN)(2)

(GR1GR2)()

(GR1GR2)(2)

()

2 () (48(82)) ()

Solenoid valve set (Option)

Cable fixed plate for Internal Wiring/Piping set for hand (Option)

Secondary piping air hose, etc Internal Wiring/Piping set for hand (Option)

(Hand tube: 6 x 4 hoses, Hand input cable (For signal: 8 cable, For power: 2 cable)) or

Hand tube (Customer prepared)

Primary piping air hose (AIR OUT, RETURN)

Inside the No.2 arm

Hand output signal connector ( 1, GR2)

(Solenoid valve (option) side)

Hand output signal connector (GR1, GR2)

(Inside the No.2 arm)

Example of the customer preparation tool

Example of a flange

Slot set screw M5

Two set screws M5-M6

Slot set screw M5

Example of a flange

2-93 Tooling

Robot arm

Fig.2-64 Example of wiring and piping <1> (Hanging installation type)

(5) Wiring and piping example <2>

Notes in wiring 1. The air hose which can be passed in the shaft is four 4 hoses maximum. (Customer preparations) 2. Wire the cable and piping the tube without interference with ball screw and cover. 3. Because to prevent the bend of the air tube, secure the minimum radius with which tube can be bent. 4. When using an optional solenoid valve, add the mass of solenoid valve to mass of hand and set to parameter: HNDDAT.

(RH-3FHR series only) 5. The hand tube (four 3 tubes) and the hand input cable (4 point) are prepared optional.

Please confirm that there is no rubbing or crack etc per six months.

Hand tube (4 x 4: customer preparation) or Hand tube (i3 x 4: optional) and the hand input cable (optional)

Example) How to pass the phi 4 air hose into the shaft

*1) Adjustment of the fixing position In the condition that the J3 axis is upper limit and the J4 axis is 0 degree, align the top of air tube with the upper end of the Piping fixing bracket.

*1)

Clamp position (cutting two places) Fixing by cable tie

Hand input cable

Air tube Union (4 to 3) Attachment

Clamp position Fixing by cable tie etc.

Hand input cable

Example of the customer preparation tool

Hand tube (6 x 2: customer preparation)

Hand tube (4 x 4: customer preparation) *Use, when letting the tube pass in the shaft.

Robot arm

Tooling 2-94

This is an effective method in cases where the wiring and piping is often changed, or when the hand rotation is minimal (within 90), etc.

Fig.2-65 Example of wiring and piping <2>

(6) Precautions for the oil mist/clean specification The through hole of the top part of the tip shaft are taped at shipment.

Perform the following actions as necessary in order to ensure that the robot keeps sufficiently protective performance during the operation:

1) When the through hole of the shaft is not used Keep the top part of the tip shaft taped while the robot is in use.

2) When the through hole of the shaft is used for wiring. Remove the rubber cap on top of the tip shaft and perform the necessary wiring. Once the wiring is com-

pleted, seal the bottom part of the tip shaft using liquid seal in order to avoid accumulation of dust and to protect from oil mist

Perform the wiring in such a way that the wires around the area below the tip shaft will not get into contact with other parts while the robot is operating.

()

()

() ()

()

() ()

Example of the customer preparation tool

Fixing plate (Customer preparation) Wiring/Piping (Customer preparation) or Hand input cable (Option)

External Wiring/Piping box (Option)

Wiring/Piping (Customer preparation) or Hand curl tube (Option)

Metal fittings (customer preparation)

Note) Although the illustration is the RH-6FH series robot, RH- 12/20FH series robot also have the screw holes for fixation of the wiring/piping. (Refer to Fig. 2-60.)

2-95 Tooling

Robot arm

2.5.8 Wiring and piping system diagram for hand Shows the wiring and piping configuration for a standard-equipped hand.

Fig.2-66 Wiring and piping system diagram for hand and example the solenoid valve installation (RH-6FH/12FH/20FH series)

A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4

<+24V> <>

A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3

<+24V(COM)>

A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4

<+24V(COM)>

GR2

GR1

HC1

<> <24G>

A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3

HC2

<> <> <> <>

6

1

6

6

6

AIR IN

RETURN ()

2

8

A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

GR1

GR2

HC1

HC2

RIO/ ADD

LAN LAN

ADD

1 2 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

* Refer to Fig. 2-68 for air

supply circuit example.

*1)

*1) Using the External Wiring/Piping box, the hand output/input signal cable and the air hose can be pulled out externally.

(This option comes equipped with two 6 joints for primary piping, eight 4 joints for secondary piping (RH-6FH series) or two 6 joints

for primary piping, eight 6 joints for secondary piping (RH-12FH/20FH series), and holes for pulling out the cables.)

*2) Using the Internal Wiring/Piping set for hand, the hand input signal cable and air hose can be fed through the inside of the shaft.

(This option comes as a set that includes 4 x 8 (RH-6FH series) or 6 x 4 (RH-12FH/20FH series) air hoses, hand input cables (8 x signal

lines, 2 x power chords), and fixing tools.

*1), *2)

Hand output signal

Connect to the optional solenoid

valve set directly

or

Connect with customer's tool

drive equipment (solenoid valve,

etc), by the optional hand output

cable.

Hand input signal

Connect with customer's tool

drive equipment (hand, etc), by

the optional hand input cable.

Piping

Connect with customer's hand,

etc.

*1), *2)

Hand signal output connector (GR1)

Hand signal output connector (GR2)

Hand signal input connector (HC1)

Hand signal input connector (HC2)

Solenoid

valve set (Option)

No.2 arm Base

6 quick coupling 6 quick coupling

8 quick coupling

Primary piping pneumatic hose 6 hose

6 hose

Reserved>

Reserved>

White

White Black White Black

Black

White Black White Black

White Black White Black White Black

White Black White Black White Black

R o bo

t ar

m w

ir in

g re

la y

bo ar

d

C o n tr

o lle

r

Power line> Power line>

Ethernet cable AWG#24(0.2mm2)x8 (Both ends are LAN connectors) (Cab tire cables with the shield)

Spare line> Spare line>

VACCUM :clean specification AIR PURGE:oil-mist specification Note) Only Clean/Oil mist specification. clean specification

RH-6FH series : one coupling RH-12FH/20FH series : two couplings

oil-mist specification is common to between the types, and is one coupling.

White Black

White Black White Black

Brown White/ Brown Green White/Blue Blue White/Green Orange White/Orange

Robot arm

Tooling 2-96

Fig.2-67 Wiring and piping system diagram for hand and example the solenoid valve installation (RH-3FHR series)

White

Black

White

Black

White

Black

White

Black

White

Black

White

Black

White

Black

White

Black

White

Black

White

Black

White

Black

White

Black

Hand output cable

(option)

Secondary pneumatic hose piping (customer-prepared)

Hand output cable attached to the solenoid set

Hand input cable

(option)

quick coupling (1 to 8)

AIR IN

RETURN

A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3

<+24V>

<24G>

A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4

<+24V(COM)>

<+24V(COM)>

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3

A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4

Solenoid set (option) valve mounting section 6 quick coupling 6 quick coupling

6 hose

6 hose

Primary piping pneumatic hoses

Driving devices, such as solenoid and hand, provided by the customer

Hand prepared by customer

BaseNo.2 arm

Hand signal input connector (HC1 connector) 1-1717834-3 (Tyco Electronics AMP)

1-1318115-3 (Tyco Electronics AMP)

Hand signal output connection connector

1-1318115-4 (Tyco Electronics AMP)

Hand signal input connection connector

Hand signal input connector (HC2 connector)

1-1717834-4 (Tyco Electronics AMP)

Hand signal output connector (GR1 connector)

Hand signal output connector (GR2 connector)

Spare wiring AWG#27(0.1mm2)8 (cab tire cables with the shield)

VACCUM or AIR PARGE 8

Yellow

White

Red

Blue

Orange Green Black

Brown

R o bo

t ar

m w

ir in

g re

la y

b o ar

d

R o bo

t co

nt ro

lle r

*Refer to Fig. 2-68 for Air supply circuit example.

RH-3FHR series: 4hose

RH-3FHR series: 4 hose

2-97 Tooling

Robot arm

2.5.9 Electrical specifications of hand input/output

Table 2-14 Electrical specifications of input circuit

Table 2-15 Electrical specifications of output circuit

Item Specifications Internal circuit

Type DC input

* HCn HC1 to HC8

No. of input points 8

Insulation method Photo-coupler insulation

Rated input voltage 24VDC

Rated input current approx. 7mA

Working voltage range DC10.2 to 26.4V (ripple rate within 5%)

ON voltage/ON current 8VDC or more/2mA or more

OFF voltage/OFF current 4VDC or less/1mA or less

Input resistance Approx. 3.3k

Response time

OFF-ON 10ms or less (DC24V)

ON-OFF 10ms or less (DC24V)

Item Specification Internal circuit

Type Transistor output

* GRn GR1 to GR8

No. of output points 8

Insulation method Photo coupler insulation

Rated load voltage DC24V

Rated load voltage range DC21.6 to 26.4VDC

Max. current load 0.1A/ 1 point (100%)

Current leak with power OFF 0.1mA or less

Maximum voltage drop with power ON DC0.9V(TYP.)

Response time OFF-ON 2ms or less (hardware response time)

ON-OFF 2ms or less (resistance load) (hardware response time)

Protects Protects the over-current (0.9A)

3.3K

+24V

24G

820 HCn*

+24V

3.3K

820

24G

+24V

HCn*

+24V

+24V(COM)

*GRn

24G

Protection of over-current

(Initial power supply)

* GRn

+24V

24G

Protection of over-current

2 Robot arm

2-98

2.5.10 Air supply circuit example for the hand An example of pneumatic supply circuitry for the hand is shown below.

(1) Make sure that a surge voltage protection circuit such as a diode is connected to the solenoid coil in parallel. (2) When the factory pneumatic pressure drops, as a result of the hand clamp strength weakening, there can be

damage to the work. To prevent it, install a pressure switch to the source of the air as shown in Fig. 2-68 and use the circuit described so that the robot stops when pressure drops. Use a hand with a spring-pressure clamp, or a mechanical lock-type hand, that can be used in cases where the pressure switch becomes dam- aged.

(3) The optional hand and solenoid valve are of an oilless type. If they are used, don't use any lubricator. (4) Supply clean air to the vacuum generation valve when you use clean type robot. (5) If the air supply temperature (primary piping) used for the tool etc. is lower than ambient air temperature, the

dew condensation may occur on the coupling or the hose surface.

Fig.2-68 Air supply circuit example for the hand

() 0.7MPa

AIR IN (0.5MPa%)

Pneumatic source (Clean) 0.7MPa less Filter Regulator

Pressure switch

To the AIR IN (Robot arm) (0.5 10 )

2-99 Shipping special specifications, options, and maintenance parts

Robot arm

2.6 Shipping special specifications, options, and maintenance parts

2.6.1 Shipping special specifications

What are sipping special specifications? Shipping special specifications are changed before shipping from the factory. Consequently, it is necessary to confirm the delivery date by the customer.

To make changes to the specifications after shipment, service work must be performed at the work site or the robot must be returned for service.

How to order (1) Confirm beforehand when the factory special specifications can be shipped, because they may not be

immediately available. (2) Specify, before shipping from our company. (3) Specified method Specify the part name, model, and robot model type.

Robot arm

Shipping special specifications, options, and maintenance parts 2-100

(1) Machine cable

Order type Fixed type .........CR750 controller: 1S-02UCBL-01 (2m) CR751 controller: 1F-02UCBL-02 (2m)

Outline

This cable is exchanged for the machine cable (5 m for fixed type) that was supplied as standard to shorten the distance between the controller and the robot arm.

Configuration Table 2-16 Configuration equipment and types

[Caution] Orders made after purchasing a robot are treated as purchases of optional equipment. In this case, the machine cable (5 m for fixed type) that was supplied as standard is not reclaimed.

Part name Type Qty. Mass (Kg) Note1)

Note1) Mass indicates one set.

Remarks Note2)

Note2) Standard 5 m (for fixed type) is not attached.

CR750 controller

Fixed Set of signal and power cables 1S-02UCBL-01 1 set 3.4 2m

Motor signal cable (1 cable) -

Motor power cable (1 cable) -

RCR751 controller

Fixed Set of signal and power cables 1F-02UCBL-02 1 set 2.6 2m

Motor signal cable (1 cable) -

Motor power cable (1 cable) -

2-101 Options

Robot arm

2.7 Options

What are options? There are a variety of options for the robot designed to make the setting up process easier for customer needs.

customer installation is required for the options. Options come in two types: "set options" and "single options".

1. Set options .......................................A combination of single options and parts that together, from a set for serving some purpose.

2. Single options ..................................That are configured from the fewest number of required units of a part. Please choose customer's purpose additionally.

Robot arm

Options 2-102

(1) Machine cable extension

Order type: CR750 controller .........Fixed type: 1S- CBL-01 (extension type) Flexed type: 1S- LCBL-01 (extension type)

Flexed type: 1S- LUCBL-01 (direct type)

CR751 controller .........Fixed type: 1F- UCBL-02 (direct type)

Flexed type: 1F- LUCBL-02 (direct type)

Note) refer the length.

Outline

The distance between the robot controller and the robot arm is extensible by this option.

A fixed type and flexible type are available.

The fix and flexible types are both configured of the motor signal cable and motor power cable.

The extended method is discriminated as follows.

Direct type ............ Exchanges with the machine cable attached in the standards.

Extension type..... Adds to the machine cable attached in the standards.

Configuration Table 2-17 Configuration equipment and types

Part name Type Note1)

Note1) The numbers in the boxes refer the length.

Qty. Mass (kg) Note2)

Note2) Mass indicates one set.

Remarks Fixed Flexed

CR750 controller

Fixed Set of signal and power cables 1S- CBL-01 1 set - 6.7(5m)

12(10m)

17(15m)

5m, 10m or 15m each

Extension typeMotor signal cable (1 cable) -

Motor power cable (1 cable) -

Flexed Set of signal and power cables 1S- LCBL-01 - 1 set 7(5m)

13(10m)

17(15m)

5m, 10m or 15m each

Extension typeMotor signal cable - (1 cable)

Motor power cable - (1 cable)

Flexed Set of signal and power cables 1S- LUCBL-01 - 1 set 7(5m)

13(10m)

17(15m)

5m, 10m or 15m each

Direct typeMotor signal cable - (1 cable)

Motor power cable - (1 cable)

Nylon clamp NK-14N - 2 pcs. - for motor signal cable

Nylon clamp NK-18N - 2 pcs. - for motor power cable

Silicon rubber - 4 pcs -

CR751 controller

Fixed Set of signal and power cables 1F- UCBL-02 1 set - 6.7(10m)

12(15m)

17(20m)

10m, 15m or 20m each

Direct typeMotor signal cable (1 cable) -

Motor power cable (1 cable) -

Flexed Set of signal and power cables 1F- LUCBL-02 - 1 set 7(10m)

13(15m)

17(20m)

10m, 15m or 20m each

Direct typeMotor signal cable - (1 cable)

Motor power cable - (1 cable)

Nylon clamp NK-14N - 2 pcs. - for motor signal cable

Nylon clamp NK-18N - 2 pcs. - for motor power cable

Silicon rubber - 4 pcs -

2-103 Options

Robot arm

Specifications The specifications for the fixed type cables are the same as those for standard cables.

Shows usage conditions for flexed type cables in Table 2-18.

Table 2-18 Conditions for the flexed type cables

[Caution] The guidance of life count may greatly differ according to the usage state items related to Table 2-18 and to the amount of silicon grease applied in the cableveyor. Recommendation grease: G-501 (Supplier: Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.)

[Caution] This option can be installed on clean-type, but its cleanliness is not under warranty. [Caution] When a cableveyor is used, partitions are required to avoid overlapping or riding up of the cables. Also,

adjust the cable length to eliminate tension or excessive looseness, and fix it securely.

Cable configuration The configuration of the flexible cable is shown in Table 2-19. Refer to this table when selecting the cableveyor.

The configuration is the same between the length difference in the cable, and extension type / direct type.

Table 2-19 Cable configuration (Flexed type)

Item Specifications

Cable 1S- LCBL-01

1S- LUCBL-01

1F- LUCBL-02

Minimum flexed radius 100mm or more

Cableveyor, etc., occupation rate 50% or less

Maximum movement speed 2,000mm/s or less

Guidance of life count 7.5 million times (With silicone grease coating)

Environmental proof IP54 IP54 (except for the area approximately

500 mm from the end of the connector on

the controller side)

Cable configuration Motor signal cable 6 x 5, 8.5 x 1, and 1.7 x 1 6 x 7 and 1.7 x 1

Motor power cable 8.9 x 2 and 6.5 x 8 6.5 x 8 and 8.9 x 2

Item Motor signal cable Motor power cable

CR750 controller

No. of cores AWG#24

(0.2mm2)-4P

AWG#24

(0.2mm2)-7P

AWG#18

(0.75mm2)

AWG#16

(1.25mm2)-4C

AWG#18

(0.75mm2)-4C

Finish dimensions Approx. 6mm Approx. 8.5mm Approx. 1.7mm Approx. 8.9mm Approx. 6.5mm

No.of cables used 5 cables 1 cable 1 cable 3 cable 6 cable

No. in total 7 cables 9 cables

CR751 controller

No. of cores AWG#24

(0.2mm2)-4P

AWG#18

(0.75mm2)

AWG#16

(1.25mm2)-4C

AWG#18

(0.75mm2)-3C

Finish dimensions Approx. 6mm Approx. 1.7mm Approx. 8.9mm Approx. 6.5mm

No.of cables used 7 cables 1 cable 2 cable 8 cable

No. in total 8 cables 10 cables

Robot arm

Options 2-104

Fixing the flexible cable

Fig.2-69 Fixing the flexible cable (CR750 controller with RH-6/12/20FH series robot)

200

250

CN1

CN2

CN1

CN2

5m

NK-14N

NK-18N

NK-18N

NK-14N 300400mm

300400mm

Controller

Nylon clamp

Silicon rubber

Robot arm

Cover the extension terminal area with the cover etc. so that it may not be easily touched to the latch lever.

CAUTION

Nylon clamp

Nylon clamp

Nylon clamp

Nylon clamp

Extended flexible cable (Option)

The fixed cable (Standard attachment)

Extension section

Motor power cable Motor signal cable

(1) Connect the connector to the robot arm. The connection method to a robot arm is the same as a standard machine cable. Please refer to the sepa- rate "Instruction Manual/ROBOT ARM SETUP & MAINTENANCE" and connect.

(2) Wind the silicon rubber around the cable at a position 300 to 400 mm from the side of robot arm and exten- sion section as shown below, and fix with the nylon clamp to protect the cable from external stress.

min.

The bend size of cables are as follows.

240

290

min.

*1) The connection space for a machine cable.*1) *1)

2-105 Options

Robot arm

Fig.2-70 Fixing the flexible cable (CR750 controller with RH-3FHR series robot)

CN1 CN2

CN1

CN2

CN1 CN2

CN1

CN2

5m

()

NK-18N

300400mm

NK-14N

300400mm

230

300

Note1) When direct type, exchanges with the standard cable and connect directly.

Controller

Nylon clamp

Silicon rubber

Robot arm (Rear side of the base section)

Cover the extension terminal area with the cover etc. so that it may not be easily touched to the latch lever.

CAUTION

Nylon clamp

Nylon clamp

The fixed cable (Standard attachment)

Motor power cable

Motor signal cable

Extended flexible cable (Option)

Extension section Note1)

Latch

Latch Latch

The cable should bend and the size should be 230mm or more. And a connection space for a machine cable needs 300mm or more.

Motor power

Motor signal

Motor power Motor signal

min.

Robot arm

Options 2-106

Fig.2-71 Fixing the flexible cable (CR751 controller with RH-6/12/20FH series robot)

CN2

NK-14N

NK-18N

NK-18N

NK-14N

300500mm

300 500mm

AMP1AMP2

BRK

CN2

CN1

(CN2)(CN1)

AMP1 AMP2 BRK

( 2)

( 2)

Motor signal cable

Motor power cable

Nylon clamp

Robot arm

Nylon clamp

Silicon rubber

Nylon clamp

Nylon clamp

Robot controller

300 to 500

300 to 500m

Controller connector face

Motor power (CN1) Motor signal (CN2)

*1)

Two fixing screws

Two fixing screws

(1) Connect the connector to the robot arm. The connection method to a robot arm is the same as a standard machine cable. Please refer to the sep- arate "Instruction Manual/ROBOT ARM SETUP & MAINTENANCE" and connect.

(2) For protection of wires from external stress, refer to following. Wrap the cable with the supplied silicon rubber and fix the cable with nylon clamps in the area between the heat shrink tubes on the robot and the controller sides (flexible cable area).

Heat shrink tube

Heat shrink tube

Nylon clamp

*1) Connect the robot arm side connector to the connector which is inside the CONBOX cover. *2) The flexible cable area is the area between the heat shrink tubes on the robot and the controller sides.

*2)

*2)

200

250

min.

The bend size of cables are as follows.

240

290 *1) The connection space for a machine cable.*1) *1)

min.

2-107 Options

Robot arm

Fig.2-72 Fixing the flexible cable (CR751 controller with RH-3FHR series robot)

CN1

CN2

CN2

CN1 ( 2)

(CN2)(CN1)

AMP1 AMP2 BRK

NK-18N

300 500mm

NK-14N

( 2)

NK-18N

NK-14N

300500mm

ControllerNylon clamp

Silicon rubber

Robot arm (Rear side of the base section)

Nylon clamp Motor power cable

Motor signal cable

*1) Motor power (CN1) Motor signalMotor power

Motor signal

(CN2)

Nylon clamp

Heat shrink tube

300 to 500mm

Nylon clamp Nylon clamp

Two fixing screws

Heat shrink tube Two fixing screws

Controller connector face

*1) Connect the robot arm side connector to the connector which is inside the CONBOX cover.

*2) The flexible cable area is the area between the heat shrink tubes on the robot and the controller sides.

*2)

*2)

3 0 to 500mm

127

250

The cable should bend and the size should be 127mm or more. And a connection space for a machine cable needs 250mm or more.

min.

Robot arm

Options 2-108

(2) Stopper for changing the operating range

Order type: RH-6FH series ............................J1 axis: 1F-DH-01 RH-12FH/20FH series ............J1 axis: 1F-DH-02

RH-3FHR series.........................J1 axis: 1S-DH-05J1

J2 axis: 1S-DH-05J2

Outline

The operating range axis is limited by the robot arm's mechanical stopper and the controller parameters.

You can change the operating range of the RH-6FH/12FH/20FH series robot's J1 axis. And the RH-3FHR series robot, you can change the operating range of J1 and J2 axis.

If the axis could interfere with the peripheral devices, etc., and the operating range need to be limited, use this.

Configuration Table 2-20 Configuration devices

Specifications Table 2-21 Specifications

(1) The changeable angle shown in Table 2-21 indicates the operation range by the software. The limit by the mechanical stopper is positioned 3 degrees outward from that angle, so take care when designing the layout.

(2) The operating range is changed with robot arm settings (insertion of the pin) and parameter settings. Refer to the separate "Instruction Manual/ROBOT ARM SETUP & MAINTENANCE" and "Instruction Manual/ Detailed Explanation of Functions and Operations" for details.

(3) If the arm collides with mechanical stopper for operating range change at the automatic operation, replace- ment of the mechanical stopper is necessary.

Part name Type Qty. Mass(kg) Remarks

RH-6FH series

Stopper for changing the operat- ing range

1F-DH-01 1 set 0.05 hexagon socket head bolt (M10 x 20): 2 bolts

RH-12FH/20FH series

Stopper for changing the operat- ing range

1F-DH-02 1 set 0.05 hexagon socket head bolt (M12 x 20): 2 bolts

RH-3FHR series

Stopper for changing the operat- ing range

1S-DH-05J1 1 set 0.1 Pin (10 x 2)

Installation bolt (M4 x 12): two attachments

1S-DH-05J2 1 set 0.1 Pin (8 x 2)

Installation bolt (M4 x 12): two attachments

Axis Standard Changeable angle

RH-6FH/12FH/20FH series

J1 +/- side +/- 170 deg +/- 130 deg, +/- 150 deg

RH-3FHR series Note1)

Note1) Although the J1 axis and the J2 axis can be changed independently (independent per axis), each axis changes plus side /minus side both simultaneously per axis.

J1 +/- side +/- 225 deg +/- 90 deg

J2 +/- side +/- 225 deg +/- 60 deg

RH-6FH/12FH/20FH series

RH-3FHR series

2-109 Options

Robot arm

(3) Solenoid valve set

Order type: RH-6FH series ............................One set: 1F-VD01-01(Sink type)/1F-VD01E-01(Source type) Two sets: 1F-VD02-01(Sink type)/1F-VD02E-01(Source type)

Three sets: 1F-VD03-01(Sink type)/1F-VD03E-01(Source type)

Four sets: 1F-VD04-01(Sink type)/1F-VD04E-01(Source type)

RH-12FH/20FH series.............One set: 1S-VD01-01(Sink type)/1S-VD01E-01(Source type)

Two sets: 1S-VD02-01(Sink type)/1S-VD02E-01(Source type)

Three sets: 1S-VD03-01(Sink type)/1S-VD03E-01(Source type)

Four sets: 1S-VD04-01(Sink type)/1S-VD04E-01(Source type)

RH-3FHR series (Four sets) ... Standard specification: ....................... 1S-VD04-05(Sink type)

1S-VD04E-05(Source type)

Clean/Waterproof specification: ..... 1S-VD04W-05(Sink type)

1S-VD04WE-05(Source type)

Outline

The solenoid valve set is an option that is used for controlling toolings when various toolings, such as the hand, are installed at the end of the arm. Also, for easy installation of this electromaagnetic set onto the robot, it comes equipped with a manifold, couplings, connectors, among other things.

Configuration Table 2-22 Configuration equipment

Part name Type Q'ty Mass(kg)

Note1) Remark

RH-6FH series

Solenoid valve set (1 sets) 1F-VD01-01/

1F-VD01E-01

Either

one pc.

1.0

Hand output cable is already connected.

Refer to Page 117, "(5) Hand output cable".

M4 x 30 Two screws (Installation screws)

1F-VD0*-01: Sink type 1F-VD0*E-01: Source type.

Solenoid valve set (2 sets) 1F-VD02-01/

1F-VD02E-01

Either

one pc.

1.0

Solenoid valve set (3 sets) 1F-VD03-01/

1F-VD03E-01

Either

one pc.

1.0

Solenoid valve set (4 sets) 1F-VD04-01/

1F-VD04E-01

Either

one pc.

1.0

RH-12FH/20FH series

Solenoid valve set (1 sets) 1S-VD01-01/

1S-VD01E-01

Either

one pc.

1.0

Hand output cable is already connected.

Refer to Page 117, "(5) Hand output cable".

M4 x 8 Two screws (Installation screws)

1S-VD0*-01: Sink type 1S-VD0*E-01: Source type.

Solenoid valve set (2 sets) 1S-VD02-01/

1S-VD02E-01

Either

one pc.

1.0

Solenoid valve set (3 sets) 1S-VD03-01/

1S-VD03E-01

Either

one pc.

1.0

Solenoid valve set (4 sets) 1S-VD04-01/

1S-VD04E-01

Either

one pc.

1.0

1F-VD0*-01 1F-VD0*E-01

1S-VD0*-01 1S-VD0*E-01

1S-VD04-05 1S-VD04E-05

1S-VD04W-05 1S-VD04WE-05

Robot arm

Options 2-110

Specifications Table 2-23 Valve specifications

Table 2-24 Solenoid specifications

RH-3FHR series

Solenoid valve set (4 sets)

For Standard specification

1S-VD04-05/

1S-VD04E-05

Either

one pc.

0.6 For Standard specification

M5 x 8 Two screws (Installation screws)

Fixing nut for T slot : Two nuts

1S-VD04-05: Sink type

1S-VD04E-05: Source type

Solenoid valve set (4 sets)

For Clean/Waterproof spec- ification

1S-VD04W-05/

1S-VD04WE-05

Either

one pc.

0.6 For Clean/Waterproof specification

M5 x 8 Two screws (Installation screws)

Fixing nut for T slot : Two nuts

1S-VD04W-05: Sink type

1S-VD04WE-05: Source type

Note1) Mass indicates one set.

Item Specifications

Solenoid valve set type 1F-VD0*-01, 1F-VD0*E-01

1S-VD04-05, 1S-VD04E-05

1S-VD04W-05, 1S-VD04WE-05

1S-VD0*-01, 1S-VD0*E-01

Number of positions 2

Port 5 Note1)

Note1) Couplings of unused solenoid valves must be blocked with plugs. If they are not blocked, supplied air will blow out from the couplings, lowering the air pressure of the solenoid valves being used and making them nonfunctional.

Recommended plugs: KQ2P-04 plug (RH-6FH series, RH-3FHR series) made by SMC KQ2P-06 plug (RH-12FH/20FH series) made by SMC.

Valve function Double solenoid

Operating fluid Clean air Note2)

Note2)

Operating method Internal pilot method

Effective sectional area (CV value) 1.1mm2 (0.06) 7.92mm2 (0.44)

Oiling Unnecessary

Operating pressure range 0.1 to 0.7MPa

Response time 15msec or less (at 0.5 MPa) 22msec or less (at 0.5 MPa)

Max. operating frequency 10Hz 5Hz

Ambient temperature -10 to 50 (However, there must be no condensation.)

Item Specifications

Method Built-in fly-wheel diodes with surge protection

Coil rated voltage DC24V 10%

Power consumption 0.55W

Voltage protection circuit with power surge protection Diode

Part name Type Q'ty Mass(kg)

Note1) Remark

CAUTION The air to be provided must be clean, i.e., filtered with a mist separator or air filter. Failing to do so may lead to malfunctions.

2-111 Options

Robot arm

Fig.2-73 Outline dimensional drawing (RH-6FH series)

SOL1A

SOL1B

SOL2A

SOL2B

A3

A4

A1 A2

B3 B4

B1 B2

SOL3A

SOL3B

SOL4A

SOL4B

A3

A4

A1 A2

B3 B4

B1 B2

<><>

SOL1A

SOL1B

SOL2A

SOL2B

A3

A4

A1 A2

B3 B4

B1 B2

SOL3A

SOL3B

SOL4A

SOL4B

A3

A4

A1 A2

B3 B4

B1 B2

GR1

GR2

+24V (COM)

GR3

GR4

GR5

GR6

+24V (COM)

GR7

GR8

GR1

GR2

24G

GR3

GR4

GR5

GR6

24G

GR7

GR8

50mm80mm

Part name 1 set 2 sets 3 sets 4 sets Specification

Solenoid valve 1 2 3 4

Manifold block 1 1 1 1

Quick coupling (A/B port) 8 8 8 8 4

Quick coupling (P/R port) 2 2 2 2 6

Connector 1 1 2 2 1-1318115-4

Contact 3 5 8 10 1318112-1

Installation screw (Combination slotted-cross recessed pan head machine screw)

2 2 2 2 M4x30

Note) The hand output cable (1F-GR60S-01: Option) is unnecessary.

Sink type> Connector name

Reserved

Reserved Reserved

Reserved

Reserved Reserved

White

White

Black

Red Black

Red Black

Red Black

Red

Black

Red Black

Red Black

Red Black

Red

Source type Connector name

Reserved

Reserved Reserved

Reserved

Reserved Reserved

White

White

Red

Black

Red

Black Red

Black

Red

Black

Red

Black

Red

Black

Red

Black

Red

Black

Robot arm

Options 2-112

Fig.2-74 Outline dimensional drawing (RH-12FH/20FH series)

SOL1A

SOL1B

SOL2A

SOL2B

A3

A4

A1 A2

B3 B4

B1 B2

SOL3A

SOL3B

SOL4A

SOL4B

A3

A4

A1 A2

B3 B4

B1 B2

<><>

SOL1A

SOL1B

SOL2A

SOL2B

A3

A4

A1 A2

B3 B4

B1 B2

SOL3A

SOL3B

SOL4A

SOL4B

A3

A4

A1 A2

B3 B4

B1 B2

GR1

GR2

+24V (COM)

GR3

GR4

GR5

GR6

+24V (COM)

GR7

GR8

GR1

GR2

24G

GR3

GR4

GR5

GR6

24G

GR7

GR8

102

93 4.5

13 1

1 3 8.

5

3 .5

80 11

50.137.8

87.9

4.5

21

GR1

GR2

4.5

Note) The hand output cable (1F-GR60S-01: Option) is unnecessary.

Part no. Part name 1 sets 2 sets 3 sets 4 sets Specifications

<1> Solenoid valve 1 2 3 4

<2> Manifold block 1 1 1 1

<3> Quick coupling 2 4 6 8 6

<4> Block plate 1 1 1 1

<5> Quick coupling 1 1 1 1 6

<6> Quick coupling 1 1 1 1 6

<7> Connector 1 1 2 2 1-1318115-4

<8> Contact 6 6 12 12 1318112-1

<9> Installation screw 4 4 4 4 M48

Sink type> Connector name

Reserved

Reserved Reserved

Reserved

Reserved Reserved

White

White

Black

Red Black

Red Black

Red Black

Red

Black

Red Black

Red Black

Red Black

Red

Source type Connector name

Reserved

Reserved Reserved

Reserved

Reserved Reserved

White

White

Red

Black

Red

Black Red

Black

Red

Black

Red

Black

Red

Black

Red

Black

Red

Black

2-113 Options

Robot arm

Fig.2-75 Outline dimensional drawing (RH-3FHR series: Standard specification)

SOL1A

SOL1B

SOL2A

SOL2B

A3

A4

A1 A2

B3 B4

B1 B2

SOL3A

SOL3B

SOL4A

SOL4B

A3

A4

A1 A2

B3 B4

B1 B2

<><>

SOL1A

SOL1B

SOL2A

SOL2B

A3

A4

A1 A2

B3 B4

B1 B2

SOL3A

SOL3B

SOL4A

SOL4B

A3

A4

A1 A2

B3 B4

B1 B2

GR1

GR2

+24V (COM)

GR3

GR4

GR5

GR6

+24V (COM)

GR7

GR8

GR1

GR2

24G

GR3

GR4

GR5

GR6

24G

GR7

GR8

Sink type> Connector name

Reserved

Reserved Reserved

Reserved

Reserved Reserved

White

White

Black

Red Black

Red Black

Red Black

Red

Black

Red Black

Red Black

Red Black

Red

Source type Connector name

Reserved

Reserved Reserved

Reserved

Reserved Reserved

White

White

Red

Black

Red

Black Red

Black

Red

Black

Red

Black

Red

Black

Red

Black

Red

Black

(S O

L *

A )

(S O

L *

B )

Part no. Part name Qty. Specifications

Solenoid valve 4

Quick coupling 8 4 (Elbow)

Quick coupling 1 6 (Elbow)

Quick coupling 1 6 (Elbow)

Connector 2 1-1318115-4

Contact 12 1318112-1

Solenoid valve cover 1

Manifold block 1

Installation screw 2 Fixing screw M5x8, spring washer, plain washer (attachments)

RH-3FHR series (Standard specification)

2-5.5 through hole

*The length to connector from solenoid valve is 430mm each.

Note) The optional hand output cable (1S-GR35S-02) is unnecessary.

Robot arm

Options 2-114

Fig.2-76 Outline dimensional drawing (RH-3FHR series: Clean/Waterproof specification)

SOL1A

SOL1B

SOL2A

SOL2B

A3

A4

A1 A2

B3 B4

B1 B2

SOL3A

SOL3B

SOL4A

SOL4B

A3

A4

A1 A2

B3 B4

B1 B2

<><>

SOL1A

SOL1B

SOL2A

SOL2B

A3

A4

A1 A2

B3 B4

B1 B2

SOL3A

SOL3B

SOL4A

SOL4B

A3

A4

A1 A2

B3 B4

B1 B2

GR1

GR2

+24V (COM)

GR3

GR4

GR5

GR6

+24V (COM)

GR7

GR8

GR1

GR2

24G

GR3

GR4

GR5

GR6

24G

GR7

GR8

Sink type> Connector name

Reserved

Reserved Reserved

Reserved

Reserved Reserved

White

White

Black

Red Black

Red Black

Red Black

Red

Black

Red Black

Red Black

Red Black

Red

Source type Connector name

Reserved

Reserved Reserved

Reserved

Reserved Reserved

White

White

Red

Black

Red

Black

Red

Black

Red

Black

Red

Black

Red

Black

Red

Black

Red

Black

AIR IN RETURN

Part no. Part name Qty. Specifications

Solenoid valve 4

Quick coupling 8 4 (Elbow)

Quick coupling 1 6 (Elbow)

Quick coupling 1 6 (Elbow)

Connector 2 1-1318115-4

Contact 12 1318112-1

Solenoid valve cover 1

Manifold block 1

Installation screw 2 Fixing screw M5x8, spring washer, plain washer (attachments)

RH-3FHR series (Clean/Waterproof specification)

*The length to connector from solenoid valve is 430mm each.

Note) The optional hand output cable (1S-GR35S-02) is unnecessary.

2-115 Options

Robot arm

(4) Hand input cable

Order type: RH-6FH series ............................1F-HC35C-01 RH-12FH/20FH series ............1F-HC35C-02

RH-3FHR series.........................1S-HC00S-01

Outline

The hand input cable is used for customer-designed pneumatic hands.

It is necessary to use this to receive the hand's open/close confirmation signals and grasping confirmation signals, at the controller.

One end of the cable connects to the connector for hand input signals, which is in the wrist section of the hand. The other end of the cable connected to the sensor inside the hand customer designed.

To extend the wiring to the outside of the robot arm, optional external wiring and pip- ing box (RH-6FH series: 1F-UT-BOX, RH-12FH/20FH series: 1F-UT-BOX-01) is required.

Configuration Table 2-25 Configuration equipment

Specifications Table 2-26 Specifications

Part name Type Qty. Mass (kg) Note1)

Note1) Mass indicates one set.

Remarks

RH-6FH series

Hand input cable 1F-HC35C-01 1 cable 0.2

RH-12FH/20FH series

Hand input cable 1F-HC35C-02 1 cable 0.2

RH-3FHR series

Hand input cable 1S-HC00S-01 1 cable 0.1 Three rubber sheets, seven cable clamp attachment

Item Specifications Remarks

RH-6FH series

Size x cable core AWG#24 (0.2mm2)12 One-sided connector, one-sided cable bridging

Total length 1,650mm (Including the curl section, which is 350mm long

RH-12FH/20FH series

Size x cable core AWG#24 (0.2mm2)12 One-sided connector, one-sided cable bridging

Total length 1,800mm (Including the curl section, which is 350mm long

RH-3FHR series

Size x cable core AWG#24 (0.2mm2)6 One-sided connector, one-sided cable bridging

Total length 1,210mm

Robot arm

Options 2-116

Fig.2-77 Outside dimensional drawing and pin assignment (RH-6FH/12FH/20FH series)

Fig.2-78 Outside dimensional drawing and pin assignment (RH-3FHR series)

[Caution] This option can be installed on clean-type, but its cleanliness is not under warranty.

15

400 350 45010

450

25

1-1318115-3 (

HC H C

1 H

C 2

HC1 HC2 HC3 HC4

+24V

24G HC5 HC6

( 1)

( 2)

( 3)

( 4)

( 5)

( 6)

A1

A2 A3 B1 B2 B3

A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3

HC7 HC8

( 7)

( 8)

100

Note) Pin assignment of sink and source is the same.

(Tyco Electronics AMP)

(Purple) (Brown) (Blue) (Black)

(Yellow)

(Green) (Red) (White) (Gray) (Pink)

24V Reserve

1 2 3 4

Reserve 24G HC5 HC6 HC7 HC8

A

Alteration dimensions A

Type Dimensions of A

(mm)

1F-HC35C-01 45010

1F-HC35C-02 60010

HC1 HC2 HC3 HC4

+24V

24G

()

()

()

()

A1

A2 A3 B1 B2 B3

A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3

1-1318115-3 (())

() 400

(500)

()

6

(525)

1210()

(50)

(Z)

80

1S-HC00S-01HC

(30)

(55)

(30) (Fixing place of tool side)

(Usable length for customer)

(Z-axis end)

1210 (Total length)

Tyco Electronics AMP)

(White)

(White) (Black) (White) (Black)

(Black)

+24V Reserve HC1 HC2 HC3 HC4

Reserve 24 Reserve Reserve Reserve Reserve

Note) Pin assignment of sink and source is the same.

*1) The signal name is described in the marking sticker.

*2) Cable clamping portion.

*1) *2) *2)

2-117 Options

Robot arm

(5) Hand output cable

Order type: RH-6FH/12FH/20FH series................1F-GR60S-01 RH-3FHR series.......................................1S-GR35S-02

Outline

The hand output cable (solenoid valve connection cable) is an option that is used when a solenoid valve other than one of the solenoid valve set options, is used.

One end of the cable has a connector that connects to the input terminal inside the robot. The other end of the cable is connected.

To extend the wiring to the outside of the robot arm, optional external wiring and pip- ing box (RH-6FH series: 1F-UT-BOX, RH-12FH/20FH series: 1F-UT-BOX-01) is required.

Configuration Table 2-27 Configuration equipment

Specifications

Table 2-28 Specifications

Fig.2-79 Outline dimensional drawing and pin assignment

[Caution] This option can be installed on clean-type, but its cleanliness is not under warranty.

Part name Type Qty. Mass (kg) Note1)

Note1) Mass indicates one set.

Remarks

Hand output cable 1F-GR60S-01 1 cable 0.3 For RH-6FH/12FH/20FH series

Hand output cable 1S-GR35S-02 1 cable 0.2 For RH-3FHR series

Item Specifications Remarks

Size x Cable core AWG#24(0.2mm2) x 12 cores One side connector and one side cable connection

Total length 1,050mm For RH-6FH/12FH/20FH series (1F-GR60S-01)

450mm For RH-3FHR series (1S-GR35S-02)

15

600

(100)

1-1318115-4 ( ())

G R

1 G

R 2

GR

GR1

GR3 GR4

+24V (COM)

+24VCOM

GR5

GR7

( 1)

( 3)

( 4)

( 5)

( 7)

A1

A2 A3

B1 B2 B3

A1 A2 A3

B1 B2 B3

GR8

( 8)

B4

GR2 2) A4

GR6 ( 6) A4

B4

GR1

GR3 GR4

24GND (COM)

24GNDCOM

GR5

GR7

( 1)

( 3)

( 4)

( 5)

( 7)

GR8

( 8)

GR2 2)

GR6 ( 6)

450 (Tyco Electronics AMP)

(Yellow) Reserve

Reserve Reserve

(Purple) (Brown) (Blue) (Black)

(Green)

(Red) (White) (Gray) (Pink)

+2 ( ) Reserve

Reserve Reserve

Reserve

Reserve Reserve

Reserve

Reserve Reserve

Sink type Source type

A B

(C)

Alteration dimensions of A to C

(Unit: mm)

Type name A B C

1F-GR60S-01 600 450 100

1S-GR35S-02 350 100 80

Robot arm

Options 2-118

(6) Hand curl tube

Order type: RH-6FH series ............................Four sets: 1E-ST0408C-300 RH-12FH/20FH series ............Four sets: 1N-ST0608C-01

Outline

The hand curl tube is a curl tube for the pneumatic hand.

Configuration Table 2-29 Configuration equipment

Specifications Table 2-30 Specifications

Fig.2-80 Outline dimensional drawing

[Caution] This option can be installed on clean-type, but its cleanliness is not under warranty.

Part name Type Qty. Mass(kg)Note1)

Note1) Mass indicates one set.

Remarks

RH-6FH series

Hand curl tube (Four set: 8 pcs.) 1E-ST0408C-300 1 pc. 0.1 4 tube, 8pcs

RH-12FH/20FH series

Hand curl tube (Four set: 8 pcs.) 1N-ST0608C-01 1 pc. 0.4 6 tube, 8pcs

Item Specifications

RH-6FH series RH-12FH/20FH series

Material Urethane Urethane

Size Outside diameter: 4 x Inside diameter2.5 Outside diameter: 6 x Inside diameter4

RH-6FH series: 1E-ST0408C-300 (4 x 8pcs)

RH-12FH/20FH series: 1N-ST0608C-01 (6 x 8pcs)

100

()

300

600

()

(Tooling side)

(Robot side)

300

()

250

750

()

(Tooling side)

(Robot side)

2-119 Options

Robot arm

(7) Hand tube

Order type: RH-3FHR series .......................................1E-ST0304S

Outline

The hand tube is a tube for the pneumatic hand.

Configuration Table 2-31 Configuration equipment

Specifications

Table 2-32 Specifications

* We recommend confirming of the wear and tear and the rub in the cycle of the six months and please prepare as service parts.

Fig.2-81 Outline dimensional drawing

[Caution] This option can be installed on clean-type, but its cleanliness is not under warranty.

Part name Type Qty. Mass(kg)Note1)

Note1) Mass indicates one set.

Remarks

RH-3FHR series

Hand tube (4 pcs.) 1E-ST0304S 1 pc. 0.1 Union (4 to 3): Eight piece attachment

(Four of them is installing at shipping)

Three rubber sheets, six cable clamp

attachment

Item Specifications

Material Urethane One side is with the tape.

Size Outside diameter: 3 x Inside diameter1.5: 4 pcs.

()

RH-3FHR series: 1E-ST0304S (4 pcs.)

Note) Each tube have union and tape (for inhibition of grease adhesion) at each end. Remove the tape and connect with tool.

Tape (for inhibition of grease adhesion)

(Usable length for customer)

(Fixing place of tool side) Z-axis end Clamp place

U3-B 3 air tube Inside diameter : 1.5 x 4

UR4-3M Change 4 to 3 union x 4

Robot arm

Options 2-120

(8) Internal Wiring/Piping set for hand

Order type: RH-6FH series, 200mm stroke................................1F-HS408S-01 RH-6FH series, 340mm stroke ...............................1F-HS408S-02

RH-12FH/20FH series, 350mm stroke................1F-HS604S-01

RH-12FH/20FH series, 450mm stroke................1F-HS604S-02

Outline

This set, consisting of air hoses and cables, is for feeding air hoses and hand input signal cables from the No. 2 arm through to the shaft tip. A plate is already attached to be fixed onto the No. 2 arm, and therefore it is easy to ensure the necessary space for wiring and piping.

This can be used together with the separately sold electromagnetic valve set option.

Configuration Table 2-33 Configuration equipment

Specification Table 2-34 Specification

[Caution] This option can be installed on clean-type, but its cleanliness is not under warranty.

Item Type Qty. Mass (Kg) Note1)

Note1) Mass indicates one set.

Remarks

RH-6FH series

Internal Wiring/Piping set

for hand

(For 200mm stroke)

1F-HS408S-01 1 0.4 The air hose and the cable for hand input signals are

contained.

The grease (for application to shaft top) and the

union band (for fixation of the hose and the cable)

are attached. Internal Wiring/Piping set

for hand

(For 340mm stroke)

1F-HS408S-02 1 0.4

RH-12FH/20FH series

Internal Wiring/Piping set

for hand

(For 350mm stroke)

1F-HS604S-01 1 0.4 The air hose and the cable for hand input signals are

contained.

The grease (for application to shaft top) and the

union band (for fixation of the hose and the cable)

are attached. Internal Wiring/Piping set

for hand

(For 450mm stroke)

1F-HS604S-02 1 0.4

Item

Specification

Remarks1F-HS408S-01

1F-HS408S-02

1F-HS604S-01

1F-HS604S-02

Air hose 4 x 8pcs 6 x 4pcs Both ends are free.

Hand input signal cable Signal AWG #26(0.13mm2)8pcs The robot arm side is connector (HC1, HC2), and

one side is free.Power AWG #22(0.35mm2)2pcs

Useable length from the shaft end 380mm 420mm The length from the shaft end which can be used of

customer.

This option

2-121 Options

Robot arm

Fig.2-82 Outline dimension drawing and pin assignment (Hand input cable)

15

1-1318115-3(2)AMP

(Red) (White) (Black) (Green)

(Red)

Pin assignment

(White & Orange) (Orange)

(White & Green) (Green)

(White) (White & Blue)

(Blue) (White & Brown)

(Brown)

1-1318115-3 (2pcs) A P

Robot arm

Options 2-122

(9) External Wiring/Piping box

Order type: RH-6FH series ............................1F-UT-BOX RH-12FH/20FH series............1F-UT-BOX-01

Outline

This is a very useful option when removing the air hoses and signal lines from the rear of the No. 2 arm, and pulling hand wiring and piping out to the robots exterior.

The joint for connects to the external hose is prepared, and the holes which fixes the signal cable to pull out with cable clamp are prepared. Optional hand output cables and hand input cables can be fixed here.

This option can also be used on the oil mist and clean specifications.

Configuration Table 2-35 Configuration equipment

Specification Table 2-36 Specification

An outside dimension and a component are shown in Fig. 2-83 or Fig. 2-84.

Part name Type Qty. Mass (Kg) Note1)

Note1) Mass indicates one set.

Remarks

RH-6FH series

External Wiring/Piping box 1F-UT-BOX 1 0.6 Attachments:

Air hose (black) 4-8

Air hose (black) 6-1

Air hose (white) 6-1

Installation screw M4x8: 4 (Plain washer)

Cable tie: 4

Coupling: 2

Simple spanner for resin nuts

RH-12FH/20FH series

External Wiring/Piping box 1F-UT-BOX-01 1 0.6 Attachments:

Air hose (black) 6-8

Installation screw M4x12: 4 (Plain washer)

Cable tie: 4

Simple spanner for resin nuts

Item Specification Remarks

RH-6FH series

Outline 106(W) x 73.6(D) x 72(H) The coupling is included.

The hole for wiring drawers 21 x 4 places Fix the cable by cable clamp etc.

Coupling For 4 air hose x 8pcs Installed previously

For 6 air hose x 2pcs

RH-12FH/20FH series

Outline 100(W) x 91.9(D) x 70(H) The coupling is included.

The hole for wiring drawers 21 x 4 places Fix the cable by cable clamp etc.

Coupling For 6 air hose x 8pcs Installed previously

Pull out Wiring/Piping

2-123 Options

Robot arm

Fig.2-83 Outline dimension and configurations (RH-6FH series)

Configuration

Part name Qty. Specification

<1> External Wiring/Piping box housing 1

<2> Quick coupling 8 4 (Elbow)

<3> Quick coupling 2 6 (Elbow)

<4> 21 hole 4 The grommet is attached to each hole. (Two holes are in the right and the left.)

<5> Manifold block 1

<6> Plug 8 Stopper for 4 quick coupling

<7> Plug 2 Stopper for 6 quick coupling

- Simple spanner for resin nuts 1 Attachment

- Installation screw 4 Attachment, M4x8 (Plain washer)

- Air hose 8 Attachment, 4 (Black)

- Air hose 1 Attachment, 6 (Black)

- Air hose 1 Attachment, 6 (White)

- Cable tie 4 Attachment

- Coupling 2 Attachment, 6 (Elbow)

Robot arm

Options 2-124

Fig.2-84 Outline dimension and configurations (RH-12FH/20FH series)

Configuration

Part name Qty. Specification

<1> External Wiring/Piping box housing 1

<2> Quick coupling 8 6 (Elbow)

<3> 21 hole 4 The grommet is attached to each hole. (Two holes are in the right and the left.)

<4> Manifold block 1

<5> Plug 8 Stopper for 6 quick coupling

- Simple spanner for resin nuts 1 Attachment

- Installation screw 4 Attachment, M4x12 (Plain washer)

- Air hose 8 Attachment, 6 (Black)

- Cable tie 4 Attachment

2-125 About Overhaul

Robot arm

2.8 About Overhaul

Robots which have been in operation for an extended period of time can suffer from wear and other forms of deterioration. In regard to such robots, we define overhaul as an operation to replace parts running out of speci- fied service life or other parts which have been damaged, so that the robots may be put back in shape for contin- ued use. As a rule of thumb, it is recommended that overhaul be carried out before the total amount of servo-on time reaches the specified time (24,000 hours for the robot arm and 36,000 hours for the controller) (See Fig. 2- 85.). However, the degree of the equipment's wear and deterioration presumably varies depending on their operat- ing conditions. Especially for operation with high load and frequency, the maintenance cycle may be shorter. For details on the part selection for replacement and the timing of overhaul, contact your dealer.

Fig.2-85 Periodic inspection/overhaul periods

Shipment

F ai

lu re

r at

e

Predetermined time period

If overhaul is performed

Servo-on time

If overhaul is not performed

Periodic inspection Over- haul

Robot arm

Maintenance parts 2-126

2.9 Maintenance parts

The consumable parts used in the robot arm are shown in Table 2-37. Purchase these parts from the designated maker or dealer when required. Some Mitsubishi-designated parts differ from the maker's standard parts. Thus, confirm the part name, robot arm and controller serial No. and purchase the parts from the dealer.

Table 2-37 Consumable part list

No. Part name Type Note1)

Note1) Confirm the robot arm serial No., and contact the dealer or service branch of Mitsubishi Electric Co., for the type.

Usage place Qty. Supplier

Common parts between robot type

1 Grease Reduction gears of each axis As needed

Mitsubishi Electric 2 Ball screw

Ball spline As needed

3 Lithium battery ER6V Front section of the base 3

RH-6FH series

4 Timing belt J3 axis 1

Mitsubishi Electric 5 J4 axis motor side 1

6 J4 axis shaft side 1

RH-12FH series

7 Timing belt J3 axis 1

Mitsubishi Electric 8 J4 axis motor side 1

9 J4 axis shaft side 1

RH-20FH series

10 Timing belt J3 axis 1

Mitsubishi Electric 11 J4 axis motor side 1

12 J4 axis shaft side 1

RH-3FHR series

13 Timing belt J1 axis 1

Mitsubishi Electric

14 J2 axis 1

15 J3 axis 1

16 J4 axis motor side 1

17 J4 axis shaft side 1

3-127 Standard specifications

3Controller

3 Controller

3.1 Standard specifications

3.1.1 Basic specifications Table 3-1 Specifications of controller

Item Unit Specification Remarks

Type CR750- HD-1

CR751- HD-0

CR750-03HRD-1

CR751-03HRD-0

in type name shows the load

(6kg: 06, 12kg: 12, 20kg: 20) of

the robot arm.

CR750-03HRD-1 and CR751-0.HRD-

0 controller are for RH-3FHR only.

Number of control axis Simultaneously 4

Memory

capacity

Programmed positions point 39,000

No. of steps step 78,000

Number of program 512

Robot language MELFA-BASIC IV, V

Teaching method Pose teaching method, MDI method Note1)

External input and output

Input and output point 0/0 Max. 256/256 by option

Dedicated input/output Assigned with general-purpose

input/output

The signal number of "STOP" input

signals is fixing.

Hand open/close input/output point 8/8 Built-in

Emergency stop input point 1 Duplicated

Door switch input point 1 Duplicated

Enabling device input point 1 Duplicated

Emergency stop output point 1 Duplicated

Mode output point 1 Duplicated

Robot error output point 1 Duplicated

Addition axis synchronization point 1 Duplicated

Mode changeover switch input point 1 Duplicated

(CR751 controller only)

Interface RS-422 port 1 Only for T/B

Ethernet port 1 10BASE-T/100BASE-Tx

USB port 1 Ver.2.0 FullSpeed

Only device function

Additional axis interface Channel 1 SSCNET III (Connects with MR-J3-

BS, MR-J4-B series)

Tracking interface Channel 2

Option slot slot 2 For option interface

Power

source

Input voltage range V RH-6FH series, RH-3FHR series:

Single phase AC180 to 253

RH-12FH/20FH seriesNote2) :

Three phase AC180 to 253, or

Single phase AC207 to 253

Power capacity kVA RH-6FH series, RH-3FHR series: 1.0

RH-12/20FH series: 1.5 Does not include rush current. Note3)

Power supply frequency Hz 50/60

Outline dimensions Note4) mm CR750 controller

430(W) x 425(D) x 174(H)

Excluding protrusions

CR751 controller

430(W) x 425(D) x 98(H)

Mass kg CR750 controller

RH-6FH series: Approx. 16

RV-12FH/20FH series: Approx. 18

CR751 controller: Approx. 12

Construction Self-contained floor type, Opened type. Installation vertically or horizontally

IP20 Note5)

Operating temperature range 0 to 40

3Controller

Standard specifications 3-128

3.1.2 Protection specifications and operating supply A protection method complying with the IEC Standard IP20 (Opened type) is adopted for the controller.

The IEC IP symbols refer only to the degree of protection between the solid and the fluids, and don't indicated that any special protection has been constructed for the prevention against oil and water.

Information

The IEC IP20

It indicates the protective structure that prevents an iron ball 12 0 +0.05mm diameter, which is being pressed with

the power of 3.1 kg10%, from going through the opening in the outer sheath of the supplied equipment.

Refer to the section Page 229, "6.2 Working environment" for details on the working environment.

Ambient humidity %RH 45 to 85 Without dew drops

Grounding 100 or less 100or less (class D grounding)Note6)

Paint color Dark gray Equivalent to Munsell: 3.5PB3.2/0.8

Note1) Pose teaching method: The method to register the current position of the robot arm. MDI method: The method to register by inputting the numerical value Immediate.

Note2) Both the three phase power supply and the single phase power supply can use this product according to voltage condi- tions.

Note3) The power capacity is the rating value for normal operation. The power capacity does not include the rush current when the power is turned ON. The power capacity is a guideline and the actual operation is affected by the input power volt- age. The power consumption in the specific operation pattern with the RH-6FH is approx. 0.3kW and RH-20FH is approx. 0.49kW. The short circuit breaker should use the following. * Operate by the current leakage under the commercial frequency domain (50-60Hz). If sensitive to the high frequency

ingredient, it will become the cause in which below the maximum leak current value carries out the trip. Note4) Refer to Page 134, "3.3.1 Outside dimensions" for details. Note5) This controller is standard specification. (Refer to Page 128, "3.1.2 Protection specifications and operating supply".) Note6) The robot must be grounded by the customer.

Item Unit Specification Remarks

3-129 Names of each part

3 Controller

3.2 Names of each part

3.2.1 Controller (1) CR750 controller

Fig.3-1 Names of controller parts (CR750)

Controller (Front side) <15>

<6>

<16> <17> <3>

<18>

<20> Fan, Air suction

<7> <10><8> <9>

<1><2>

<19>

Attached cover

Controller (Rear side)

Exhaust downward (Bottom)

<5><4>

<13> <12> <11> <14>

<20>: The operation panel

<24> <25> <26> <27> <28> <29>

<23><22><21>

<1>: ACIN terminal

There are three types (Type A, B, and C) of the terminals. Refer to next page for details.

3 Controller

Names of each part 3-130

<1> ACIN terminal ................................................The terminal box for AC power source (single phase or single phase/ three phase, AC200V) input. (Inner side of a cover) There are three types of the terminal and the terminal differs depending on the model and specification (CE or non-CE).

Refer to a separate manual INSTRUCTION MANUAL/Controller setup, basic operation, and maintenance for how to connect a power cable.

<2> PE terminal .....................................................The screw for grounding of the cable. (M4 screw x 2 place) <3> Power switch .................................................This turns the control power ON/OFF. (With earth leakage breaker function)

<4> Machine cable connector (motor signal) (CN1)

Connect with the CN1 connector of the robot arm. <5> Machine cable connector (motor power) (CN2)

Connect with the CN2 connector of the robot arm. <6> T/B connection connector (TB) ...........This is a dedicated connector for connecting the T/B. When not using T/

B, connect the attached dummy connector. <7><8><9><10> CNUSR connector ..............The connector for input/ output connection dedicated for robot. (a plug

connector attached) <7>: CNUSR11, <8>: CNUSR12, <9>: CNUSR13, <10>: CNUSR2 Refer to a separate manual INSTRUCTION MANUAL/Controller setup, basic operation, and maintenance for the connection method and the further description of pin assign.

<11> LAN connector (LAN)......................... For LAN connection <12> ExtOPT connector (ExtOPT) .......... Connect the cable for addition axis control. <13> RIO connector (RIO) ........................... Connect the extension parallel input/output unit. <14> Option slot (SLOT1, SLOT2)........... Install the interface optional. (Install the cover, when not using.) <15> Interface cover ...................................... USB interface and battery are mounted. <16> Mode key switch ................................... This key switch changes the robot's operation mode.

AUTOMATIC ..........Operations from the controller or external equipment are valid. Operations for which the operation mode must be at the external device or T/B are not possible. (Exclude the start of automatic operation.)

MANUAL ..................When the T/B is valid, only operations from the T/B are valid. Operations for which the operation mode must be at the external device or controller are not possible.

<17> Emergency stop switch...................... This switch stops the robot in an emergency state. The servo turns OFF. <18> Filter cover.............................................. There is an air filter inside the cover. <19> Grounding terminal............................... The grounding terminal for connecting cables of option card. (M3 screw x 2

places) <20> Operation panel ..................................... The operation panel for servo ON/OFF, START/STOP the program etc. <21> Display panel (STATUS.NUMBER) ........... The alarm No., program No., override value (%), etc., are displayed. <22> CHNGDISP button ............................... This button changes the details displayed on the display panel in the order

of "Override" "Line No." "Program No." "User information." "Maker information..

Model Non-CE specification CE specification

RH-6FH series

RH-3FHR series

Type A: For single phase

Connect the primary power supply to L1 and L2 terminal.

Type C: For single phase

Connect the primary power supply to L1 and N terminal.

RH-12FH series

RH-20FH series

Type B: For single phase/three phase

When using the three phase primary power supply, connect to L1, L2, and L3 terminal. When using the single phase primary power supply, connect to L1 and L3 terminal.

L1 L2

L1 N

L1 L3L2

3-131 Names of each part

3 Controller

<23> UP/DOWN button ............................... This scrolls up or down the details displayed on the "STATUS. NUMBER" display panel.

<24> SVO.ON button...................................... This turns ON the servo power. (The servo turns ON.) <25> SVO.OFF button.................................. This turns OFF the servo power. (The servo turns OFF.) <26> START button........................................ This executes the program and operates the robot. The program is run

continuously. <27> STOP button .......................................... This stops the robot immediately. The servo does not turn OFF. <28> RESET button ........................................ This resets the error. This also resets the program's halted state and

resets the program. <29> END button.............................................. This stops the program being executed at the last line or End statement.

3 Controller

Names of each part 3-132

(2) CR751 controller

Fig.3-2 Names of controller parts (CR751)

<1> ACIN terminal ...........................................The connector for AC power source (single phase or single phase/three phase, AC200V) input. (a socket housing and a terminal are attached). Refer to a separate manual INSTRUCTION MANUAL/Controller setup, basic operation, and maintenance for how to connect a power cable.

<2> PE terminal ................................................The screw for grounding of the cable. (M4 screw x 2 place) <3> POWER lamp.............................................Lamp of control power source <4> Machine cable connector (motor power)

AMP1, AMP2: Motor power, BRK: Motor brake <5> Machine cable connector (motor signal)

CN2: Motor signal <6>T/B connection connector (TB) ........This is a dedicated connector for connecting the R33TB. When not using T/

B, connect the attached dummy plug. <7>Filter cover..................................................There is an air filter and buttery inside this cover. <8>CNUSR connector ...................................The connector for input/ output connection dedicated for robot.

(CNUSR1 CNUSR2) (a plug connector attached) Refer to a separate manual INSTRUCTION MANUAL/Controller setup, basic operation, and maintenance for the connection method and thefurther description of pin assign.

<9>Grounding terminal...................................The grounding terminal for connecting cables of option card. (M3 screw x 2 places)

<10>Power supply charge lamp (CRARGE) The lamp is to ensure safe timing (prevent electric shocks) when removing the cover (users are not normally required to remove the cover). This lamp is illuminated (red) when electrical energy accumulates on the controllers power supply circuit board due to the robots servo being ON.

<2> <1> <3>

<4> <15> <9>

<5> <6> <14> <13> <12><11> <8>

<10><7>

Controller (Front side)

Exhaust

Controller (Rear side)

3-133 Names of each part

3 Controller

After turning the control power OFF and allowing a few minutes to pass, the lamp will go out.

<11>USB connecting connector (USB) ..For USB connection <12>LAN connector (LAN)...........................For LAN connection <13>ExtOPT connector (ExtOPT)............Connect the cable for addition axis control. <14>RIO connector (RIO).............................Connect the extension parallel input/output unit. <15>Option slot ................................................Install the interface optional. (Install the cover, when not using.)

(SLOT1 SLOT2)

Use the network equipments (personal computer, USB hub, LAN hub, etc) confirmed by manufacturer. The thing unsuitable for the FA environment (related with conformity, temperature or noise) exists in the equipments connected to USB. When using network equipment, measures against the noise, such as measures against EMI and

the addition of the ferrite core, may be necessary. Please fully confirm the operation by customer. Guarantee and maintenance of the equipment on the market (usual office automation equipment) cannot be performed.

Caution

3 Controller

Outside dimensions/Installation dimensions 3-134

3.3 Outside dimensions/Installation dimensions

3.3.1 Outside dimensions (1) CR750 controller

Fig.3-3 Outside dimensions of controller (CR750)

3-135 Outside dimensions/Installation dimensions

3 Controller

(2) CR751 controller

Fig.3-4 Outside dimensions of controller (CR751)

Cable fixation plate (Attachment) This plate must be installed by customers.

3 Controller

Outside dimensions/Installation dimensions 3-136

3.3.2 Installation dimensions (1) CR750 controller

Fig.3-5 Installation of controller (CR750)

Fixing installation section sure for prevention from the fall, when using the controller placing vertically. The reference figure of the metal plate for fixing is shown in Fig. 3-6.

You should install the metal plate for fixation to the controller with M4 x 8 or the shorter screw. The screw projection length inside the controller (side board thickness is 1.2 mm) surely makes 6.8 mm or less.

When storing the controller in a cabinet, etc., take special care to the heat radiating properties and ventilation properties so that the ambient temperature remains within the specification values. And, don't install the controller in the position where direct rays or the heat of lighting hits. The skin temperature of the controller may rise, and the error may occur.

15 0m

m

50mm 20mm

250mm

145mm 145mm

250mm

Intake vent

250mm or more

or more 20mm or more

1 50

m m

o r

m o re250mm or more

* Do not stack controllers.

CAUTION

CAUTION

3-137 Outside dimensions/Installation dimensions

3 Controller

Fig.3-6 Metal plate for fixation to placing vertically (Reference for CR750)

hole (Controller fixation hole)

hole

hole

3 Controller

Outside dimensions/Installation dimensions 3-138

(2) CR751 controller

Fig.3-7 Installation of controller (CR751)

Fixing installation section sure for prevention from the fall, when using the controller placing vertically. The reference figure of the metal plate for fixing is shown in Fig. 3-8.

You should install the metal plate for fixation to the controller with M4 x 8 or the shorter screw. The screw projection length inside the controller (side board thickness is 1.2mm) surely makes 6.8mm or less.

When storing the controller in a cabinet, etc., take special care to the heat radiating properties and ventilation properties so that the ambient temperature remains within the specification values. And, don't install the controller in the position where direct rays or the heat of lighting hits. The skin temperature of the controller may rise, and the error may occur.

15 0m

m

50mm 20mm250mm

145mm 145mm

250mm

Intake vent

250 m or more

250m or more or more 20mm or more

1 50

m m

o r

m o re

* Stackable at most 2 controllers.

CAUTION

CAUTION

3-139 Outside dimensions/Installation dimensions

3 Controller

Fig.3-8 Metal plate for fixation to placing vertically (Reference for CR751)

hole

hole hole (Controller fixation hole)

3 Controller

External input/output 3-140

3.4 External input/output

3.4.1 Types (1) Dedicated input/output...............................These inputs and outputs carry out the robot remote operation and

status display. (2) General-purpose input/output.................These are inputs and outputs that the customer can program for

peripheral device control. (3) Hand input/output .........................................These are inputs and outputs related to the hand that the customer can

program. (4)Emergency stop/Door switch input.........Information on wiring the emergency stop and wiring used to ensure

safety can be found on Page 144, "3.6 Emergency stop input and output etc." and on Page 216, "6.1.7 Examples of safety measures".

Linking our GOT1000 Series (GT15) display equipment to the robot controller over the Ethernet permits you to control robot controller's input/output from a GOT (graphic operation terminal).

3-141 Dedicated input/output

3 Controller

3.5 Dedicated input/output

Show the main function of dedicated input/output in the Table 3-2. Refer to attached instruction manual "Detailed explanations of functions and operations" in the product for the other functions. Each parameter indi- cated with the parameter name is used by designated the signal No., assigned in the order of input signal No. and output signal No.

Table 3-2 Dedicated input/output list

Parameter name

Input Note1) Output

Name Function Level Name Function

TEACHMD None Teaching mode out- put signal

Outputs that the teaching mode is

entered.

ATTOPMD None Automatic mode out- put signal

Outputs that the automatic mode is

entered.

ATEXTMD None Remote mode output

signal

Outputs that the remote mode is

entered.

RCREADY None Controller power ON

complete signal

Outputs that external input signals can

be received.

AUTOENA Automatic opera- tion enabled input

signal

Allows automatic operation.

L

Automatic operation

enabled output signal

Outputs the automatic operation

enabled state.

START Start input signal Starts all slots. E

Operating output sig- nal

Outputs that the slot is operating.

STOP Stop input signal Stops all slots.

The input signal No. is fixed to 0.

Note) Use the emergency stop

input for stop inputs related

to safety.

L

Wait output signal Outputs that the slot is temporarily

stopped.

STOP2 Stop input signal The program during operation is

stopped.

Unlike the STOP parameter,

change of the signal number is

possible.

Notes) Specification is the same as

the STOP parameter.

L

Wait output signal Outputs that the slot is temporarily

stopped.

Notes) Specification is the same as the

STOP parameter.

SLOTINIT Program reset input

signal

Resets the wait state. E

Program selection

enabled output signal

Outputs that the slot is in the program

selection enabled state.

ERRRESET Error reset input

signal

Resets the error state. E

Error occurring out- put signal

Outputs that an error has occurred.

CYCLE Cycle stop input

signal

Carries out cycle stop. E

In cycle stop opera- tion output signal

Outputs that the cycle stop is operat- ing.

SRVOFF Servo ON enabled

input signal

Turns the servo OFF for all mech- anisms.

L Servo ON enabled

output signal

Outputs servo-on disable status.

(Echo back)

SRVON Servo ON input

signal

Powers on the robot servos.

For multiple mechanisms, it powers

on the servos of all the mecha- nisms.

E

In servo ON output

signal

Outputs the servo ON state.

For multiple mechanisms, the output is

performed when at least one of the

mechanisms is in the servo ON state.

IOENA Operation rights

input signal

Requests the operation rights for

the external signal control. L

Operation rights out- put signal

Outputs the operation rights valid state

for the external signal control.

MELOCK Machine lock input

signal

Sets/resets the machine lock

state for all mechanisms. E

In machine lock out- put signal

Outputs the machine lock state.

SAFEPOS Evasion point

return input signal

Requests the evasion point return

operation. E

In evasion point

return output signal

Outputs that the evasion point return

is taking place.

OUTRESET General-purpose

output signal reset

Resets the general-purpose output

signal. E None

EMGERR None

Emergency stop out- put signal

Outputs that an emergency stop has

occurred.

S1START

:

S32START

Start input Starts each slot. E In operation output Outputs the operating state for each

slot.

3 Controller

Dedicated input/output 3-142

S1STOP

:

S32STOP

Stop input Stops each slot. L In wait output Outputs that each slot is temporarily

stopped.

PRGSEL Program selection

input signal

Designates the setting value for

the program No. with numeric value

input signals.

E None

OVRDSEL Override selection

input signal

Designates the setting value for

the override with the numeric value

input signals.

E None

IODATA Note2)

Numeric value input

(start No., end No.)

Used to designate the program

name, override value., mechanism

value.

L Numeric value output

(start No., end No.)

Used to output the program name,

override value., mechanism No.

PRGOUT Program No. out- put request

Requests output of the program

name. E Program No. output

signal

Outputs that the program name is

being output to the numeric value out- put signal.

LINEOUT Line No. output

request

Requests output of the line No. E Line No. output signal

Outputs that the line No. is being out- put to the numeric value output signal.

OVRDOUT Override value out- put request

Requests the override output.

E

Override value out- put signal

Outputs that the override value is being

output to the numeric value output sig- nal.

ERROUT Error No. output

request

Requests the error No. output. E

Error No. output sig- nal

Outputs that the error No. is being out- put to the numeric value output signal.

JOGENA Jog valid input sig- nal

Validates jog operation with the

external signals E

Jog valid output sig- nal

Outputs that the jog operation with

external signals is valid.

JOGM Jog mode input 2-

bit

Designates the jog mode. L

Jog mode output 2-

bit

Outputs the current jog mode.

JOG+ Jog feed + side for

8-axes Requests the + side jog operation. L None

JOG- Jog feed - side for

8-axes Requests the - side jog operation. L None

HNDCNTL1

:

HNDCNTL3

None

Mechanism 1 hand

output signal status

:

Mechanism 3 hand

output signal status

Mechanism 1: Outputs the status of

general-purpose outputs

900 to 907.

Mechanism 2: Outputs the status of

general-purpose outputs

910 to 917.

Mechanism 3: Outputs the status of

general-purpose outputs

920 to 927.

HNDSTS1

:

HNDSTS3 None

Mechanism 1 hand

input signal status

:

Mechanism 3 hand

input signal status

Mechanism 1: Outputs the status of

hand inputs 900 to 907.

Mechanism 2: Outputs the status of

hand inputs 910 to 917.

Mechanism 3: Outputs the status of

hand inputs 920 to 927.

HNDERR1

:

HNDERR3

Mechanism 1 hand

error input signal

:

Mechanism 3 hand

error input signal

Requests the hand error occur- rence.

L

Mechanism 1 hand

error output signal

:

Mechanism 3 hand

error output signal

Outputs that a hand error is occurring.

Parameter name

Input Note1) Output

Name Function Level Name Function

3-143 Dedicated input/output

3 Controller

AIRERR1

:

AIRERR3

Pneumatic pressure

error 1 input signal

:

Pneumatic pressure

error 3 input signal

Request the pneumatic pressure

error occurrence. L

Pneumatic pressure

error 1 output signal.

:

Pneumatic pressure

error 3 output signal.

Outputs that a pneumatic pressure

error is occurring.

M1PTEXC

:

M3PTEXC

None L

Maintenance parts

replacement time

warning signal

Outputs that the maintenance parts

have reached the replacement time.

USER- AREANote3) None

User-designated area

8-points

Outputs that the robot is in the user-

designated area.

Note1) The level indicates the signal level. L: Level signal The designated function is validated when the signal is ON, and is invalidated when the

signal is OFF. E: Edge signal The designated function is validated when the signal changes from the OFF to ON state,

and the function maintains the original state even when the signal then turns OFF. Note2) Four elements are set in the order of input signal start No., end No., output signal start No. and end No. Note3) Up to eight points can be set successively in order of start output signal No. and end output signal No.

Parameter name

Input Note1) Output

Name Function Level Name Function

3 Controller

Emergency stop input and output etc. 3-144

3.6 Emergency stop input and output etc.

Do wiring of the external emergency stop, the special stop input, the door switch, and the enabling device from the "special input/output" terminal connector.

Table 3-3 Special input/output terminal

*At the time of the power supply OFF, the output point of contact is always open.

[Note] The contact capacity of each input/output terminal is DC24V/10mA - 100mA. Don't connect the equipment except for this range. The use exceeding contact capacity causes failure. In the customer's system, do not ground the + side of 24V power supply prepared by customer for connect to the controller. (related with emergency stop and parallel input/output) If it connects with the controller under the condition that the + side is grounded, it will lead to failure of controller.

[Note] If a stop signal or servo OFF signal is input simultaneously with a door switch open/emergency stop input, the error, H056n Servo sys. error (A/D) may occur. When a door switch open/emergency stop is input, the robot turns off the servo after it stops. It is unnecessary to input a stop signal or servo OFF signal. To input a stop signal or servo OFF signal with a door switch open/emergency stop input, wait for 100ms or more after a door switch open/emergency stop input.

Pin number assignment of each terminal and the circuit diagram are shown in Fig. 3-10 (CR750) or Fig. 3-14 (CR751).

3.6.1 Connection of the external emergency stop The external emergency stop input and door switch input and enabling device input are opened at shipment as shown in Fig. 3-10 (CR750) or Fig. 3-14 (CR751). Connect the external emergency stop switch and door switch with the following procedure.

And, the example of the connection and notes of the emergency stop are described in Page 216, "6.1.7 Examples of safety measures" Refer to it together

[Caution] The emergency stop circuit is duplicated inside the controller. The emergency stop switch uses a double contact-type switch, so please be sure to fix both of the contacts to the connector pins as shown below in order to ensure the wiring is duplicated. An error will continue to occur in the event that only one of the pins is connected.

1) Please prepare the emergency stop switch, door switch and enabling device. a) External emergency switch

CR750 controller ..........CNUSR11 connector "between 3 and 4" and CNUSR12 Connector "between 3 and 4". CR751 controller ..........CNUSR1 connector "between 2 and 27" and "between 7 and 32".

b) Door switch CR750 controller ..........CNUSR11 connector "between 7 and 8" and CNUSR12 connector "between 7 and 8". CR751 controller ..........CNUSR1 connector "between 4 and 29" and "between 9 and 34".

c) Enabling device CR750 controller ..........CNUSR11 connector "between 9 and 10" and CNUSR12 connector "between 9 and 10". CR751 controller ..........CNUSR1 connector "between 5 and 30" and "between 10 and 35".

[Caution] Be sure to use a shield cable for the emergency stop wiring cable. And when operating in an environ- ment that is easily affected by noise, be sure to fix the attached ferrite core (model number:

Item Name Function

Input Emergency stop Applies the emergency stop. Dual emergency line

Input Special stop input Applies the stop. Refer to Page 152, "3.6.2 Special stop input (SKIP)"

Input Door switch Servo-off. Dual line, normal close (Page 154, "3.6.3 Door switch function")

Input Enabling device Servo-off. Dual line, normal close (Page 154, "3.6.4 Enabling device function")

Output Robot error output Contactor is opening during error occurrence.

Output Emergency stop output The point of contact opens under occurrence of emergency stop of external input signal, emergency

stop of OP, emergency stop of T/B.

Output Mode output MANUAL mode: contactor is opening, AUTOMATIC mode: contactor is closing.

Output Magnet contactor control

connector output for addi- tion axes

When an additional axis is used, the servo ON/OFF status of the additional axis can be synchronized

with the robot arm. (Page 163, "3.9 Magnet contactor control connector output (AXMC) for addition

axes")

3-145 Emergency stop input and output etc.

3 Controller

E04SR301334, manufacturer: Seiwa Electric Mfg. Co., Ltd.). Be sure to place the ferrite core more than 30 cm from the connecting terminal section.

Make sure there are no mistakes in the wiring. Connecting differently to the way specified in the manual can result in errors, such as the emergency stop not being released. In order to prevent errors occurring, please be sure to check that all functions (such as the teaching box emergency stop, customer emergency stop, and door switch) are working properly after the wiring setup is completed.

You should always connect doubly connection of the emergency stop, the door switch, and the enabling switch. In connection of only one side, if the relay of customer use should break down, it may not function correctly. The robot output contacts (error output, emergency stop output, mode output, addition axis contactor control output) are duplicated output contacts that are wired in series. As with emergency stop switches and door switches, ensure that all connections to customer devices are duplicated to achieve redundancy.

Please make sure to wire the multiple emergency stop switches so that they each function independently. Check and make sure that the emergency stop doesn't only function under an AND condition (when multiple emergency stop switches are ON at the same time).

(1) CR750 controller

Fig.3-9 Emergency stop cable connection (CR750)

CAUTION

CAUTION

CAUTION

30cm

2

CNUSR11

CNUSR12

CNUSR11 connector

Within 30 cm

Ferrite core

Pass twice

CNUSR12 connector

3 Controller

Emergency stop input and output etc. 3-146

Fig.3-10 External emergency stop connection (CR750)

Place the emergency stop switch in an easily operable position, and be sure to wire it to the emergency stop correctly by referencing Page 216, "6.1.7 Examples of safety measures". This is a necessary measure in order to ensure safe operation so that the robot can be stopped immediately by pressing the emergency stop switch in the event that the robot malfunctions.

CNUSR11

CNUSR2

10

9

8

7

3

4

2

CNUSR11+24V

Relay

+24V

24G

24G

24G

RA +24V

Relay RA

Relay RA

TB

+24V

Relay

+24V

24G

24G

24G

RA +24V

RelayRA

Relay RA

14

13

12

11

17

41

16

CNUSR12

14

13

12

11

1

5

6

10

9

8

7

3

4

2

1

5

6

CNUSR12

OP

24G

10F

24G

10F

Please refer to the example of safety measures of "Standard Specifications Manual".

()

Please do not carry out an insulation pressure test. Moreover, it becomes the cause of failure if it connects incorrectly.

CAUTION

Internal circuit structure (Controller side)(Customer) (Customer)

Mode output

Mode output

Robot error output

Robot error output

Emergency stop output

Emergency stop output

Short

External emergency stop input

Short

Door switch input

Enabling device input

Short

External emergency stop input

Short

Door switch input

Enabling device input

TB emer- gency stop

OP emer- gency stop

*1) This terminal is opened at factory shipping (unconnected). If power supply inside the controller is used, short-circuit the terminal. *2) This terminal can be used only for the external emergency stop input to the controller. The terminal cannot be used for the output

signal of OP emergency stop or TB emergency stop because the controller's internal circuit contains the input detection circuit and a capacitor. (Do not use the terminal for other purposes such as monitoring the test pulse outputs, or a false detection may occur.)

*1)

*1)

*1)

*1)

[Note] In the customer's system, do not ground the + side of 24V power supply prepared by customer for connect to the con- troller. (related with emergency stop and parallel input/output) If it connects with the controller under the condition that the + side is grounded, it will lead to failure of controller.

Input detection

circuit

*2)

*2) Input detection

circuit

CAUTION

3-147 Emergency stop input and output etc.

3 Controller

Fig.3-11 Method of wiring for external emergency stop connection (CR750 (CNUSR11/12))

Makes sure that there is no mistake when connecting to the target connectors. Connecting incorrectly will result in the robot breaking down or malfunctioning. The connector on the controller side that connects to the user wiring connector is CNUSR11 or CNUSR12. Be careful not to connect to CNUSR13 as the robot will not operate properly.

CNUSR11/12 connector

CNUSR11

CNUSR12

Driver

*Recommendation driver size: 2.5mm.

Cable fixing screw

Cable insert point

7mm

A

View A

161

Connector fixing screw

(Two places)

Pin number of connector

Connecting cable

(AWG #26-16 (0.14mm-1.5mm2))

Connection procedure Insert the connection cable into the appropriate pin of the user wiring connector that accompanies the product. Fix it securely with a screw and connect the connector to the CNUSR11/CNUSR12 connector at the back of the controller.

Please use an AWG #26 to 16 (0.14 to 1.5mm2) connector cable.

1) Prepare the user wiring connector that accompanies the product. 2) Loosen the cable fixing screw at the point where the cable is to be inserted. Please use a screwdriver head

with a width of 2.5mm to loosen the screw. 3) Peel the insulation of the connecting cable to 7mm, and insert it into the cable slot of the corresponding con-

nector. 4) Be sure to fix the inserted cable securely by fastening a cable fixing screw.

(tightening torque of 0.22 to 0.25Nm) 5) After the necessary cables save been fixed, connect the connector to the connector (CNUSR11/12) that cor-

responds with the controller. Connect so that the cable fixing screw is comes on top, and make sure to fix securely by fastening connector fixing screws in two places. A screwdriver head with a width of 2.5mm should be used to fix screws (tightening torque of 0.22 to 0.25Nm).

This concludes the connection procedure.

Connector for user wiring

Reference: CNUSR13 (Connect the encoder, when using the tracking function)

* The controller is an example.

CAUTION

3 Controller

Emergency stop input and output etc. 3-148

Fig.3-12 Method of wiring for external emergency stop connection (CR750 (CNUSR2))

When soldering please take care to only connect to the specified pin number. Connecting to a different pin number or short-circuiting with another pin will result in the robot breaking down or malfunctioning.

CNUSR2 connector

CNUSR2

3mm

A

View A Plug

Connector cover

Connecting cable

(AWG #30-24 (0.05mm2-0.2mm2))

Connection procedure Solder the pins of the user wiring connector that accompanies the product, and connect the connector to the CNUSR2 connector at the back of the controller. For the connection cables, please use AWG #30 to 24 (0.05 to

0.2mm2).

1) Loosen the two fixing screws on the user wiring connector that accompanies the product, and remove the con- nector cover.

2) Peel the insulation of the connecting cable to 3mm, and solder it the appropriate connector pin number. 3) After the necessary cables have been soldered, re-fix the connector cover using the same fixing screws and

make sure it is fastened securely. 4) Connect the connector to the corresponding connector (CNUSR2) on the controller. With pin number 1 facing

to the upper right, insert firmly until you hear the connectors latch click in to place.

This concludes the connection procedure.

Cover fixing screw (Two places)

Remove the connector cover

Pin number of plug25 1

50 26

SolderingConnector for user wiring

* The controller is an example.

CAUTION

3-149 Emergency stop input and output etc.

3 Controller

(2) CR751 controller

Fig.3-13 Emergency stop cable connection (CR751)

CNUSR1

30cm

2

CNU connector

Within 30 cm

Ferrite core

Pass twice

3 Controller

Emergency stop input and output etc. 3-150

Fig.3-14 External emergency stop connection (CR751)

Place the emergency stop switch in an easily operable position, and be sure to wire it to the emergency stop correctly by referencing Page 216, "6.1.7 Examples of safety measures". This is a necessary measure in order to ensure safe operation so that the robot can be stopped immediately by pressing the emergency stop switch in the event that the robot malfunctions.

CNUSR1

CNUSR2

CNUSR1+24V

Relay

+24V

24G

24G

24G

RA +24V

Relay RA

Relay RA

TB

+24V

Relay

+24V

24G

24G

24G

RA +24V

Relay RA

Relay RA

43

18

17

41

16

44

19

42

17

20

45 27

28

4

29

5

30

3

2

1

26

32

33

9

34

35

8

7

6

31

10

24G

10F

24G

10F

Please refer to the example of safety measures of "Standard Specifications Manual".

Please do not carry out an insulation pressure test. Moreover, it becomes the cause of failure if it connects incorrectly.

CAUTION

Internal circuit structure (Controller side) (Customer)

Mode output

Mode output

Robot error output

Robot error output

Emergency stop output

Emergency stop output

Short

External emergency stop input

Short

Door switch input

Enabling device input

Short

External emergency stop input

Short

Door switch input

Enabling device input

TB emergency stop

(Customer)

*1)

*1)

*1)

*1)

*2)

*2)

Input detection

circuit

Input detection

circuit

*1) This terminal is opened at factory shipping (unconnected). If power supply inside the controller is used, short-circuit the terminal. *2) This terminal can be used only for the external emergency stop input to the controller. The terminal cannot be used for the output

signal of OP emergency stop or TB emergency stop because the controller's internal circuit contains the input detection circuit and a capacitor. (Do not use the terminal for other purposes such as monitoring the test pulse outputs, or a false detection may occur.)

[Note] In the customer's system, do not ground the + side of 24V power supply prepared by customer for connect to the con- troller. (related with emergency stop and parallel input/output) If it connects with the controller under the condition that the + side is grounded, it will lead to failure of controller.

CAUTION

3-151 Emergency stop input and output etc.

3 Controller

Fig.3-15 Method of wiring for external emergency stop connection (CR751 (CNUSR1/2))

When soldering please take care to only connect to the specified pin number. Connecting to a different pin number or short-circuiting with another pin will result in the robot breaking down or malfunctioning. The connectors on the controller side are CNUSR1 (upper side) and CNUSR2 (lower side). Makes sure that there is no mistake when connecting to the target connectors. Connecting incorrectly will result in the robot breaking down or malfunctioning.

CNUSR1

CNUSR2

3mm

A

View APlug Connector cover

Connecting cable

(AWG #30#24(0.05mm0.2mm2))

Cover fixing screw (Two places)

Remove the connector cover

Pin number of plug25 1

50 26

SolderingConnector for user wiring

CNUSR1/2 connector

Connection procedure Solder the user wiring connector that accompanies the product to the corresponding pin, and connect it to the CNUSR1 or CNUSR2 connector at the back of the controller. For the connection cable, please use AWG #30 to 24

(0.05 to 0.2mm2).

1) Loosen the 2 fixing screws on the user wiring connector that accompanies the product, and remove the con- nector cover.

2) Peel the insulation of the connecting cable to 3mm, and solder it the appropriate connector pin number. 3) After the necessary cable has been soldered, re-fix the connector cover sing the same fixing screws and make

sure it is fastened securely. 4) Connect the connector to the corresponding connector (CNUSR1 or CNUSR2) on the controller. With pin num-

ber 1 facing to the upper right, insert firmly until you hear the connectors latch click in to place.

This concludes the connection procedure.

CAUTION

3 Controller

Emergency stop input and output etc. 3-152

3.6.2 Special stop input (SKIP) The skip is the input signal to stop the robot. The pin 9, 34 of the CNUSR2 connector shown in Fig. 3-16

(CR750) or Fig. 3-17 (CR751).

Table 3-4 Special stop input electric specification

(1) CR750 controller

Fig.3-16 Connection of the special-stop-input (CR750)

Item Specifications Internal circuit

Type DC input

No. of input point 1

Insulation method Photo-coupler insulation

Rated input voltage DC24V

Rated input current Approx. 11mA

Working voltage range DC 21.6 26.4V

Ripple rate within 5%

ON voltage/ON current DC 8V or more / 2mA or more

OFF voltage/OFF current DC 4V or less / 1mA or less

Input resistance Approx. 2.2

Response

time

OFF ON 1ms or less

ON OFF 1ms or less

Common method 1 point per common

External wire connection method Connector

330

2.2k

V(COM)

1A

1B

Input

9

34

CNUSR2

2

30cm

* Connects with CNUSR2 connector with soldering. Refer to Page 148 "Fig. 3-12: Method of wiring for external emergency stop connection (CR750 (CNUSR2))".

Within 30cm

CNUSR2 connector

Ferrite core

Pass twice

Note) In the customer's system, do not ground the + side of 24V power supply prepared by customer for con- nect to the controller. (related with emergency stop and parallel input/output) If it connects with the con- troller under the condition that the + side is grounded, it will lead to failure of controller.

3-153 Emergency stop input and output etc.

3 Controller

(2) CR751 controller

Fig.3-17 Connection of the special-stop-input (CR751)

30cm

2

CNUSR2

* Connects with CNUSR2 connector with soldering. Refer to Page 151 "Fig. 3-15: Method of wiring for external emergency stop connection (CR751 (CNUSR1/2))".

Within 30cm CNUSR2 connector

Ferrite core

Pass twice

Note) In the customer's system, do not ground the + side of 24V power supply prepared by customer for con- nect to the controller. (related with emergency stop and parallel input/output) If it connects with the con- troller under the condition that the + side is grounded, it will lead to failure of controller.

3 Controller

Emergency stop input and output etc. 3-154

3.6.3 Door switch function This function retrieves the status of the switch installed on the door of the safety fence, etc., and stops the robot when the door is opened. This differs from an emergency stop in that the servo turns OFF when the door is opened and an error does not occur. Follow the wiring example shown in Page 146 "Fig. 3-10: External emergency stop connection (CR750)" or Page 150 "Fig. 3-14: External emergency stop connection (CR751)", and Page 216, "6.1.7 Examples of safety measures". Those figure explains the wire is contact closes when the door is closed. Details of this function according to the robot status are shown below.

*During automatic operation ..............When the door is opened, the servo turns OFF and the robot stops. An error occurs. The process of the restoration: Close the door, reset the alarm, turn on the servo, and restart

*During teaching........................................ Even when the door is opened, the servo can be turned ON and the robot moved using the teaching pendant.

Fig.3-18 Door switch function

3.6.4 Enabling device function When the abnormalities occur in teaching operations etc., the robot's servo power can be immediately cut only by

switch operation of the enabling device*1) (servo-off), and the safety increases. To use the robot safely, please be sure to connect the enabling device.

(1) When door is opening Please do teaching by two-person operations. One person has T/B, the other has enabling device. Turn on the servo power, in the condition that both of switches are pushed. (Enable switch of T/B and enabling device) Then the jog operation will be available. You can off the servo power only by releasing the switch of the enabling device. And, care that the servo-on and releasing the brake cannot be done in the condition that the switch of the enabling device is released.

(2) When door is closing You can turn on the servo power by operation of only T/B. In this case perform jog operation outside the safeguard sure.

*1) Recommendation products: HE1G-L20MB (IDEC)

Safeguard

Turns OFF the servo

STOP!!

Open

TEACH

AUTO (Ext.)

AUTO (Op.)

Open

TEACH

AUTO (Ext.)

AUTO (Op.)

The servo can be turned ON/Off by turning the enable switch ON/OFF.

Safeguard

Teaching pendant

Robot arm (Example)

Robot arm (Example)

MODE MANUAL AUTOMATIC

Auto executing

Teaching

MODE MANUAL AUTOMATIC

3-155 Emergency stop input and output etc.

3 Controller

(3) Automatic Operation/Jog Operation/Brake Release and Necessary Switch Settings The following is a description of various operations performed on the robot and switch settings that are required.

Table 3-5 Various operations and necessary switch settings

Fig.3-19 Brake release operation

No Operation

Related switch settings Note1)

Note1) "-" in the table indicates that the state of switch concerned does not matter. Refer to the following for operation of each switch.

Mode of CR750 controller: ...............................................................................Page 129, "3.2 Names of each part" Mode of CR751 controller: .........................................................Page 156, "3.7 Mode changeover switch input"

T/B enable/disable:..................................................................................... Page 167, "(1) Teaching pendant (T/B)" T/B enable switch:....................................................................................... Page 167, "(1) Teaching pendant (T/B)" Enabling device input terminal: .................................................Page 216, "6.1.7 Examples of safety measures" Door switch input terminal: ........................................................Page 216, "6.1.7 Examples of safety measures"

DescriptionMode of controller

T/B enable/

disable

T/B enable switch

Enabling device input

terminal

Door switch input terminal

1 Jog operation Manual Enable ON Close(ON)

If the enabling device input is set to

Close (On), the state of door switch input does not matter.

2 Jog operation Note2)

Note2) Jog operation, if door switch input is set for Close (Door Close), must be performed outside the safety bar- rier.

Manual Enable ON Open(OFF) Close

(Door Close)

If the enabling device input is set to

Open (Off), door switch input must be

in a state of Close

3 Brake release Note3)

Note3) It is imperative that brake release operation be carried out by two persons. One person turns on the enabling device ("Close" on the enabling device input terminal) while the other manipulates the T/B. Brake release can be effected only when both of the enabling switch device and the T/B enable switch are placed in intermediate position (lightly gripped position). At this point, the state of door switch input does not mat- ter.

Manual Enable ON Close(ON) Irrespective of the state of door switch input, enabling device input

must be in a state of Close (On).

4 Automatic operation

Automatic Disable Close

(Door Close) Door switch input must always be in a state of Close (Door Close).

Door in Open state

Upon the release of brake, the robot arm may fall under its own weight depending on the axis which has been released. For added safety, provide support or take other precaution to prevent the falling of the arm.

CAUTION

T/B being manipulated

Enabling device being manipulated

3 Controller

Mode changeover switch input 3-156

3.7 Mode changeover switch input

Connect the key switch of customer prepared and change the right of robots operation by switch operation.

The key switch can be installed in the operation panel of customer preparation.

AUTOMATIC ......................The operation from external equipment becomes available. Operation which needs the right of operation from T/B cannot be performed. It is necessary to set the parameter for the rights of operation to connection with external equipment. Refer to the separate volume, "Instruction Manual/Detailed Explanation of Functions and Operations" for detail.

MANUAL ..............................When T/B is available, only the operation from T/B becomes available. Operation which needs the right of operation from external equipment cannot be performed.

Fig.3-20 Mode changeover switch image figure (CR751)

(1) Specification of the key switch interface The function and specification of the key switch interface are shown below.

MODE MANUAL AUTOMATIC

Mode changeover switch (Customer-prepared)

CNUSR1

Table 3-6 Function of the key switch interface

Pin number and Function (Connector: CNUSR1) Change mode Note1)

Note1) The mode changes by both opening or both closing between 49-24 pin and between 50-25 pin. When input

states differ between two lines, error H0044 (OP Mode key line is faulty) will occur.

Pin number Function MANUAL AUTOMATIC

49 1st line KEY input

Open Close24 Internal power supply of 1st line KEY input

+24V output

50 2nd line KEY input

Open Close25 Internal power supply of 2nd line KEY input

+24V output

[Note] For the input/output cable (CNUSR connector cable) that connects customer's system and the controller, prevent ground faults from occurring at the + side of the 24V power supply prepared by customer. A ground fault may lead to a failure of the protection device in the controller.

3-157 Mode changeover switch input

3 Controller

Fig.3-21 Mode selector switch connection diagram

Table 3-7 Specification of the mode changeover switch input

Item Specification Remarks

Rated voltage DC24V Supply from the controller.

Current rating Approx. 10mA Select the switch or button which operates normally in 24V/10mA.

Input resistance Approx. 2.2k

Response time (OFF->ON) Approx. 15ms Example: The response time the program starts, after pushing the run button.

Common method 1 point per common

Connection method Connector

Conformity electric wire size AWG#24 to #30 0.2 to 0.05 mm2

Maker/Type - Manufacturer: 3M / 10150-3000PE, 10350-52Y0-008 (cover)

+24V

24

49

25

50

+24V

Input detection circuit

Input detection circuit

Limiting resistor

Limiting resistor

Mode selector switch

Mode selector switch

Limiting resistor

Limiting resistor

3 Controller

Mode changeover switch input 3-158

(2) Connection of the mode changeover switch input

Fig.3-22 Connection of the mode changeover switch input (CR751)

CNUSR1

3mm

Connection procedure Solder the user wiring connector that accompanies the product to the corresponding pin, and connect it to the CNUSR1 connector at the back of the controller. For the connection cable, please use AWG #30 to 24 (0.05 to

0.2mm2).

1) Loosen the 2 fixing screws on the user wiring connector that accompanies the product, and remove the con- nector cover.

2) Peel the insulation of the connecting cable to 3mm, and solder it the appropriate connector pin number. 3) After the necessary cable has been soldered, re-fix the connector cover sing the same fixing screws and

make sure it is fastened securely. 4) Connect the connector to the corresponding connector (CNUSR1) on the controller. With pin number 1 facing

to the upper right, insert firmly until you hear the connectors latch click in to place.

This concludes the connection procedure.

Cover fixing screw (Two places)

25 1

50 26

Connector cover

A

Plug

Remove the connector cover Connector for user wiring

View A Pin number of plug

Soldering

Connecting cable

(AWG #30 #24(0.05mm2 to 0.2mm2))

3-159 Additional Axis Function

3 Controller

3.8 Additional Axis Function

This controller is equipped with an additional axis interface for controlling an additional axis when a traveling axis or rotary table is added to the robot. A maximum of eight axes of servo motors can be controlled at the same time by connecting a general-purpose servo amplifier (MR-J3-B, MR-J4-B series) that supports Mitsubishi's SSCNET III. Refer to the separate "Additional axis function Instruction Manual" for details on the additional axis function.

3.8.1 Wiring of the Additional Axis Interface Table 3-8 shows the connectors for additional axes inside the controller. Fig. 3-23 (CR750) and Fig. 3-24 (CR751) shows a connection example (configuration example).

Table 3-8 Dedicated connectors inside the controller

(1) CR750 controller

Fig.3-23 Example of addition axis connection (CR750)

Name Connector name Details

Connector for additional axes ExtOPT The connector for connecting the general-purpose servo amplifier.

ExtOPT

CN1ACN1B

CN1A CN1A

CN1B

SSCNET

SSCNET

CN1B

ExtOPT

CNUSR11

CNUSR12

Servo amplifier

SSCNET III cable

Cap

* It cannot communicate, if connection of CN1A and CN1B is mistaken.

To CN1A connector

CN R 1 connector

CNU 12 connector

Servo amplifier

SSCNET III cable

To CN1B connector

To CN1A connector

To ExtOP connector To CN1B connector

Emergency stop output (Refer to "3.6Emergency stop input and output etc.") * Connect with a forced stop input of a servo ampli-

fier.

Magnet contactor control connector output (AXMC) for addition axes (Refer to "3.9Magnet contactor control connector output (AXMC) for addition axes")

3 Controller

Additional Axis Function 3-160

(2) CR751 controller

Fig.3-24 Example of addition axis connection (CR751)

ExtOPT

CN1ACN1B

CN1A CN1A

CN1B

SSCNET

SSCNET

CN1B

ExtOPT

CNUSR1

CNUSR2

Servo amplifier Servo amplifier

SSCNET III cable

S CNET III cable

To ExtOPT connector

To CN1A con- nector

To CN1A connector

To CN1B connector

To CN1B connector

Cap

* It cannot communicate, if connection of CN1A and CN1B is mistaken.

CNUSR1 connector

C 2 connector

Emergency stop output (Refer to "3.6Emergency stop input and output etc.") * Connect with a forced stop input of a servo amplifier.

Magnet contactor control connector output (AXMC) for addition axes (Refer to "3.9Magnet contactor control connector output (AXMC) for addition axes")

3-161 Additional Axis Function

3 Controller

(3) Example of the installation of the noise filter 1) EMC filter (recommended)

Please install the recommendation filter shown below according to the example of connection.

Fig.3-25 Example of EMC noise filter installation

1)

2)

Note1) For 1-phase 200V to 230VAC power supply, connect the power supply to L1, L2 and leave L3 open. There is no L3 for 1-phase 100 to 120 VAC power supply.

Note2) The example is when a surge protector is connected.

3 Controller

Additional Axis Function 3-162

2) Line noise filter

This filter is effective in suppressing noises radiated from the power supply side and output side of the

servo amplifier and also in suppressing high-frequency leakage current (zero-phase current) especially

within 0.5MHz to 5MHz band.

Fig.3-26 Example of noise filter installation

3-163 Magnet contactor control connector output (AXMC) for addition axes

3 Controller

3.9 Magnet contactor control connector output (AXMC) for addition axes

When an additional axis is used, the servo ON/OFF status of the additional axis can be synchronized with the servo ON/OFF status of the robot itself by using the output contact (AXMC) provided on the rear or inside of the controller and configuring a circuit so that the power to the servo amplifier for the additional axis can be turned off when this output is open. An example circuit is shown in "(1)Example circuit". An image of how to connect the controller connector is shown in "(2)Image of how to connect the controller connector". When you are using an additional axis, please perform appropriate circuit connections by referring to these draw- ings.

Refer to the separate "Additional axis function Instruction Manual" for details on the additional axis function.

Note1) you use the addition axis function as a user mechanism who became independent of the robot arm, please do not connect this output signal. Servo-on of the user mechanism may be unable.

(1) Example circuit CR750 controller

Fig.3-27 Example of circuit for addition axes of Magnet contactor control output (CR750 controller)

[Note] For the input/output cable (CNUSR connector cable) that connects customer's system and the controller, prevent ground faults from occurring at the + side of the 24V power supply prepared by customer. A ground fault may lead to a failure of the protection device in the controller. Bending or frictional forces may be applied to the input/output cable repeatedly depending on the system configuration or layout. In this case, use a flexible cable for the input/output cable. Note that a fixed cable may be broken, resulting in a ground fault.

3 Controller

Magnet contactor control connector output (AXMC) for addition axes 3-164

CR751 controller

Fig.3-28 Example of circuit for addition axes of Magnet contactor control output (CR751 controller)

[Note] For the input/output cable (CNUSR connector cable) that connects customer's system and the controller, prevent ground faults from occurring at the + side of the 24V power supply prepared by customer. A ground fault may lead to a failure of the protection device in the controller. Bending or frictional forces may be applied to the input/output cable repeatedly depending on the system configuration or layout. In this case, use a flexible cable for the input/output cable. Note that a fixed cable may be broken, resulting in a ground fault.

3-165 Magnet contactor control connector output (AXMC) for addition axes

3 Controller

(2) Image of how to connect the controller connector CR750 controller

Fig.3-29 AXMC terminal connector (CR750)

CR751 controller

Fig.3-30 AXMC terminal connector (CR751)

30cm

2

CNUSR2

*Connects with CNUSR2 connector with soldering. Refer to Page 148 "Fig. 3-12: Method of wiring for external emergency stop connection (CR750

(CNUSR2))".

Within 30cm

Ferrite core Pass twice

CNUSR2 connector

30cm

2

CNUSR2

* The CNUSR2 connector is connected by soldering. Refer to Page 151 "Fig. 3-15: Method of wiring for external emergency stop connection (CR751 (CNUSR1/2))".

Within 30cm

Ferrite core Pass twice

CNUSR2 connector

3 Controller

3-166

3.10 Options

What are options? There are a variety of options for the robot designed to make the setting up process easier for user needs.

User installation is required for the options. Options come in two types: "set options" and "single options".

1 Set options......................................A combination of single options and parts that together, form a set for serving some purpose.

2 Single options.................................That are configured from the fewest number of required units of a part. Please choose user's purpose additionally.

3-167 Teaching pendant (T/B)

3 Controller

(1) Teaching pendant (T/B)

Order type: CR750 controller ......................... R32TB: Cable length 7m R32TB-15: Cable length 15m

CR751 controller ......................... R33TB: Cable length 7m R33TB-15: Cable length 15m

Outline This is used to create, edit and control the program, teach the operation position and for jog feed, etc.

For safety proposes, a 3-position enable switch is mounted.*1)

Configuration Table 3-9 Configuration device

Specifications Table 3-10 Specifications

*1) <3-position enable switch>

In ISO/10218 (1992) and JIS-B8433 (1993), this is defined as an "enable device". These standards specify that the robot operation using the teaching pendant is enabled only when the "enable device" is at a specified position.

With the Mitsubishi Electric industrial robot, the above "enable device" is configured of an "Enable/Disable switch" and "Enable switch".

The 3-position enable switch has three statuses. The following modes are entered according to the switch state.

a) "Not pressed".......................... The robot does not operate. *)

b) "Pressed lightly" .................... The robot can be operated and teaching is possible.

c) "Pressed with force"............ The robot does not operate. *)

*) Releasing or forcefully pressing the 3-position enable switch cuts power to the servos in the same way as when the emergency stop is input. This helps to ensure safety. Operations such as editing programs and displaying the robot's status are possible while the 3-position enable switch is released or forcefully pressed (excludes operating the robot).

Part name Type Qty. Mass (kg) Note1)

Note1) Mass indicates one set.

Remarks

CR750 controller

Teaching pendant R32TB Either one pc.

1.7 Cable length is 7m. Hand strap is attached.

R32TB-15 2.8 Cable length is 15m. Hand strap is attached.

CR751 controller

Teaching pendant R33TB Either one pc.

1.7 Cable length is 7m. Hand strap is attached.

R33TB-15 2.8 Cable length is 15m. Hand strap is attached.

Items Specifications Remarks

Outline dimensions 195(W) x 292(H) x 106(D) (refer to outline drawing)

Body color Dark gray

Mass Approx. 0.9kg (only arm, excluding cable)

Connection method Connection with controller and connector.

Interface RS-422

Display method LCD method: 24 characters x 8 lines, LCD illumination: with backlight At 8x8 font

Operation section 36 keys

3 Controller

Teaching pendant (T/B) 3-168

Fig.3-31 Outside dimensions of teaching pendant

Installation method The teaching pendant is connected to the T/B connector on the front of the controller.

Enable/Disable switch

Emergency stop

Enable switch

Operetion key

Body

Cable (with connector)

63 .5

LCD

2 9 1 .9

195.2

133

105.5

3-169 Teaching pendant (T/B)

3 Controller

Key layout and main functions

Fig.3-32 Teaching pendant key layout and main functions

[Emergency stop] switch ................ The robot servo turns OFF and the operation stops immediately. [Enable/Disable] switch .................. This switch changes the T/B key operation between enable and dis-

able. [Enable] switch.................................... When the [Enable/Disable] switch " " is enabled, and this key is

released or pressed with force, the servo will turn OFF, and the oper- ating robot will stop immediately.

LCD display panel .............................. The robot status and various menus are displayed. Status display lamp ........................... Display the state of the robot or T/B. [F1], [F2], [F3], [F4].......................... Execute the function corresponding to each function currently dis-

played on LCD. [FUNCTION] key ................................ Change the function display of LCD. [STOP] key........................................... This stops the program and decelerates the robot to a stop. [OVRD ][OVRD ] key ........... Change moving speed. Speed goes up by [OVRD ] key. Speed goes

down by [OVRD ] key [JOG] operation key......................... Move the robot according to jog mode. And, input the numerical value. [SERVO] key........................................ Press this key with holding AA key lightly, then servo power will turn

on. [MONITOR] key .................................. It becomes monitor mode and display the monitor menu. [JOG] key.............................................. It becomes jog mode and display the jog operation. [HAND] key........................................... It becomes hand mode and display the hand operation. [CHARCTER] key............................... This changes the edit screen, and changes between numbers and

alphabetic characters. [RESET] key......................................... This resets the error. The program reset will execute, if this key and

the EXE key are pressed. [ ][ ][ ][ ] key................ Moves the cursor each direction . [CLEAR] key ........................................ Erase the one character on the cursor position. [EXE] key............................................... Input operation is fixed. And, while pressing this key, the robot moves

when direct mode. Number/Character key.................... Erase the one character on the cursor position. And, inputs the num-

ber or character

3 Controller

Parallel I/O interface 3-170

(2) Parallel I/O interface

Order type 2D-TZ368 (Sink type)/2D-TZ378 (Source type)

Outline

This is used to expand the external inputs and outputs

The connecting cable with external equipment is not attached. Since we are preparing the external input-and-output cable (2D-CBL05 or 2D-CBL15) as the option, please use.

Notes)Although the combined use with the parallel input-and-output unit (2A-RZ361/2A- RZ371) of another option is also possible, please use the setup of the station number by the different number separately. The station number is automatically determined by the position of the option slot which installed this interface. (station number 0 to 1)

Configuration Table 3-11 Configuration device

Specifications Table 3-12 Electrical specifications of input circuits

Part name Type Qty. Mass (kg) Note1)

Note1) Mass indicates one set.

Remarks

Parallel I/O interface 2D-TZ368 Either

one pc.

0.4 Input/output 32 points/32 points 2D-TZ368 is sink type. 2D-TZ378 is source type.

2D-TZ378

Item Specification Internal circuit

Type DC input

Number of input points 32

Insulation method Photo coupler insulation

Rated input voltage DC12V DC24V

Rated input current Approx. 3mA Approx.9mA

Working voltage range DC10.2 26.4V

(Ripple factor should be less than 5)

ON voltage/ON current DC8V or more/2mA or more

OFF voltage/ OFF current DC4V or less/1mA or less

Input resistance Approx. 2.7k

Response time OFF-ON 10ms or less(DC24V)

ON-OFF 10ms or less(DC24V)

Common method 32 points per common

External cable connection

method

Connector

Input

+24V/+12V (COM)

2.7K

820

2.7K

820

24G/12G

Input

3-171 Parallel I/O interface

3 Controller

Table 3-13 Electrical specifications for the output circuits

The protection fuse of the output circuit prevents the failure at the time of the load short circuit and incorrect connection. The load connected of the customer should be careful not to exceed maximum rating current. The internal transistor may be damaged if maximum rating current is exceeded.

Installation method The expansion parallel input/output interface is installed in the controller. Refer to separate "Instruction Manual/ Controller setup, basic operation, and maintenance" for details on the installing method.

If it installs in the option SLOT of the controller, the station number will be assigned automatically.

SLOT1: station number 0 (0 to 31)

SLOT2: station number 1 (32 to 63)

If it uses together with parallel input-and-output unit 2A-RZ361/2A-RZ371, please do not overlap with the station number of the parallel input-and-output interface.

Fig.3-33 Parallel I/O interface installation position (CR750)

Item Specification Internal circuit

Type Transistor output

No. of output points 32

Insulation method Photo-coupler insulation

Rated load voltage DC12V/DC24V

Rated load voltage range DC10.2 30V (peak voltage DC30V)

Max. load current 0.1A/point (100%)

Leakage current at OFF Within 0.1mA

Max. voltage drop at ON DC0.9V(TYP.) Note1)

Note1) The maximum voltage drop value at signal ON. Refer to it for the equipment connected to the output circuit.

Respons

e time

OFF-ON 10ms or less(Resistance load) (hardware response time)

ON-OFF 10ms or less(Resistance load) (hardware response time)

Fuse rating Fuse 1.6A(one per common)

Replacement possible max. 3

Common method 16 points per common (common terminal: 2points)

External wire connection

method

Connector

External

power

supply

Voltage DC12/24V(DC10.2 30V)

Current 60mA(TYP.DC24V per common)(base drive current)

+24V/+12V

Output

24G/12G Fuse

+24V/+12V

24G/12G

Fuse

Output

Caution

Caution

SLOT2

SLOT1

3 Controller

Parallel I/O interface 3-172

Fig.3-34 Parallel I/O interface installation position (CR751)

Pin layout of connector

Fig.3-35 Pin layout of connector

Connector pin No. and signal assignment The station number is fixed by the slot to install and the allocation range of the general-purpose input-and- output signal is fixed.

Table 3-14 The slot number and the station number

The connector pin number of the parallel input-and-output interface installed in SLOT1 and signal number allocation are shown in Table 3-15 and Table 3-16. If it installs in other slots, please interpret and utilize.

Slot number Station number

Range of the general-purpose input-and-output signal

Connector <1> Connector <2>

SLOT1 0 Input 0 to 15 Output 0 to 15

Input 16 to 31 Output 16 to 31

SLOT2 1 Input 32 to 47 Output 32 to 47

Input 48 to 63 Output 48 to 63

SLOT1

SLOT2

1B

1A 20A

20B

1D

1C 20C

20D

Connector<2> Output 16 to 31 Input 16 to 31 (when station number 0)

Connector<1> Output 0 to 15 Input 0 to 15 (when station number 0)

3-173 Parallel I/O interface

3 Controller

Table 3-15 Connector<1> pin assignment list and external I/O cable (2D-CBL**) color(SLOT1)

Table 3-16 Connector<2> pin assignment list and external I/O cable (2D-CBL**) color(SLOT1)

Pin No.

Line color

Function name Pin No.

Line color

Function name

General-purpose Dedicated/power supply,

common General-purpose

Dedicated/power supply, common

1C Orange/Red a 24G/12G: For pins 5D-

20D

1D Orange/Black a +24V/+12V(COM): For

pins 5D-20D

2C Gray/Red a COM For pins

5C-20CNote1)

Note1) Sink type: +24V/+12V(COM), Source type: 24G/12G

2D Gray/Black a Reserved

3C White/Red a Reserved 3D White/Black a Reserved

4C Yellow/Red a Reserved 4D Yellow/Black a Reserved

5C Pink/Red a General-purpose input 15 5D Pink/Black a General-purpose output 15

6C Orange/Red b General-purpose input 14 6D Orange/Black b General-purpose output 14

7C Gray/Red b General-purpose input 13 7D Gray/Black b General-purpose output 13

8C White/Red b General-purpose input 12 8D White/Black b General-purpose output 12

9C Yellow/Red b General-purpose input 11 9D Yellow/Black b General-purpose output 11

10C Pink/Red b General-purpose input 10 10D Pink/Black b General-purpose output 10

11C Orange/Red c General-purpose input 9 11D Orange/Black c General-purpose output 9

12C Gray/Red c General-purpose input 8 12D Gray/Black c General-purpose output 8

13C White/Red c General-purpose input 7 13D White/Black c General-purpose output 7

14C Yellow/Red c General-purpose input 6 14D Yellow/Black c General-purpose output 6

15C Pink/Red c General-purpose input 5 Operation rights input

signal Note2)

Note2) The dedicated signal is assigned at shipping. It can change with the parameter.

15D Pink/Black c General-purpose output 5

16C Orange/Red d General-purpose input 4 Servo ON input signal Note2)

16D Orange/Black d General-purpose output 4

17C Gray/Red d General-purpose input 3 Start input Note2) 17D Gray/Black d General-purpose output 3 Operation rights output

signal Note2)

18C White/Red d General-purpose input 2 Error reset input signal Note2)

18D White/Black d General-purpose output 2 Error occurring output

signal Note2)

19C Yellow/Red d General-purpose input 1 Servo OFF input signal Note2)

19D Yellow/Black d General-purpose output 1 In servo ON output

signal Note2)

20C Pink/Red d General-purpose input 0 Stop input Note3)

Note3) The dedicated input signal (STOP) is assigned at shipping. The signal number is fixing.

20D Pink/Black d General-purpose output 0 Operating output Note2)

Pin No.

Line color

Function name Pin No.

Line color

Function name

General-purpose Dedicated/power supply,

common General-purpose

Dedicated/power supply, common

1A Orange/Red a 24G/12G: For pins 5B-

20B

1B Orange/Black a +24V/+12V(COM): For

pins 5B-20B

2A Gray/Red a COM For pins 5A-

20ANote1)

Note1) Sink type: +24V/+12V(COM), Source type: 24G/12G

2B Gray/Black a Reserved

3A White/Red a Reserved 3B White/Black a Reserved

4A Yellow/Red a Reserved 4B Yellow/Black a Reserved

5A Pink/Red a General-purpose input 31 5B Pink/Black a General-purpose output 31

6A Orange/Red b General-purpose input 30 6B Orange/Black b General-purpose output 30

7A Gray/Red b General-purpose input 29 7B Gray/Black b General-purpose output 29

8A White/Red b General-purpose input 28 8B White/Black b General-purpose output 28

9A Yellow/Red b General-purpose input 27 9B Yellow/Black b General-purpose output 27

10A Pink/Red b General-purpose input 26 10B Pink/Black b General-purpose output 26

11A Orange/Red c General-purpose input 25 11B Orange/Black c General-purpose output 25

12A Gray/Red c General-purpose input 24 12B Gray/Black c General-purpose output 24

13A White/Red c General-purpose input 23 13B White/Black c General-purpose output 23

14A Yellow/Red c General-purpose input 22 14B Yellow/Black c General-purpose output 22

15A Pink/Red c General-purpose input 21 15B Pink/Black c General-purpose output 21

16A Orange/Red d General-purpose input 20 16B Orange/Black d General-purpose output 20

17A Gray/Red d General-purpose input 29 17B Gray/Black d General-purpose output 19

18A White/Red d General-purpose input 18 18B White/Black d General-purpose output 18

19A Yellow/Red d General-purpose input 17 19B Yellow/Black d General-purpose output 17

20A Pink/Red d General-purpose input 16 20B Pink/Black d General-purpose output 16

3 Controller

Parallel I/O interface 3-174

The example of connection with our PLC

Fig.3-36 Connection with a Mitsubishi PLC (Example of sink type)

Fig.3-37 Connection with a Mitsubishi PLC (Example of source type)

Parallel I/O interface (Output)

(Input)

60mA (+24V/+12V)

Output

Output

Fuse (24G/12G)

+24V

External power supply

X

COM

QX41(Mitsubishi programmable controller)

(COM)

Input2.7K

Input

External power supply

+24V

Y

+24V

QY41P (Mitsubishi programmable controller)

COM 24G

* The input/output circuit external power supply (24 VDC) must be prepared by the customer.

Note) In the customer's system, do not ground the + side of 24V power supply prepared by customer for connect to the controller. (related with emergency stop and parallel input/output) If it connects with the controller under the condition that the + side is grounded, it will lead to failure of controller.

Parallel I/O interface

(Output)

(Input)

60mA (+24V/+12V)

Output

Output

Fuse

(24G/12G)

+24V

External power supply

X

QX81 (Mitsubishi programmable controller)

(COM)

Input2.7K

Input

External power supply

+24V

Y

+24V

QY81P (Mitsubishi programmable controller)

24G

* The input/output circuit external power supply (24 VDC) must be prepared by the customer.

Note) In the customer's system, do not ground the + side of 24V power supply prepared by customer for connect to the controller. (related with emergency stop and parallel input/output) If it connects with the controller under the condition that the + side is grounded, it will lead to failure of controller.

COM

3-175 External I/O cable

3 Controller

(3) External I/O cable

Order type 2D-CBL Note The numbers in the boxes refer to the length. 05: 5m, 15: 15m

Outline This is the dedicated cable used to connect an external peripheral device to the con- nector on the parallel I/O interface. For parallel I/O unit is another option 2A-CBL.**. One end matches the connector on the parallel input/output unit, and the other end is free. Connect the peripheral device's input/output signal using the free end.

One cable correspond to the input 16 points and output 16 points.

Two cables are needed to connection of (input 32 points and output 32 points) with built-in standard.

Configuration Table 3-17 Configuration device

Specifications Table 3-18 Specifications

Connector pin numbers and cable colors Table 3-19 Connector pin numbers and cable colors

Notes Pin number of connector<1> are 1C, 2C, ....20C, 1D, 2D, ....20D, connector<2> are 1A, 2A, ....20A, 1B, 2B, ....20B.

Part name Type Qty. Mass (kg) Note1)

Note1) Mass indicates one set.

Remarks

External I/O cable 2D-CBL 1 pc. 0.7(5m)

1.84(15m) 5m or 15m

Items Specifications

Number of cables x cable size AWG #28 x 20P 40 cores

Total length 5m, 15m

Pin no. Cable colors Pin no. Cable colors Pin no. Cable colors Pin no. Cable colors

1A/C Orange/Red a 11A/C Orange/Red c 1B/D Orange/Black a 11B/D Orange/Black c

2A/C Gray/Red a 12A/C Gray/Red c 2B/D Gray/Black a 12B/D Gray/Black c

3A/C White/Red a 13A/C White/Red c 3B/D White/Black a 13B/D White/Black c

4A/C Yellow/Red a 14A/C Yellow/Red c 4B/D Yellow/Black a 14B/D Yellow/Black c

5A/C Pink/Red a 15A/C Pink/Red c 5B/D Pink/Black a 15B/D Pink/Black c

6A/C Orange/Red b 16A/C Orange/Red d 6B/D Orange/Black b 16B/D Orange/Black d

7A/C Gray/Red b 17A/C Gray/Red d 7B/D Gray/Black b 17B/D Gray/Black d

8A/C White/Red b 18A/C White/Red d 8B/D White/Black b 18B/D White/Black d

9A/C Yellow/Red b 19A/C Yellow/Red d 9B/D Yellow/Black b 19B/D Yellow/Black d

10A/C Pink/Red b 20A/C Pink/Red d 10B/D Pink/Black b 20B/D Pink/Black d

3 Controller

External I/O cable 3-176

Connections and outside dimensions The sheath of each signal cable (40 lines) is color indicated and marked with dots. Refer to the cable color speci- fications in "Table 3-28: Connector pin numbers and cable colors" when making the connections.

Fig.3-38 Connections and outside dimensions

(Eg.) Pin number: color indication

Orange Red a

Type of dot mark (see figure below)

Color of dot mark

Color of sheath

Line color type

a type

Pattern of the print mark

One dot

Two dots

Three dots

Four dots

b type

c type

d type

1A/C 1B/D

20A/C 20B/D

or

Plug (Fujitsu Ltd) Connector FCN-361J040-AU

Cover FCN-360C040-B

3-177 Parallel I/O unit

3 Controller

(4) Parallel I/O unit

Order type: 2A-RZ361(Sink type) 2A-RZ371(Source type)

Outline This is used to expand the external inputs and outputs. One one equal with this unit is built into the control unit among controllers the standard.

The connection cable is not included. .Prepare the optional external input/output cable (2A-CBL05 or 2A-CBL15).

Use 2A-RZ361 if the external input/output signal logic is of the sink type and 2A- RZ371 for source type signal logic.

Notes) Although the combined use with the parallel I/O interface (2D-TZ368) of another option is also possible, please use the setup of the station number by the different number separately. The station number is auto- matically fixed by the position of the option slot which installed the parallel I/O interface in 0-1.

Configuration Table 3-20 Configuration device

Specifications 1) The parallel I/O interface (2D-TZ368) of another option, and the a maximum of eight pieces in all. (One station

occupies one unit.) 2) The power supply (24V) must be prepared by the customer and connected with the power connection cable

(DCcable-2) A separate 24V power supply is required for the input/output circuit wiring.

Table 3-21 Electrical specifications of input circuits

Part name Type Qty. Mass (kg) Note1)

Note1) Mass indicates one set.

Remarks

Parallel I/O unit 2A-RZ361 Either one

pc.

0.7 Input/output 32 points/32 points 2A-RZ361 is the sink type. 2A-RZ371 is the source type.2A-RZ371 0.7

Robot I/O link connec- tion connector

NETcable-1 2 sets - Connector with pins. The cable must be prepared and wired by the customer.

Power connection con- nector

DCcable-2 1 set - Connector with pins. The cable must be prepared and wired by the customer.

Terminator R-TM 1 pc. - 100(1/4W)

Item Specification Internal circuit

Type DC input

Number of input points 32

Insulation method Photo coupler insulation

Rated input voltage 12VDC 24VDC

Rated input current Approx 3mA Approx 7mA

Working voltage range 10.2 to 26.4VDC(Ripple factor should be less than 5%.)

ON voltage/ON current 8VDC or more/ 2mA or more

OFF voltage/ OFF current 4VDC or less/ 1mA or less

Input resistance Approx. 3.3k

Response time OFF-ON 10ms or less (24VDC)

ON-OFF 10ms or less (24VDC)

Common method 8 points per common

External cable connection method Connector

+24V/+12V (COM)

3.3K

820 Input

3.3K

820

24G/12G

Input

3 Controller

Parallel I/O unit 3-178

Table 3-22 Electrical specifications for the output circuits

The output circuit protective fuses prevent failure in case of load short-circuit and improper connections. Please do not connect loads that cause the current to exceed the maximum rated current. If the maximum rated current is exceeded, the internal transistors may be damaged.

Inputs the power supply for control (DCcable-2) then inputs the controllers power supply.

Item Specification Internal circuit

Type Transistor output

No. of output points 32

Insulation method Photo-coupler insulation

Rated load voltage 12VDC/24VDC

Rated load voltage range 10.2 to 30VDC(peak voltage 30VDC)

Max. load current 0.1A/point (100)

Leakage current at OFF 0.1mA or less

Max. voltage drop at ON 0.9VDC(TYP.) Note1)

Note1) The maximum voltage drop value at signal ON. Refer to it for the equipment connected to the output circuit.

Response time

OFF-ON 2ms or less

(hardware response time)

ON-OFF 2ms or less

(Resistance load) (hardware response time)

Fuse rating Fuse 3.2A (one per common) Replacement not possible

Common method 8 points per common (common terminal: 4 points)

External wire connection

method Connector

External power

supply

Voltage 12VDC/24VDC(10.2 to 30VDC)

Current 60mA (TYP. 24VDC per common) (base drive current)

+24V/+12V

24G/12G

Output

Fuse

+24V/+12V

24G/12G

Output

Fuse

CAUTION

CAUTION

3-179 Parallel I/O unit

3 Controller

Fig.3-39 Specifications for the connection cable

NETcable-1 (Network cable)

Pin No. RIO1/2 RIO1/2 Pin No.

TXRXH TXRXH

TXRXL TXRXL

SG(GND) SG(GND)

FG

DCcable-2 (Power cable)

Pin No. DCIN

24V 24V Power

24G

FG(PE)

Connected the frame ground or protect ground

R-TM (Terminator)

Pin No. RIO1/2 100

TXRXH

TXRXL

SG(GND)

List of parts and manufacturer

Type Connector type Contact type Resistant Manufacturer

NETcable-1 1-178288-3 (2) 1-175218-2 (6) Tyco Electronics (Black connector)

51103-0300 (1) 50351-8100 (3) MOLEX (White connector)

DCcable-2 2-178288-3 (1) 1-175218-5 (3) Tyco Electronics (Black connector)

R-TM 1-178288-3 (1) 1-175218-3 (2) 100(1/4W) (1) Equivalent to KOA.

Note 2)

Note 1)

Note 1) The 24V power supply is prepared by customer (The power consumption is approx. 0.3A.) In the customer's system, do not ground the + side of 24V power supply prepared by customer for con- nect to the controller. (related with emergency stop and parallel input/output) If it connects with the controller under the condition that the + side is grounded, it will lead to failure of controller.

Note 2) The cable for general purpose can be used to the network cable. However, use the twisted shield cable of

AWG#22(0.3mm2) or more.

Connector for CR750/CR751: 51103-0300

3 Controller

Parallel I/O unit 3-180

Installation method The expansion parallel input/output unit is installed outside of the controller. Connect with the network

connection cable (NETcable-1) from the RIO connector in the rear/into of the controller.(Terminator is connected at the time of shipment)

Fig.3-40 Installing the parallel I/O unit (CR750)

6 0 5 4 6

1 5 0

6 1 56

2 -

6

1 68

1 2 8

(1 7 5 )

1 00

(40 )

<2 A -R Z 3 61 >

2A - R Z 36 1/ 2 A - R Z 37 1

6

<2 A -R Z 3 71 >

RIO

Installation dimensions of 2A-RZ361/2ARZ-371 (The controller outside installation.)

RIO connector

Upside

Wiring space

H e at

r ad

ia ti o n

sp ac

e

2-M5 screw

Downside

R ad

ia ti o n /w

ir in

g sp

ac e

Control panel installation dimensions

3-181 Parallel I/O unit

3 Controller

Fig.3-41 Installing the parallel I/O unit (CR751)

6 0 5 4 6

1 5 0

6 1 5 6

2 -

6

1 6 8

1 2 8

(1 7 5 )

1 00

(40 )

<2 A -R Z 36 1>

2A - R Z 36 1/2 A -R Z 3 71

6

<2 A -R Z 37 1>

RIORIO connector

Upside

Wiring space

H e at

r ad

ia ti o n

sp ac

e

2 M5 screw

Downside

R ad

ia ti o n / w

ir in

g sp

ac e

Control panel installation dimensions

Installation dimensions of 2A-RZ361/2ARZ-371 (The controller outside installation.)

3 Controller

Parallel I/O unit 3-182

Fig.3-42 Connection method of expansion parallel I/O unit (CR750)

1 . . . 6

CN100 CN300

7

CN100

CN300

NETcable-1

R-TM

1 . . . . 6 7

RIO

DCIN

RIO2RIO1

NETcable-1

DCcable-2

RIO2

RIO1

DCIN

FGFG

)

)

RIO2RIO1

DCIN

DCcable-2

100mm *1)

CE

FG

*2)

2030mm

*2)

200300mm

Connect the NET cable-1 to the RIO connector on the back of the controller. Each unit is connected to from a daisy chain. Always install a terminator (R-TM) to the last unit. Note) Use a shield cable for NET cable-1 as a measure against noise.

Always connect the shield to FG. Install the attached ferrite core in both ends. The unit could malfunction because of noise if the shield cable is not used.

RI

Parallel I/O unit 1 . . . 6 Parallel I/O unit 7

Note) NETc l -1 cable

connector

RIO1 connector RIO2 connector RIO1 connector RI connector

Note) NETcable-1 cable

DCcable-2 cable

DCcable-2 cable

RI connector

D I connector

terminator

I/O unit the bottom connector layout

Within 100mm

Front side

Metal braid section

Sheath Sheath

Peel the sheath in the position about 2 0-300mm from the connector end of the cable, so you can install and remove the cover. * Don't damage the shield line.

Grounding terminal position

Station No.

setting

1 . . . 6

Station No.

setting

7

DCIN connector

DCIN connector

*1) Install the ferrite core in within 100mm from each connector.

Ferrite core Only for the CE marking/ KC mark specification Pass twice

3-183 Parallel I/O unit

3 Controller

Fig.3-43 Connection method of expansion parallel I/O unit (CR751)

1 . . . 6

CN100 CN300

7

CN100

CN300

NETcable-1

R-TM

1 . . . . 6 7

RIO

DCIN

RIO2RIO1

NETcable-1

DCcable-2

RIO2

RIO1

DCIN

FGFG

)

)

RIO2RIO1

DCIN

DCcable-2

100mm *1)

CE

FG *2)

2030mm

*2)

200300mm

*1) Install the ferrite core in within 100mm from each connector.

Parallel I/O unit 1 . . . 6 Parallel I/O unit 7 Station No.

setting

1 . . . 6

Station No.

setting

7

Note) NE cable

1 connector

RIO1 connector RIO2 connector RIO1 connector RIO2 connector

Note) NETcable-1 cable

DCIN connector

DCcable-2 cable DCcable-2

cable

DCIN connector

RI connector

D I connector

R-TM terminator

I/O unit the bottom connecter layout

Connect the NET cable-1 to the RIO connector on the back of the controller. Each unit is connected to from a daisy chain. Always install a terminator (R-TM) to the last unit. Note) Use a shield cable for NET cable-1 as a measure against noise.

Always connect the shield to FG. Install the attached ferrite core in both ends. The unit could malfunction because of noise if the shield cable is not used.

Within 100mm

Ferrite core Only for the CE marking/ KC mark specification Pass twice

Front side

Metal braid section

Sheath Sheath

Peel the sheath in the position about 200-300mm from the connector end of the cable, so you can install and remove the cover. * Don't damage the shield line.

Grounding terminal position

3 Controller

Parallel I/O unit 3-184

Pin arrangement of the connector

Fig.3-44 Pin arrangement of the parallel I/O unit

Assignment of pin number and signal The assignment range of the general-purpose input-and-output signal is fixed by the setup of the station number.

Table 3-23 Assignment of pin number and signal

The connector pin number of the parallel I/O unit of the station number 0 and signal number assignment are shown in Table 3-24 and Table 3-25. If it is set as other station number, please interpret and utilize.

Unit Number Station number

CN100 CN300

1st set 0 Input 0 to 15 Output 0 to 15

Input 16 to 31 Output 16 to 31

2nd set 1 Input 32 to 47 Output 32 to 47

Input 48 to 63 Output 48 to 63

3rd set 2 Input 64 to 79 Output 64 to 79

Input 80 to 95 Output 80 to 95

4th set 3 Input 96 to 111 Output 96 to 111

Input 112 to 127 Output 112 to 127

5th set 4 Input 128 to 143 Output 128 to 143

Input 144 to 159 Output 144 to 159

6th set 5 Input 160 to 175 Output 160 to 175

Input 176 to 191 Output 176 to 191

7th set 6 Input 192 to 207 Output 192 to 207

Input 208 to 223 Output 208 to 223

8th set 7 Input 224 to 239 Output 224 to 239

Input 240 to 255 Output 240 to 255

*2A-RZ361/2 A-RZ371 are 32/32 input-and-output units. (One-station occupancy)

50

26

25

1

Channel No. setting

TXD LED display

Input 0 to 15 Output 0 to 15

CN100

CN300 Input 16 to 31 Output 16 to 31

3-185 Parallel I/O unit

3 Controller

Parallel I/O interface (First expansion unit) Table 3-24 Connector CN100pin No. and signal assignment list (2A-CBL )

Pin No.

Line color

Function name Pin No.

Line color

Function name

General-purpose Dedicated/power supply,

common General-purpose

Dedicated/power supply, common

1 Orange/Red A FG 26 Orange/Blue A FG

2 Gray/Red A 0V:For pins 4-7, 10-13 27 Gray/Blue A 0V:For pins 29-32, 35-38

3 White/Red A 12V/24V:For pins 4-7 28 White/Blue A 12V/24V:For pins 29-32

4 Yellow/Red A General-purpose output 0 Operating output Note1)

Note1) The dedicated signal is assigned at shipping. It can change with the parameter.

29 Yellow/Blue A General-purpose output 4

5 Pink/Red A General-purpose output 1 In servo ON output signal Note1)

30 Pink/Blue A General-purpose output 5

6 Orange/Red B General-purpose output 2 Error occurring output signal Note1)

31 Orange/Blue B General-purpose output 6

7 Gray/Red B General-purpose output 3 Operation rights output sig- nal Note1)

32 Gray/Blue B General-purpose output 7

8 White/Red B 0V:For pins 4-7, 10-13 33 White/Blue B 0V:For pins 29-32, 35-38

9 Yellow/Red B 12V/24V:For pins 10-13 34 Yellow/Blue B 12V/24V:For pins 35-38

10 Pink/Red B General-purpose output 8 35 Pink/Blue B General-purpose output 12

11 Orange/Red C General-purpose output 9 36 Orange/Blue C General-purpose output 13

12 Gray/Red C General-purpose output 10 37 Gray/Blue C General-purpose output 14

13 White/Red C General-purpose output 11 38 White/Blue C General-purpose output 15

14 Yellow/Red C COM0:For pins 15-22 Note2)

Note2) Sink type:12V/24V(COM),Source type:0V(COM)

39 Yellow/Blue C COM1:For pins 40-47 Note2)

15 Pink/Red C General-purpose input 0 Stop input Note3)

Note3) The dedicated input signal (STOP) is assigned at shipping. The signal number is fixing.

40 Pink/Blue C General-purpose input 8

16 Orange/Red D General-purpose input 1 Servo OFF input signal Note1)

41 Orange/Blue D General-purpose input 9

17 Gray/Red D General-purpose input 2 Error reset input signal Note1)

42 Gray/Blue D General-purpose input 10

18 White/Red D General-purpose input 3 Start input Note1) 43 White/Blue D General-purpose input 11

19 Yellow/Red D General-purpose input 4 Servo ON input signal Note1) 44 Yellow/Blue D General-purpose input 12

20 Pink/Red D General-purpose input 5 Operation rights input sig- nal Note1)

45 Pink/Blue D General-purpose input 13

21 Orange/Red E General-purpose input 6 46 Orange/Blue E General-purpose input 14

22 Gray/Red E General-purpose input 7 47 Gray/Blue E General-purpose input 15

23 White/Red E Reserved 48 White/Blue E Reserved

24 Yellow/Red E Reserved 49 Yellow/Blue E Reserved

25 Pink/Red E Reserved 50 Pink/Blue E Reserved

3 Controller

Parallel I/O unit 3-186

Table 3-25 Connector CN300pin No. and signal assignment list (2A-CBL )

Pin No.

Line color

Function name Pin No.

Line color

Function name

General-purpose Dedicated/power supply,

common General-purpose

Dedicated/power supply, common

1 Orange/Red A FG 26 Orange/Blue A FG

2 Gray/Red A 0V:For pins 4-7, 10-13 27 Gray/Blue A 0V:For pins 29-32, 35-38

3 White/Red A 12V/24V:For pins 4-7 28 White/Blue A 12V/24V:For pins 29-32

4 Yellow/Red A General-purpose output 16 29 Yellow/Blue A General-purpose output 20

5 Pink/Red A General-purpose output 17 30 Pink/Blue A General-purpose output 21

6 Orange/Red B General-purpose output 18 31 Orange/Blue B General-purpose output 22

7 Gray/Red B General-purpose output 19 32 Gray/Blue B General-purpose output 23

8 White/Red B 0V:For pins 4-7, 10-13 33 White/Blue B 0V:For pins 29-32, 35-38

9 Yellow/Red B 12V/24V:For pins 10-13 34 Yellow/Blue B 12V/24V:For pins 35-38

10 Pink/Red B General-purpose output 24 35 Pink/Blue B General-purpose output 28

11 Orange/Red C General-purpose output 25 36 Orange/Blue C General-purpose output 29

12 Gray/Red C General-purpose output 26 37 Gray/Blue C General-purpose output 30

13 White/Red C General-purpose output 27 38 White/Blue C General-purpose output 31

14 Yellow/Red C COM0:For pins 15-22Note1)

Note1) Sink type:12V/24V(COM),Source type:0V(COM)

39 Yellow/Blue C COM1:For pins 40-47 Note1)

15 Pink/Red C General-purpose input 16 40 Pink/Blue C General-purpose input 24

16 Orange/Red D General-purpose input 17 41 Orange/Blue D General-purpose input 25

17 Gray/Red D General-purpose input 18 42 Gray/Blue D General-purpose input 26

18 White/Red D General-purpose input 19 43 White/Blue D General-purpose input 27

19 Yellow/Red D General-purpose input 20 44 Yellow/Blue D General-purpose input 28

20 Pink/Red D General-purpose input 21 45 Pink/Blue D General-purpose input 29

21 Orange/Red E General-purpose input 22 46 Orange/Blue E General-purpose input 30

22 Gray/Red E General-purpose input 23 47 Gray/Blue E General-purpose input 31

23 White/Red E Reserved 48 White/Blue E Reserved

24 Yellow/Red E Reserved 49 Yellow/Blue E Reserved

25 Pink/Red E Reserved 50 Pink/Blue E Reserved

3-187 Parallel I/O unit

3 Controller

The example of connection with our PLC

Fig.3-45 Connection with a Mitsubishi PLC (Example of sink type)

Fig.3-46 Connection with a Mitsubishi PLC (Example of source type)

Parallel I/O unit (Output)

(Input)

60mA (+24V/+12V)

Output

Output

Fuse (24G/12G)

+24V

External power supply

X

COM

QX41(Mitsubishi programmable controller)

(COM)

Input3.3K

Input

External power supply

+24V

Y

+24V

QY41P (Mitsubishi programmable controller)

COM 24G

* The input/output circuit external power supply (24 VDC) must be prepared by the customer.

Note) In the customer's system, do not ground the + side of 24V power supply prepared by customer for connect to the controller. (related with emergency stop and parallel input/output) If it connects with the controller under the condition that the + side is grounded, it will lead to failure of controller.

Parallel I/O unit

(Output)

(Input)

60mA (+24V/+12V)

Output

Output

Fuse

(24G/12G)

+24V

External power supply

X

QX81 (Mitsubishi programmable controller)

(COM)

Input3.3K

Input

External power supply

+24V

Y

+24V

QY81P (Mitsubishi programmable controller)

24G

* The input/output circuit external power supply (24 VDC) must be prepared by the customer.

Note) In the customer's system, do not ground the + side of 24V power supply prepared by customer for connect to the controller. (related with emergency stop and parallel input/output) If it connects with the controller under the condition that the + side is grounded, it will lead to failure of controller.

COM

3 Controller

External I/O cable 3-188

(5) External I/O cable

Order type: 2A-CBL Note The numbers in the boxes refer to the length. 05: 5m 15: 15m

Outline This is the dedicated cable used to connect an external peripheral device to the con- nector on the parallel input/output unit.

One end matches the connector on the parallel input/output unit, and the other end is free. Connect the peripheral device's input/output signal using the free end.

One cable correspond to the input 16 points and output 16 points.

Two cables are needed to connection of (input 32 points and output 32 points) with built-in standard.

Configuration Table 3-26 Configuration device

Specifications Table 3-27 Specifications

Connector pin numbers and cable colors Table 3-28 Connector pin numbers and cable colors

Part name Type Qty. Mass(kg)Note1)

Note1) Mass indicates one set.

Remarks

External I/O cable 2A-CBL 1pc. 0.7(5m)

1.84(15m) 5m or 15m

Items Specifications

Number of cables x cable size 50 cores x AWG #28

Total length 5m or 15m

Pin no. Cable colors Pin

no. Cable colors Pin no. Cable colors Pin

no. Cable colors Pin no. Cable colors

1 Orange/Red A 11 Orange/Red C 21 Orange/Red E 31 Orange/Blue B 41 Orange/Blue D

2 Gray/Red A 12 Gray/Red C 22 Gray/Red E 32 Gray/Blue B 42 Gray/Blue D

3 White/Red A 13 White/Red C 23 White/Red E 33 White/Blue B 43 White/Blue D

4 Yellow/Red A 14 Yellow/Red C 24 Yellow/Red E 34 Yellow/Blue B 44 Yellow/Blue D

5 Pink/Red A 15 Pink/Red C 25 Pink/Red E 35 Pink/Blue B 45 Pink/Blue D

6 Orange/Red B 16 Orange/Red D 26 Orange/Blue A 36 Orange/Blue C 46 Orange/Blue E

7 Gray/Red B 17 Gray/Red D 27 Gray/Blue A 37 Gray/Blue C 47 Gray/Blue E

8 White/Red B 18 White/Red D 28 White/Blue A 38 White/Blue C 48 White/Blue E

9 Yellow/Red B 19 Yellow/Red D 29 Yellow/Blue A 39 Yellow/Blue C 49 Yellow/Blue E

10 Pink/Red B 20 Pink/Red D 30 Pink/Blue A 40 Pink/Blue C 50 Pink/Blue E

3-189 External I/O cable

3 Controller

Connections and outside dimensions The sheath of each signal cable (50 lines) is color indicated and marked with dots. Refer to the cable color speci- fications in "Table 3-28: Connector pin numbers and cable colors" when making the connections.

Fig.3-47 Connections and outside dimensions

(Eg.) Pin number: color indication

Orange Red

Type of dot mark (see figure below)

Color of dot mark

Color of sheath

Type of dot mark

A type

B type

C type

D type

E type

F type

G type

H type

I type

J type

Dot pattern

Receptacle type (PCB side)57AE-40500-21D(D8)

Plug type cable side57YE-30500-2(D8)

DDK

Maker

DDK

26

5000

6 6

50 25

1

18.5

1

18.5

18.5

Continuous

18.5

1.5

1.5

1.5

1.5

18.5

3

3

3

18.5

18.5

18.5

7.5

7.5

Continuous

35.7

13.54

16.2 9.27

7 6 . 7

4

6 4 .5

3

5 1 .8

1 6

2 .1

59

Type of dot mark Dot pattern

Note1) The type of the plug shows the specification of this cable. The following connector is recommended when user make the cable. Plug type (cable side) : 57E series (Soldering type).....................................................DDK 57FE series (Flat cable pressure connection type)......DDK

Note1)

3 Controller

CC-Link interface 3-190

(6) CC-Link interface

Order type: 2D-TZ576

Outline The CC-Link interface is the optioninterface to not only add bit data to the robot controller. but also to add CC-Link field network function that allows cyclic transmission of word data.

Configuration Table 3-29 Configuration device

Table 3-30 Procured by the customer

Fig.3-48 Example of CC-Link Product Configuration

Part name Type Qty. Mass(kg)Note1)

Note1) Mass indicates one set.

Remarks

CC-Link interface TZ576 1 0.6

Manual BFP-A8634 1 - CD-ROM

Ferrite core E04SR301334 2 -

Be sure to install this for noise countermeasure.Cable clamp AL4 2 -

AL5 2 -

On-line connector for

communication

A6CON-LJ5P 1 -

Terminal resistor A6CON-TR11N 1 - Resistance value: 100

One-touch connector plug

for communication

A6CON-L5P 2 -

Part name Type Qty. Remarks

Master station

QJ61BT11(Q series)

1 FX series products are not supported.

QJ61BT11N(Q series)

AJ61QBT11(QnA series)

A1SJ61QBT11(QnAS series)

AJ61BT11(A series)

A1SJ61BT11(AnS series)

A80BD-J61BT11(personal computer board)

Communication cable - 1 Shielded 3-core twisted cable

This cable may be manufactured by the customer.

CC-Link

I/O

Robot arm Inverter

I/O unit

Display Sequencer

Personal computer

Partner manufac- turers device

-Link interface card (This option)

Controller

3-191 CC-Link interface

3 Controller

Specifications Table 3-31 Specifications

Item Specifications Remarks

Communication function Bit data and word data can be transmitted. Word data are used by the registers.

Station type Intelligent device station Note1)

Note1) Not available for the transient transmission function and FX-series models that do not support intelligent devices.

Support station Local station No master station function

The version corresponding to CC-Link Ver.2 The extended cyclic setup is possible.

Mountable option slot Slot 1, 2

Number of mountable CC-Link interface cards 1 Multiple CC-Link interface cards cannot be

inserted.

Number of stations 1 to 64 stations When four stations are occupied, continuous

station numbers are used. The station

numbers are set by a DIP switch.

Transmission speed 10M/5M/2.5M/625K/156K bps This is set by the rotary SW.

Station number 1 to 64 When two or more stations are occupied,

continuous station numbers are used.Number of occupied stations 1/2/3/4

Extended cyclic setup 1/2/4/8

Maximum link point Remote I/O

(RX, RY).

Each 896 points The two last cannot be used.

Remote register

(RWr, RWw)

Each 128 register 16 bits/register

Extended cyclic setup - 1 fold

setup

2 fold

setup

3 fold

setup

4 fold

setup

Link point

per set

When one

station is

occupied

Remote I/O

(RX, RY).

32 point 32 point 64 point 128 point

Remote register

( RWw)

4 word 8 word 16 word 32 word

Remote register

(RWr)

4 word 8 word 16 word 32 word

When two

stations is

occupied

Remote I/O

(RX, RY).

64 point 96 point 192 point 384 point

Remote register

( RWw)

8 word 16 word 32 word 64 word

Remote register

(RWr)

8 word 16 word 32 word 64 word

When three

stations is

occupied

Remote I/O

(RX, RY).

96 point 160 point 320 point 640 point

Remote register

( RWw)

12 word 24 word 48 word 96 word

Remote register

(RWr)

12 word 24 word 48 word 96 word

When four

stations is

occupied

Remote I/O

(RX, RY).

128 point 224 point 448 point 896 point

Remote register

( RWw)

16 word 32 word 64 word 128 word

Remote register

(RWr)

16 word 32 word 64 word 128 word

Number of the maximum occupancy station 4 stations

The I/O first number of the robot controller. No. 6000 -.

The number corresponding to the station

number by the setup of the parameter

"CCFIX."

3 Controller

CC-Link interface 3-192

Functions (1) Communication function

The number of usable points is 896 points maximum for bit control and 128 points maximum for word control.

(2) Easy setup The CC-Link interface card can be set by a rotary switch or DIP switch. No separate space is required to mount the CC-Link interface card as it is embedded in the robot controller (can only be mounted into slot 2).

Easy wiring since only four terminals need to be connected. Dedicated commands have been added to MELFA-BASIC V (robot programming language); thus, no complex interface programming is required.

(3) High-speed response The link scan time when connecting 64 stations is approximately 7.2 ms, achieving superior high-speed response performance.

A transmission speed can be selected from 10M, 5M, 2.5M, 625K and 156K bps according to the transmission distance.

3-193 Controller protection box

3 Controller

(7) Controller protection box

Order type: CR750 controller ........................CR750-MB CR751 controller ........................CR751-MB

Outline

By putting the controller in this box, the controller can be protected from oil mist environment.

Use this option, when the controller is installed where environment is oil mist such as machine shop etc.

Configuration Table 3-32 Configuration equipment and types

Part name Type Qty. Mass (Kg)Note1)

Note1) Mass indicates one set.

Remarks

CR750 controller

Controller protection box CR750-MB 1

22

Internal power cable 3 For connection between the power supply relay

terminal and controller inside this box

Internal earth cable 1 For connection between the grounding terminal and

controller inside this box

Label for serial number 1

Transparent seal 1

Cable tie T50L 4

Screw for fixing of the controller

mounting plate

M4x8 4

Instruction Manual BFP-A8896 1 -

CR751 controller

Controller protection box CR751-MB 1

21

Internal power cable 2 For connection between the power supply relay

terminal and controller inside this box

Internal earth cable 1 For connection between the grounding terminal and

controller inside this box

Label for serial number 1

Transparent seal 1

Cable tie T50L 4

Screw for fixing of the controller

mounting plate

M4x8 4

Instruction Manual BFP-A8997 1 -

3 Controller

Controller protection box 3-194

Specifications Table 3-33 Specifications

(1) The robot must be grounded by the customer. (2) The cable for primary power supply connection and the grounding cable are customer preparations.

Item Unit Specifications Remarks

CR750 controller

Outside dimension mm 500(W)725(D)250(H) Excluding protrusions

Mass Kg 22

Construction Self-contained floor type IP54

Grounding 100 or less (class D grounding)

Paint color Dark gray Equivalent to Munsell: 3.5PB3.2/0.8

CR751 controller

Outside dimension mm 500(W)725(D)250(H) Excluding protrusions

Mass Kg 21

Construction Self-contained floor type IP54

Grounding 100 or less (class D grounding)

Paint color Dark gray Equivalent to Munsell: 3.5PB3.2/0.8

3-195 Controller protection box

3 Controller

Outside dimension

Fig.3-49 Outside dimension of CR750-MB

Cable cover

Controller setting position

Drain hole

Rubber foot fixa- tion screw for placing vertically (Four places)

3 Controller

Controller protection box 3-196

Fig.3-50 Outside dimension of CR751-MB

Cable cover

Controller setting position

Rubber foot fixation screw for placing ver- tically (Four places)

3-197 Controller protection box

3 Controller

Names of each part

Fig.3-51 Names of each part (CR750-MB)

Window

Label for serial number

Transparent seal

Cable cover

Cable tie

External emergency stop wiring (customer preparation)

Machine cable CN2

Power supply cable, Grounding cable (customer preparation) Machine cable CN1

Grounding terminal (M4 screw)

Power supply relay terminal (M4 screw)

Fixing lever ControllerMode change SW

extension cable

T/B junction cable

Controller mounting plate Internal power cable

Mode key switch

T/B connector

Front side of the controller

Front view

Upper view

Internal earth cable

3 Controller

Controller protection box 3-198

Fig.3-52 Names of each part (CR751-MB)

Label for serial number

Transparent seal

Cable cover

Cable tie

External emergency stop wiring (customer preparation)

Machine cable CN2

Power supply cable, Grounding cable (customer preparation) Machine cable CN1

Grounding terminal (M4 screw)

Power supply relay terminal (M4 screw)

Fixing lever

Controller

Controller mounting

plate

Internal power cable

Front side of the controller

Front view

Upper view

Internal earth cable

3-199 Controller protection box

3 Controller

Wiring system diagram

Fig.3-53 Wiring system diagram (CR750-MB)

(L1)

FG FG FG

FG

(L2)

(L1)

ACIN

CN1 CN2

CNUSR 11/12

(L2)

Single phase: RH-6FH series/RH-3FHR series

Single phase/Three phase: RH-12FH/20FH series

(L1)

(L2)

FG FG FG

FG

(L2) (L1)

ACIN

CN1 CN2

CNUSR 11/12

(L3)

(L3)

Note1) When using the controller for the three phases with the single-phase power supply, connect the primary power supply to L1 and L2 electric terminal of the protection box so that the power supply may be supplied to the heat-exchanger AC fan of the protection box. Connects with L1 and L3 electric terminal to the ACIN terminal block of the controller. Refer to the separate manual "Controller setup, basic operation, and maintenance" for detail of connecting the power cable and the grounding cable.

Internal power cableController protection box Terminal

Power supply cable

Grounding cable

Internal earth cable

Grounding terminal

AC fan

Controller

Internal power cableController protection box

Power supply cable

Grounding cable

Grounding terminal

AC fan

Terminal Note1)

Controller

Internal earth cable

3 Controller

Controller protection box 3-200

Fig.3-54 Wiring system diagram (CR751-MB)

Single phase: RH-6FH series/RH-3FHR series

Single phase/Three phase: RH-12FH/20FH series

Note1) When using the controller for the three phases with the single-phase power supply, connect the primary power supply to L1 and L2 electric terminal of the protection box so that the power supply may be supplied to the heat-exchanger AC fan of the protection box. Connects with L1 and L3 electric terminal to the ACIN terminal block of the controller. Refer to the separate manual "Controller setup, basic operation, and maintenance" for detail of connecting the power cable and the grounding cable.

Internal power cableController protection box Terminal

Power supply cable

Grounding cable

Internal earth cable

Grounding terminal

AC fan

Controller

Internal power cableController protection box

Power supply cable

Grounding cable

Grounding terminal

AC fan

Terminal Note1)

Controller

Internal earth cable

3-201 Controller protection box

3 Controller

Installation dimensions

Fig.3-55 Installation dimensions (CR750-MB)

Placed horizontally

150mm or more

Placed vertically

30mm or more

150mm or more

150mm or more

30mm or more

150mm or more

150mm or more

150mm or more

3 Controller

Controller protection box 3-202

Fig.3-56 Installation dimensions (CR751-MB)

Placed horizontally

150mm or more

Placed vertically

30mm or more

150mm or more

150mm or more

30mm or more

150mm or more

150mm or more

150mm or more

3-203 MELSOFT RT ToolBox2/RT ToolBox2 mini

3 Controller

(8) MELSOFT RT ToolBox2/RT ToolBox2 mini

Order type MELSOFT RT ToolBox2 *For windows CD-ROM : 3D-11C-WINE

MELSOFT RT ToolBox2 mini *For windows CD-ROM : 3D-12C-WINE

Outline This is handy software that fully uses the personal computer functions. It can be used in various stages from the robot specifications study (tact study, etc.) to the design support (creation and editing of programs), start up support (execution, control and debugging of program), and maintenance.

The "personal computer support software" which supports these function fully, and the "personal computer support software mini" which does not have the simulation function are available.

Configuration Table 3-34 Product configuration

Features (1) Simple operation with guidance method and menu method

The Windows standard is used for windows operation, so the controller initialization and startup operations can be carried out easily by following the instructions given on the screen. Even a beginner can easily carry out the series of operations from program creation to execution.

(2) Increased work efficiency with ample support functions The work efficiency is greatly improved with the multi-window method that carries out multiple steps and dis- plays in parallel. The renumbering function, and copy, search, syntax check and step execution are especially sufficient, and are extremely useful when editing or debugging the program. With the simulation function support, the program can be debugged and the tact checked before starting the machine at the site. This allows the on-site startup work efficiently to be greatly improved.

(3) The maintenance forecast function increases the efficiency of maintenance work. Analyze the load condition while the robot is actually operating. Based on this analysis, calculate the time for maintenance, such as lubri- cation and belt replacement. By utilizing this information, the line stop time as well as the maintenance costs can be reduced.

(4) The position recovery support function increases the recovery efficiency in the event of origin position dis- placement. This function compensates the origin settings and position data by just reproducing several previ- ous teaching points when hand and/or arm displacement occurs, when replacing the motor and the belts, or when reloading the robot. This function can reduce the time required for recovery.

Part name Type Medium Mass (kg) Note1)

Note1) Mass indicates one set.

Remarks

RT ToolBox2 3D-11C-WINE CD-ROM 0.2

RT ToolBox2 mini 3D-12C-WINE CD-ROM 0.2

3 Controller

MELSOFT RT ToolBox2/RT ToolBox2 mini 3-204

Functions Table 3-35 Functions

Function Functional existenceNote1)

Note1) The functions included with the RT ToolBox2 and the RT ToolBox2 mini are shown below. : Function provided : Function not provided

Details

Compatible model

Personal computer running Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7,

Windows 8, Windows 8.1, or Windows 10. Note2)

Note2) Recommend corresponding to CE Marking, an FCC standard, and a VCCI standard.

Program editing

functions

Editing functions

MELFA BASIC V language compatible

Multiple editing screen simultaneously display

Command input, comment writing

Position data editing

File operation (writing to controller, floppy disk, personal computer)

Search and replace function (using characters, line Nos., labels)

Copy, cut, paste, insert (per character, line), undo (per command

statement, position conversion)

Line No. automatic generation, renumbering

Batch syntax check

Command template

Position conversion batch editing

Position variable template

Print, print preview

Control func- tions

Program file control (list, copy, movement, delete, content compari- son, name change, protect)

Debugging func- tions

Direct editing of program in controller

Confirmation of robot program operation (step execution, direct exe- cution)

Simulation func- tion

Off-line simulation of robot program operation using CG (computer

graphics)

Tact time calculation

Monitor func- tions

Robot operation monitor (robot operation state, stop signal, error

monitor, program monitor (execution program, variables), general-pur- pose input/output signals (forced output possible), dedicated input/

output signals, operation confirmation (operation range, current posi- tion, hand, etc.)

Operation monitor (working time statistics, production information,

robot version)

Servo monitor (load)

Maintenance

function

Parameter setting

Batch, divided backup

RT ToolBox2 mini

3D-12C-WINE

RT ToolBox2

3D-11C-WINE

3-205 Instruction Manual (bookbinding)

3 Controller

(9) Instruction Manual (bookbinding)

Order type: 5F-FB01-PE01 ..............RH-6FH/12FH/20FH-D series 5F-FP01-PE01...............RH-3FHR-D series

Outline

This is a printed version of the CD-ROM (instruction manual) supplied with this product.

Configuration Table 3-36 Product configuration (RH-6FH/12FH/20FH-D series)

Table 3-37 Product configuration (RH-3FHR-D series)

Name Type Mass (Kg) Note1)

Note1) Mass indicates one set.

Specifications

Instruction Manual 5F-FB01-PE01 2.6 The instructions manual set of "RH-6FH/12FH/

20FH-D series".

Safety Manual BFP-A8006 - Items relating to safety in handling the robot

Standard Specifications BFP-A8863 - Specification of the robot arm and controller

Robot Arm Setup & Maintenance BFP-A8865 - Installation method of the robot arm, jog operation, and

maintenance and inspection procedures

Controller Setup, Basic Operation and Maintenance BFP-A8867 - Installation method of the controller, basic operation,

and maintenance and inspection procedures

Detailed Explanation of Functions and Operations BFP-A8869 - Functions of the controller and T/B, operation

method, and explanation of MELFA-BASIC V

Troubleshooting BFP-A8871 - Causes of errors occurred and their countermeasures

Additional axis function BFP-A8663 - Function of the additional axis, operation method.

Tracking Function Manual BFP-A8664 - Function of the Tracking, operation method.

GOT Direct Connection Extended Function BFP-A8849 -

Explains of data configuration of shared memory,

monitoring, and operating procedures, between the

GOT and controller.

Name Type Mass (Kg) Note1)

Note1) Mass indicates one set.

Specifications

Instruction Manual 5F-FP01-PE01 2.6 The instructions manual set of "RH-3FHR-D series".

Safety Manual BFP-A8006 - Items relating to safety in handling the robot

Standard Specifications BFP-A8863 - Specification of the robot arm and controller

Robot Arm Setup & Maintenance BFP-A8993 - Installation method of the robot arm, jog operation, and

maintenance and inspection procedures

Controller Setup, Basic Operation and Maintenance BFP-A8867 - Installation method of the controller, basic operation,

and maintenance and inspection procedures

Detailed Explanation of Functions and Operations BFP-A8869 - Functions of the controller and T/B, operation

method, and explanation of MELFA-BASIC V

Troubleshooting BFP-A8871 - Causes of errors occurred and their countermeasures

Additional axis function BFP-A8663 - Function of the additional axis, operation method.

Tracking Function Manual BFP-A8664 - Function of the Tracking, operation method.

GOT Direct Connection Extended Function BFP-A8849 -

Explains of data configuration of shared memory,

monitoring, and operating procedures, between the

GOT and controller.

3 Controller

Maintenance parts 3-206

3.11 Maintenance parts

The consumable parts used in the controller are shown in Table 3-38. Purchase these parts from your dealer when required. Some Mitsubishi-designated parts differ from the maker's standard parts. Thus, confirm the part name, robot arm and controller serial No. and purchase the parts from your dealer.

Table 3-38 Controller consumable parts list

No. Name Type Note1)

Note1) Confirm the robot arm serial No., and contact the dealer or service branch of Mitsubishi Electric Co., for the type.

Qty. Usage place Supplier

1 Lithium battery Q6BAT 1 CR750 controller:

Inside of the interface

cover

CR751 controller:

Inside of the filter cover Mitsubishi Electric

2 Filter CR750 controller:

BKOFA0773H42

CR751 controller:

BKOFA0773H41

1 Inside the filter cover

4-207 List of commands

4Software

4 Software

4.1 List of commands

The available new functions in MELFA-BASIC V are given in Table 4-1.

Table 4-1 List of MELFA-BASIC V commands

Type Class Function Input format (example)

P o si

ti o n a

n d

o pe

ra ti o n c

o n tr

o l

Joint interpolation Moves to the designated position with joint interpolation. Mov P1

Linear interpolation Moves to the designated position with linear interpolation. Mvs P1

Circular interpolation Moves along a designated arc (start point passing point start point

(end point)) with 3-dimensional circular interpolation (360 degrees). Mvc P1,P2,P1

Moves along a designated arc (start point passing point end point)

with 3-dimensional circular interpolation. Mvr P1,P2,P3

Moves along the arc on the opposite side of a designated arc (start point

reference point end point) with 3-dimensional circular interpola- tion.

Mvr2 P1,P9,P3

Moves along a set arc (start point end point) with 3-dimensional cir- cular interpolation.

Mvr3 P1,P9,P3

Speed designation Designates the speed for various interpolation operations with a per- centage (0.1% unit).

Ovrd 100

Designate the speed for joint interpolation operation with a percentage

(0.1% unit). JOvrd 100

Designates the speed for linear and circular interpolation with a numeri- cal value (mm/s unit).

Spd 123.5

Designates the acceleration/deceleration time as a percentage in

respect to the predetermined maximum acceleration/deceleration. (1%

unit)

Accel 50,80

Automatically adjusts the acceleration/deceleration according to the

parameter setting value. Oadl ON

Sets the hand and work conditions for automatic adjustment of the

acceleration/deceleration. Loadset 1,1

Operation Adds a process unconditionally to the operation. Wth

Adds a process conditionally to the operation. WthIf

Designates smooth operation. Cnt 1,100,200

Performance of movement is upgraded corresponding to the application. MvTune 4

Designates the positioning completion conditions with a No. of pulses. Fine 200

Designates the positioning completion conditions with a distance in a

straight line Fine 1, P

Designates the positioning completion conditions with a joint interpola- tion.

Fine 0.5, J, 2

Turns the servo power ON/OFF for all axes. Servo OFF

Limits the operation of each axis so that the designated torque is not

exceeded. Torq 4,10

Position control Designates the base conversion data. Base P1

Designates the tool conversion data. Tool P1

Float control The robot arm rigidity is lowered and softened. (XYZ coordinate system) Cmp Pos ,&B00000011

The robot arm rigidity is lowered and softened. (JOINT coordinate sys- tem)

Cmp Jnt ,&B00000011

The robot arm rigidity is lowered and softened. (TOOL coordinate sys- tem)

Cmp Tool ,&B00000011

The robot arm rigidity is returned to the normal state. Cmp Off

The robot arm rigidity is designated. CmpG 1.0,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.0

Pallet Defines the pallet. Def Plt 1,P1,P2,P3,P4,5,3,1

Operates the pallet grid point position. Plt 1,M1

Singular point pas- sage

Move to a specified position using linear interpolation passing through a

singular point. Mvs P1 Type 0,2

4Software

List of commands 4-208

P ro

gr am

c o n tr

o l

Branching Branches unconditionally to the designated place. GoTo 120

Branches according to the designated conditions. If M1=1 Then GoTo *L100

Else GoTo 20

End If

Repeats until the designated end conditions are satisfied. For M1=1 TO 10

Next M1

Repeats while the designated conditions are satisfied. While M1<10

WEnd

Branches corresponding to the designated expression value. On M1 GoTo *La1, *Lb2, *Lc3

Executes program block corresponding to the designated expression

value..

Select

Case 1

Break

Case 2

Break

End Select

Moves the program process to the next line. Skip

Collision detection Set to enable/disable the collision detection. ColChk ON/OFF

Set the detection level of the collision detection. ColLvl 100,80,,,,,,

Subroutine Executes the designated subroutine. (Within program) GoSub *L200

Returns from the subroutine. Return

Executes the designated program. CallP "P10",M1,P1

Defines the program argument executed with the CALLP command. FPrm M10,P10

Executes the subroutine corresponding to the designated expression

value. On M1 GoSub *La1, *Lb2, *Lc3

Interrupt Defines the interrupt conditions and process. Def Act 1, M1=1 GoTo *L100

Enables/disables the interrupt. Act 1=1

Defines the start line of the program to be executed when an interrupt is

generated from the communication line. On Com(1) GoSub *L100

Enables the interrupt from the communication line. Com(1) On

Disables the interrupt from the communication line. Com(1) Off

Stops the interrupt from the communication line. Com(1) Stop

Wait Designates the wait time, and the output signal pulse output time. (0.01s

unit) Dly 0.5

Waits until the variable becomes the designated value. Wait M_In(1)=1

Stop Stops the program execution. Hlt

Generates an error. During program execution, continue, stop or servo

OFF can be designated. Error 9000

End Ends the program execution. End

H an

d Hand open Opens the designated hand. HOpen 1

Hand close Closes the designated hand. HClose 1

In p u t/

o ut

p u t Assignment Defines the input/output variables. Def IO PORT1=BIT,0

Input Retrieves the general-purpose input signal. M1=M_In(1)

Output Calls out the general-purpose output signal. M_Out(1) =0

P ar

al le

l e xe

c u ti o n

Mechanism designa- tion

Acquires the mechanism with the designated mechanism No. GetM 1

Releases the mechanism with the designated mechanism No. RelM 1

Selection Selects the designated program for the designated slot. XLoad 2,"P102"

Start/stop Carries out parallel execution of the designated program. XRun 3,"100",0

Stops parallel execution of the designated program. XStp 3

Returns the designated program's execution line to the head and enters

the program selection enabled state. XRst 3

Type Class Function Input format (example)

4-209 List of commands

4Software

O th

e rs

Definition Defines the integer type or real number type variable. Def Inte KAISUU

Defines the character string variable. Def Char MESSAGE

efines the layout variable. (Up to 3-dimensional possible) Dim PDATA(2,3)

Defines the joint variable. Def Jnt TAIHI

Defines the position variable. Def Pos TORU

Defines the function. Def FN TASU(A,B)=A+B

Clear Clears the general-purpose output signal, variables in program, variables

between programs, etc. Clr

File Opens a file. Open "COM1:" AS #1

Closes a file. Close #1

Inputs data from a file. Input# 1,M1

Outputs data to a file. Print# 1,M1

Comment Describes a comment. Rem "ABC"

Label Indicates the branching destination. *SUB1

Type Class Function Input format (example)

4Software

List of parameters 4-210

4.2 List of parameters

Show the main parameter in the Table 4-2.

Table 4-2 List of parameters

Parameter Details

Standard tool coordinates. MEXTL Set the default value for the tool data.

Unit: mm or deg.

Standard base coordinates MEXBS Set the relation of the world coordinate system and robot coordinate system.

Unit: mm or deg.

XYZ operation range MEPAR Designate the overrun limit value for the world coordinate system.

JOINT operation range MEJAR Set the overrun limit value for each joint axis.

Free plane limit This is the overrun limit set with the free plane.

Create a plane with the three coordinates x1, y1, z1 to x3, y3, z3, and set the outer side of

the plane as the outside operation range (error). The following three types of parameters are

used.

SFC1P

:

SFC8P

Eight types of free plane limits can be set in SFC1P to SFC8P.

There are nine elements, set in the order of x1, y1, z1, x2, y2, z2, x3, y3, z3.

SFC1ME

:

SFC8ME

Designate which mechanism to use eight types of set free plane limits.

The mechanism No. to use is set with 1 to 3.

SFC1AT

:

SFC8AT

Set the validity of the eight types of set free plane limits.

(Valid 1/Valid 2/invalid = 1/-1/0)

User-defined area An area (cube) defined with two XYZ coordinate points can be designated and that area set

as the outside operation range. Furthermore, a signal can be output when the axis enters

that area. Up to 32 types of area can be designated.

AREA1CS

:

AREA32CS

Specify the coordinate system of the user definition area *.

0: Base coordinate system (conventional compatibility)

1: Robot coordinate system

AREA1P1

:

AREA32P1

Designated the 1st point of the area.

There are eight elements, set in the order of x, y, z, a, b, c, L1, L2.

(L1 and L2 are the additional axes.)

AREA1P2

:

AREA32P2

Designated the 2nd point of the area.

There are eight elements, set in the order of x, y, z, a, b, c, L1, L2.

(L1 and L2 are the additional axes.)

AREA1ME

:

AREA32ME

Designate which mechanism to use the 32 types of set area.

The mechanism No. to use is set with 1 to 3.

AREA1AT

:

AREA32AT

Designate the area check type.

(Invalid/zone/interference = 0/1/2)

Zone: The dedicated output signal USRAREA turns ON.

Interference: An error occurs..

Automatic return setting RETPATH Set to restart the program after returning to the interrupt position when resuming operation

after an interruption.

Buzzer ON/OFF BZR Designate whether to the turn buzzer ON or OFF.

Jog setting JOGJSP Designate the joint jog and step operation speed.

(Set dimension H/L amount, max. override.)

JOGPSP Designate the linear jog and step operation speed.

(Set dimension H/L amount, max. override.)

Jog speed limit value JOGSPMX Limit the operation speed during the teaching mode. Max. 250[mm/s]

Hand type HANDTYPE Set the hand type of the single/double solenoid, and the signal No.

(Single/double = S/D)

Set the signal No. after the hand type. Example) D900

Stop input B contact desig- nation

INB Change the dedicated input (stop) to either of normal open or normal close.

4-211 List of parameters

4Software

User-designated origin USERORG Designate the user-designated origin position.

Program selection memory SLOTON Select the program selected previously when initializing the slot. The non-selected state will

be entered when not set.

Communication setting CBAU232 Set the baud rate.

CLEN232 Set the character length.

CPRTY232 Set the parity.

CSTOP232 Set the stop bit.

CTERM232 Set the end code.

Slot table SLT1

:

SLT32

Make settings (program name, operation type, order of priority, etc.) for each slot during slot

initialization.

No. of multi-tasks TASKMAX Designate the No. of programs to be executed simultaneously. (Max. 32)

Select the function of

singular point adjacent alarm

MESNGLS

W

Designate the valid/invalid of the singular point adjacent alarm.

Invalid/Valid 0/1

When this parameter is set up "VALID", this warning sound is buzzing even if parameter:

BZR (buzzer ON/OFF) is set up "OFF".

Display language. LNG Change the language to display on the LCD display of teaching pendant.

Parameter Details

5Instruction Manual

The details of each instruction manuals 5-212

5 Instruction Manual

5.1 The details of each instruction manuals

The contents and purposes of the documents enclosed with this product are shown below. Use these documents according to the application.

Instruction manuals enclosed in dashed lines in the list below are for optional products.

For special specifications, a separate instruction manual describing the special section may be enclosed.

Explains the common precautions and safety measures to be taken for robot handling, sys- tem design and manufacture to ensure safety of the operators involved with the robot.

Explains the product's standard specifications, factory-set special specifications, option configuration and maintenance parts, etc. Precautions for safety and technology, when incorporating the robot, are also explained.

Explains the procedures required to operate the robot arm (unpacking, transportation, installation, confirmation of operation), and the maintenance and inspection procedures.

Explains the procedures required to operate the controller (unpacking, transportation, installation, confirmation of operation), basic operation from creating the program to auto- matic operation, and the maintenance and inspection procedures.

Explains details on the functions and operations such as each function and operation, com- mands used in the program, connection with the external input/output device, and parame- ters, etc.

Explains the causes and remedies to be taken when an error occurs. Explanations are given for each error No.

Explains the specifications, functions and operations of the additional axis control.

Explains the control function and specifications of conveyor tracking

Explains the detailed description of data configuration of shared memory, monitoring, and operating procedures, about the PLC(CR750-Q/CR751-Q controller) and the GOT(CR750- D/CR751-D controller).

Safety Manual

Standard Specifications

Robot Arm Setup & Maintenance

Controller Setup, Basic Operation and Maintenance

Detailed Explanation of Functions and Operations

Troubleshooting

Additional axis function

Tracking Func- tion Manual

Extended Func- tion Instruc- tion Manual

6-213 Safety

6Safety

6 Safety

6.1 Safety

Measures to be taken regarding safety of the industrial robot are specified in the "Labor Safety and Sanitation Rules". Always follow these rules when using the robot to ensure safety.

6.1.1 Self-diagnosis stop functions This robot has the self-diagnosis stop functions shown in Table 6-1 and the stop functions shown in Table 6-2 for safe use.

Table 6-1 Self-diagnosis stop functions

Table 6-2 List of stop functions

No. Function Details Remarks

1 Overload protection func- tion

Activates when the total servo current time exceeds the specified value.

The drive circuit is shut off. The robot stops, and an alarm displays.

2 Overcurrent diagnosis function

Activates when an overcurrent flows to the motor circuit.

The drive circuit is shut off. The robot stops, and an alarm displays.

3 Encoder disconnection diagnosis function

Activates when the encoder cable is disconnected. The drive circuit is shut off. The robot stops, and an alarm displays.

4 Deflection over diagnosis function

Activates when an error occurs between the com- mand value and actual position, and the error exceeds the specified amount.

The drive circuit is shut off. The robot stops, and an alarm displays.

5 AC power voltage drop diagnosis function

Activates when the AC power voltage drops below the specified value.

The drive circuit is shut off. The robot stops, and an alarm displays.

6 CPU error detection func- tion

Activates when an error occurs in the CPU. The drive circuit is shut off. The robot stops, and an alarm displays.

7 Overrun prevention function

Software limit detection

This is the limit provided by the software to enable operation only in the operation range.

The drive circuit is shut off. The robot stops, and an alarm displays.

Mechanical stopper

This is the mechanical stopper provided outside the software.

The robot mechanically stops, and function 1 or 2 activates.

Stop function

Operation panel Note1)

Note1) Only CR750 controller has operation panel.

Teaching pendant

External input Details

Emergency stop

This is the stop with the highest degree of emergency. The servo power is shut off, and the mechanical brakes (all axes) activate to stop the robot. To recover, reset the alarm, and turn the servo ON with the servo ON command.

Stop

This is a stop operation with a high degree of emergency. The robot immediately decelerates and stops. Note that the servo power is not shut off. Use this when using the collision evasion sensor, etc.

6Safety

Safety 6-214

6.1.2 External input/output signals that can be used for safety protection measures

Table 6-3 External input/output signals that can be used for safety protection measures

6.1.3 Precautions for using robot The safety measures for using the robot are specified in the "Labor Safety and Sanitation Rules". An outline of the rules is given below.

(1) Robot installation Secure sufficient work space required to safely perform work such as teaching and maintenance related to the

robot. Install the controller outside the robot's motion space. (If a safety fence is provided, install outside the fence.) Install the controller where the entire robot operation can be viewed. Install display lamps, etc., to indicate the robot's operation state. Securely fix the robot arm onto the fixing table with the designated bolts.

(2) Prevention of contact with operator Install a safety fence or enclosure so that the operator cannot easily enter the robot's motion space. Install an interlock function that will stop the robot if the safety fence or enclosure door is opened.

(3) Work procedures Create and observe work procedures for the robot teaching, operation, inspection and emergencies. Create hand signals to be followed when several operators are working together. Create displays such as "Teaching in Progress" and "Inspection in Progress" to be put up when an operator is

in the robot's motion space so that other operators will not operate the operation panel (controller, control panel).

(4) Training Train the operators about the operations, maintenance and safety required for the robot work.

Signal Connection

point Parameter Functions Usage method

In pu

t

External emer- gency stop Note1)

Note1) The external emergency stop input is prepared as a normal close for safety proposes. Thus, if the emergency stop input circuit is opened when the robot is started up, the robot will not operate. Refer to Page 216, "6.1.7 Exam- ples of safety measures"for details. And, refer to Page 155, "(3) Automatic Operation/Jog Operation/Brake Release and Necessary Switch Set- tings"for the function of the door switch input and the enabling device input.

Connector (CR750 controller: CNSUSR11/12) (CR751 controller: CNSUSR1)

- This servo power is shut off, and the

robot stops immediately.

Externally installed emergency stop switch.

Door switch on safety protection fence.

Stopping at high-level error occurrence.

Door switch - The door switch of the safe protection

fence

Enabling device

input

- Enabling device.

The safety switch during teaching work

Stop Parallel I/O unit

or interface

STOP The program execution is stopped, and

the robot stops. The servo power is not

shut off.

The robot is stopped when a peripheral

device fault occurs. The servo power is

not shut off.

Servo OFF SRVOFF The servo power can be shut off. The robot is stopped when a peripheral

device fault occurs. The servo power is

not shut off.

Automatic oper- ation enable

AUTOENA Disables automatic operation when inac- tive.

Door switch on safety protection fence

O u tp

u t

Emergency stop output

Connector (CR750 controller: CNSUSR11/12) (CR751 controller: CNSUSR1)

- Outputs the input signal of external emergency stop or emergency stop switch of T/B turned on.

Display and warn the pilot lamp, the input signal of external emergency stop or the emergency stop switch of T/B turned on.

In servo ON Parallel I/O unit or interface

SRVON The servo power ON/OFF state is out- put.

The servo power ON/OFF state is shown and alerted with the display lamps.

Waiting STOP Outputs that the robot is temporarily stopped.

The temporary stop state is shown and alerted with the display lamps.

In alarm Connector (CR750/CR751 controllerdrive unit: CNUSR2)

ERRRESET Outputs when an alarm occurs in the robot.

The alarm state is shown and alerted with the display lamps.

-

6-215 Safety

6Safety

Only trained and registered operators must operate the robot. Participation in the "Special training for industrial robots" sponsored by the Labor Safety and Sanitation Com- mittee, etc., is recommended for safety training.

(5) Daily inspection and periodic inspection Always inspect the robot before starting daily operations and confirm that there are no abnormalities. Set the periodic inspection standards in view of the robot's ambient environment and operation frequency, and

perform periodic inspections. Make records when periodic inspections and repairs have been done, and store the records for three or more

years.

6.1.4 Safety measures for automatic operation (1) Install safety fences so that operators will not enter the operation area during operation and indicate that

automatic operation is in progress with lamps, etc. (2) Create signals to be given when starting operation, assign a person to give the signal, and make sure that the

operator follows the signals.

6.1.5 Safety measures for teaching Observe the following measures when teaching, etc., in the robot's operation range. (1) Specify and follow items such as procedures related to teaching work, etc. (2) Take measures so that operation can be stopped immediately in case of trouble, and measures so that oper-

ation can be restarted. (3) Take measures with the robot start switch, etc., to indicate that teaching work is being done. (4) Always inspect that stop functions such as the emergency stop device before starting the work. (5) Immediately stop the work when trouble occurs, and correct the trouble. (6) Take measures so that the work supervisor can immediately stop the robot operation when trouble occurs. (7) The teaching operator must have completed special training regarding safety. (Training regarding industrial

robots and work methods, etc.) (8) Create signals to be used when several operators are working together.

6.1.6 Safety measures for maintenance and inspections, etc. Turn the power OFF and take measures to prevent operators other than the relevant operator from pressing the start switch when performing inspections, repairs, adjustments, cleaning or oiling. If operation is required, take measures to prevent hazards caused by unintentional or mistaken operations. (1) Specify and follow items such as procedures related to maintenance work, etc. (2) Take measures so that operation can be stopped immediately in case of trouble, and measures so that oper-

ation can be restarted. (3) Take measures with the robot start switch, etc., to indicate that work is being done. (4) Take measures so that the work supervisor can immediately stop the robot operation when trouble occurs. (5) The operator must have completed special training regarding safety. (Training regarding industrial robots and

work methods, etc.) (6) Create signals to be used when several operators are working together.

6Safety

Safety 6-216

6.1.7 Examples of safety measures The controller's dedicated I/O terminal connector has a duplicate emergency stop circuit. Create a circuit as shown below for safety measures. In addition, the figure shows the normal state which is not in the emergency stop state. [Caution] Since we have omitted the information in part because of explanation, there is the section different

from the product. Also refer to Page 226, "(3) External emergency stop connection [supplementary explanation]".

[Note] In the emergency-stop related wiring by the customer, if the coil (is not the contact points) of the relay prepared by the customer is connected to the controller, please be sure to implement the measure against the noise by the customer in the coil section. And, please also take the lifetime of noise suppres- sion parts into consideration.

Electric specification of the emergency-stop-related output terminal: 100mA/24V or less In the customer's system, do not ground the + side of 24V power supply prepared by customer for con-

nect to the controller. (related with emergency stop and parallel input/output) If it connects with the controller under the condition that the + side is grounded, it will lead to failure of controller.

(1) CR750 controller

Fig.6-1 Example of safety measures CR750 wiring example 1

*6) OP emergency stop switch

*3) TB emergency stop switch

Power supply in the robot controller 24V

10F

*1) CNUSR11/CNUSR12

*2) CNUSR2

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

13

14

11

12

41/42

16/17

1

Input detection

circuit

Safety relay

Internal emergency stop circuit

Short circuit (Short-circuited)

Short circuit (Short-circuited)

Mode output

Error output

Door switch input

*5) Enabling device

Safety fence door

Emergency stop switch (2-contact type)

Peripheral equipment

*7)

*4)

Emergency stop output

: Connect the emergency stop switch of peripheral equipment to the controller. The power supply for emergency stop input uses the power supply in the controller.

If the emergency stop switch of peripheral equipment is pushed, the robot will also be in the emergency stop state.

Controller

*3) The T/B emergency stop switch connected with the controller. *4) Emergency stop input relay. *5) Refer to the Standard specification manual or Special specification manualfor the enabling device. *6) The emergency stop switch of the robot controller. (Only specification with the operation panel.) *7) The emergency stop input detection relay is used the controllers internal safety relay control. If the

emergency stop input detection relay is switched OFF, emergency stop is detected and the safety relay is also switched OFF.

*1) Each of the connectors, CNUSR11 and CNUSR12, are assigned with the same pin number, creating two systems for each terminal. It is absolutely necessary to connect the two systems.

*2) You can see in the diagram that connector CNUSR2 has two terminals and two systems (16/ 17 indicates two terminals at pin number 16 and pin number 17). It is absolutely necessary to connect the two systems.

6-217 Safety

6Safety

Fig.6-2 Example of safety measures (CR750 wiring example 2

*6) OP emergency stop switch

*3) TB emergency stop switch

Power supply in the robot controller 24V

10F

*1) CNUSR11/CNUSR12

*2) CNUSR2

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

13

14

11

12

41/42

16/17

1

Input detection

circuit

Safety relay

Internal emergency stop circuit

Not connected

Emergency stop output

Mode output

Error output

Door switch input

*5) Enabling device

Safety fence door

Emergency stop switch (2-contact type)

Peripheral equipment

*7)

*4)

Power supply in the peripheral equipment 24V

*1) Each of the connectors, CNUSR11 and CNUSR12, are assigned with the same pin number, creating 2 systems in each terminal. It is absolutely necessary to connect the 2 systems.

*2) You can see in the diagram that connector CNUSR2 has 2 terminals and 2 systems (16/17 indicates 2 terminals at pin number 16 and pin number 17). It is absolutely necessary to connect the 2 systems.

: Connect the emergency stop switch of peripheral equipment to the controller. The power supply for emergency stop input uses the power supply of peripheral equipment.

If the emergency stop switch of peripheral equipment is pushed, the robot will also be in the emergency stop state.

*3) The T/B emergency stop switch connected with the controller. *4) Emergency stop input relay. *5) Refer to the Standard specification manual or the Special specification manual for the enabling device. *6) The emergency stop switch of the robot controller.

(Only specification with the operation panel.) *7) The emergency stop input detection relay uses the controllers internal safety relay control. If the

emergency stop input detection relay is switched OFF, emergency stop is detected and the safety relay is also switched OFF.

Controller

6Safety

Safety 6-218

Fig.6-3 Example of safety measures (CR750 wiring example 3

*6) OP emergency stop switch

*3) TB emergency stop switch

Power supply in the robot controller 24V

10F

Input detection

circuit

Safety relay

Internal emergency stop circuit

Not connected

Emergency stop output

Mode output

Error output

Door switch input

*5) Enabling device

Safety fence door

Emergency stop switch (2-contact type)

Peripheral equipment

*7)

*4)

Circuit

Monitor

Monitor

*1) CNUSR11/CNUSR12

*2) CNUSR2

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

13

14

11

12

41/42

16/17

1 Power supply 24V

: Connect the emergency stop switch, door switch, and enabling device of peripheral equipment to the con- troller. The power supply for emergency stop input uses the power supply of peripheral equipment. Monitor the emergency stop state by the peripheral equipment side.

If the emergency stop switch of peripheral equipment is pushed, the robot will also be in the emergency stop state. And, if the emergency stop switch of OP or T/B is pushed in the state of the power of con- troller OFF, peripheral equipment state can be the emergency stop also.

Controller

*1) Each of the connectors, CNUSR11 and CNUSR12, are assigned with the same pin number, creating 2 systems in each terminal. It is absolutely necessary to connect the 2 systems.

*2) You can see in the diagram that connector CNUSR2 has 2 terminals and 2 systems (16/17 indicates 2 terminals at pin number 16 and pin number 17). It is absolutely necessary to connect the 2 systems.

*3)The T/B emergency stop switch connected with the controller. *4) Emergency stop input relay. *5) Refer to the Standard specification manual or the Special specification manual for the enabling device. *6) The emergency stop switch of the robot controller.

(Only specification with the operation panel.) *7) The emergency stop input detection relay uses the controllers internal safety relay control. If the

emergency stop input detection relay is switched OFF, emergency stop is detected and the safety relay is also switched OFF.

6-219 Safety

6Safety

Fig.6-4 Example of safety measures (CR750 wiring example 4

*6) OP emergency stop switch

*3) TB emergency stop switch

Power supply in the robot controller 24V

10F

Input detection

circuit

Safety relay

Internal emergency stop circuit

Not connected

Emergency stop output

Mode output

Error output

Door switch input

Door switch output

*5) Enabling device Safety fence

door

Emergency stop switch (4-contact type)

Peripheral equipment

*7)

*4) Circuit

Monitor

Monitor

Monitor

Power supply 24V

*1) CNUSR11/CNUSR12

*2) CNUSR2

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

13

14

11

12

41/42

16/17

1

*6) OP emergency stop switch

*3) TB emergency stop switch

Power supply in the robot controller 24V

10F

Input detection

circuit

Safety relay

Internal emergency stop circuit

Not connected

Emergency stop output

Mode output

Error output

Door switch input

*5) Enabling device

*7)

*4)

*1) CNUSR11/CNUSR12

*2) CNUSR2

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

13

14

11

12

41/42

16/17

1 Emergency stop output of peripheral equipment

Emergency stop output of peripheral equipment

Controller #1

*5) Refer to the Standard specification manual or the Special specification manual for the enabling device. *6) The emergency stop switch of the robot controller. (Only specification with the operation panel.) *7) The emergency stop input detection relay uses the controllers internal safety relay control. If the emergency stop input detection relay is

switched OFF, emergency stop is detected and the safety relay is also switched OFF.

: Connect the emergency stop switch of peripheral equipment, and the door switch to two controllers, and it interlocks. Connect the enabling device to the robot controller.The power supply for emergency stop input uses the power supply of peripheral equipment. Monitor the emergency stop state by the peripheral equipment side.

If the emergency stop switch of peripheral equipment is pushed, the robot will also be in the emergency stop state. And, if the emergency stop switch of OP or T/B is pushed in the state of the power of con- troller OFF, peripheral equipment state can be the emergency stop also.

Controller #2

*1) Each of the connectors, CNUSR11 and CNUSR12, are assigned with the same pin number, creating 2 systems in each terminal. It is absolutely necessary to connect the 2 systems. If necessary to stop two robots simultaneously by one emergencystop switch please use the 4 contact type emergency stop switch.

*2) You can see in the diagram that connector CNUSR2 has 2 terminals and 2 systems (16/17 indicates 2 terminals at pin number 16 and pin number 17). It is absolutely necessary to connect the 2 systems.

*3) The T/B emergency stop switch connected with the controller. *4) Emergency stop input relay.

6Safety

Safety 6-220

Fig.6-5 Example of safety measures (CR750 wiring example 5

OP E-stop

1

2

3

4

5

6

CNUSR11

TB E-stop

24G

1

2

3

4

5

6 24G

X0

COM0

X1

COM1

No connection

No connection

1

2

24V DC 24G

QS90SR2SP ( )

DC 24V

+24V 24G

24V DC

13

14

24V DC

24V DC

13

14

24V DC

CNUSR12

No connection

No connection

10F

10F

Controller

Safety relay

: Connect the controller to the safety relay Use the controllers emergency stop switch command as an input to the safety relay.

Internal relay

Emergency stop output

Internal relay

External emergency stop switch

External emergency stop switch

Emergency stop output

Customer equipment

Safety relay

ex) QS90SR2SP (Mitsubishi

Electric Corporation)

Safety input 1

Customer Power Supply (DC 24V)

[Caution]

1) This product has category 3 functionality and therefore the robots whole unit cannot be set to category 4. 2) The controllers internal circuit has polarity. Please adhere to the polarity as detailed in the wiring examples,

particularly for emergency stop switch output when using user equipment. Connect the positive side of the user equipment (24V DC) to the terminal 2 of CNUSR11/12, then connect the emergency stop switch (or contact points) in the user equipment to across the terminals 3 and 4 of CNUSR11/12, and ultimately con- nect the negative side (24G).

3) When installing a safety relay to use it as an input point of the controller's emergency stop switch command, use a safety relay that is activated by an input from one of the two systems (i.e. QS90SR2SP (Manufacture: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation)).

4) The emergency stop input detection relay (internal relay) uses the controllers internal safety relay control. If the emergency stop input detection relay is switched OFF, emergency stop is detected and the safety relay is also switched OFF.

5) When connecting emergency stop switch output to an external safety relay, please take note of the polarity and make sure that the electrical current flows in the same direction as indicated by the dotted arrows in the two places in the diagram. If the polarity is setup incorrectly, this function will not operate correctly. Please connect the terminal 13 of CNUSR11/12 to 24V.

Safety input 2

Input detection

circuit

Input detection

circuit

6-221 Safety

6Safety

(2) CR751 controller

Fig.6-6 Example of safety measures (CR751 wiring example 1)

*2) TB emergency stop switch

Power supply in the robot controller 24V

10F

Input detection

circuit

Safety relay

Internal emergency stop circuit

Short circuit (Short-circuited)

Short circuit (Short-circuited)

Mode output

Error output

Door switch input

*4) Enabling device

Safety fence door

Emergency stop switch (2-contact type)

Peripheral equipment

*5)

*3)

Emergency stop output

*1) CNUSR1

*1) CNUSR2

26/31

2/ 7

27/32

3 /8

28/33

4/ 9

29/34

5/10

30/35

20/19

45/44

18/17

43/42

41/42

16/17

1/ 6

: Connect the emergency stop switch of peripheral equipment to the controller. The power supply for emergency stop input uses the power supply in the controller.

If the emergency stop switch of peripheral equipment is pushed, the robot will also be in the emergency stop state.

Controller

*1) Each of the connectors, CNUSR1 and CNUSR2, are assigned with the same pin number, creating 2 systems in each terminal. It is absolutely necessary to connect the 2 systems.

*2) The T/B emergency stop switch connected with the controller. *3) Emergency stop input relay. *4) Refer to the Standard specification manual or the Special specification manual for the enabling device. *5) The emergency stop input detection relay uses the controllers internal safety relay control. If the

emergency stop input detection relay is switched OFF, emergency stop is detected and the safety relay is also switched OFF.

6Safety

Safety 6-222

Fig.6-7 Example of safety measures (CR751 wiring example 2)

*2) TB emergency stop switch

Power supply in the robot controller 24V

10F

Input detection

circuit

Safety relay

Internal emergency stop circuit

*6) Not connected

Mode output

Error output

Door switch input

*4) Enabling device

Safety fence door

Emergency stop switch (2-contact type)

Peripheral equipment

*5)

*3)

Emergency stop output

*1) CNUSR1

*1) CNUSR2

26/31

2/ 7

27/32

3 /8

28/33

4/ 9

29/34

5/10

30/35

20/19

45/44

18/17

43/42

41/42

16/17

1/ 6

Power supply in the peripheral equipment 24V

: Connect the emergency stop switch of peripheral equipment to the controller. The power supply for emergency stop input uses the power supply of peripheral equipment.

If the emergency stop switch of peripheral equipment is pushed, the robot will also be in the emergency stop state.

Controller

*1) Each of the connectors, CNUSR1 and CNUSR2, are assigned with the same pin number, creating 2 systems in each terminal. It is absolutely necessary to connect the 2 systems.

*2) The T/B emergency stop switch connected with the controller. *3) Emergency stop input relay. *4) Refer to the Standard specification manual or the Special specification manual for the enabling device. *5) The emergency stop input detection relay uses the controllers internal safety relay control. If the

emergency stop input detection relay is switched OFF, emergency stop is detected and the safety relay is also switched OFF.

*6) Connect the 24V power supply to 26/31 terminals.

6-223 Safety

6Safety

Fig.6-8 Example of safety measures (CR751 wiring example 3)

*2) TB emergency stop switch

Power supply in the robot controller 24V

10F

Input detection

circuit

Safety relay

Internal emergency stop circuit

*6) Not connected

Mode output

Error output

Door switch input

*4) Enabling device

Safety fence door

Emergency stop switch (2-contact type)

Peripheral equipment

*5)

*3)

Emergency stop output

Power supply 24V

*1) CNUSR1

*1) CNUSR2

26/31

2/ 7

27/32

3 /8

28/33

4/ 9

29/34

5/10

30/35

20/19

45/44

18/17

43/42

41/42

16/17

1/ 6

Circuit

Monitor

Monitor

Controller

*4) Refer to the Standard specification manual or the Special specification manual for the enabling device. *5) The emergency stop input detection relay uses the controllers internal safety relay control. If the emergency stop

input detection relay is switched OFF, emergency stop is detected and the safety relay is also switched OFF. *6) When using emergency stop switch output function, please take note of the polarity and make sure that the

electrical current flows in the same direction as indicated by the dotted arrows in the two places in the diagram. If the polarity of the circuit is wrong, the emergency stop switch output may not work properly. Please connect the 24V power supply to 26/31 terminals.

: Connect the emergency stop switch, door switch, and enabling device of peripheral equipment to the con- troller. The power supply for emergency stop input uses the power supply of peripheral equipment. Monitor the emergency stop state by the peripheral equipment side.

If the emergency stop switch of peripheral equipment is pushed, the robot will also be in the emergency stop state. And, if the emergency stop switch of OP or T/B is pushed in the state of the power of con- troller OFF, peripheral equipment state can be the emergency stop also.

*1) Each terminal assigned with the respectively same pin number as connector: CNUSR1 and CNUSR2 and each is dual line. Always connect the two lines.

*2) The T/B emergency stop switch connected with the controller.

*3) Emergency stop input relay.

6Safety

Safety 6-224

Fig.6-9 Example of safety measures (CR751 wiring example 4)

*2) TB emergency stop switch

Power supply in the robot controller 24V

10F

Input detection

circuit

Safety relay

Internal emergency stop circuit

Not connected

Emergency stop output

Mode output

Error output

Door switch input

Door switch output

*4) Enabling device Safety fence

door

Emergency stop switch (4-contact type)

Peripheral equipment

*5)

*3) Circuit

Monitor

Monitor

Power supply 24V

Emergency stop output of peripheral equipment

*1) CNUSR1

*1) CNUSR2

26/31

2/ 7

27/32

3 /8

28/33

4/ 9

29/34

5/10

30/35

20/19

45/44

18/17

43/42

41/42

16/17

1/ 6

*2) TB emergency stop switch

Power supply in the robot controller 24V

10F

Input detection

circuit

Safety relay

Internal emergency stop circuit

Not connected

Emergency stop output

Mode output

Error output

Door switch input

*4) Enabling device

*5)

*3)

Monitor

Emergency stop output of peripheral equipment

*1) CNUSR1

*1) CNUSR2

26/31

2/ 7

27/32

3 /8

28/33

4/ 9

29/34

5/10

30/35

20/19

45/44

18/17

43/42

41/42

16/17

1/ 6

Controller #1

*3) Emergency stop input relay. *4) Refer to the Standard specification manual or the Special specification manual for the enabling device. *5) The emergency stop input detection relay uses the controllers internal safety relay control. If the emergency stop input detection

relay is switched OFF, emergency stop is detected and the safety relay is also switched OFF.

: Connect the emergency stop switch of peripheral equipment, and the door switch to two controllers, and it interlocks. Connect the enabling device to the robot controller.The power supply for emergency stop input uses the power supply of peripheral equipment. Monitor the emergency stop state by the peripheral equipment side.

If the emergency stop switch of peripheral equipment is pushed, the robot will also be in the emergency stop state. And, if the emergency stop switch of OP or T/B is pushed in the state of the power of con- troller OFF, peripheral equipment state can be the emergency stop also.

Controller #2

*1) Each of the connectors, CNUSR1 and CNUSR2, are assigned with the same pin number, creating 2 systems in each terminal. It is absolutely necessary to connect the 2 systems. If necessary to stop two robots simultaneously by one emergencystop switch please use the 4 contact type emergency stop switch.

*2) The T/B emergency stop switch connected with the controller.

6-225 Safety

6Safety

Fig.6-10 Example of safety measures (CR751 wiring example 5)

1

26

2

27

3

28

CNUSR1

TB E-stop

24G

6

31

7

32

8

33 24G

X0

COM0

X1

COM1

No connection

No connection

1

2

24V DC 24G

DC 24V

+24V 24G

24V DC

20

45

24V DC

24V DC

19

44

24V DC

No connection

No connection

QS90SR2SP ( )

10F

10F

Controller

: Connect the controller to the safety relay Use the controllers emergency stop switch to input safety relay.

Safety relay

Internal relay

Emergency stop output

External emergency stop switch

Customer equipment

Safety relay

Customer Power Supply (DC 24V)

Internal relay

Emergency stop output

External emergency stop switch

[Caution]

1) This product has category 3 functionality and therefore the robots whole unit cannot be set to category 4. 2) The controllers internal circuit has polarity. Please adhere to the polarity as detailed in the wiring examples,

particularly for emergency stop switch output when using user equipment. Connect the positive side of the user equipment (24V DC) to the two terminals 26/31, then connect the emergency stop switch (or contact points) in the user equipment to the 2-27 and 7-32 terminals, and ultimately connect to the negative side (24G).

3) Setup a safety relay on the user equipment, and when using to input the emergency stop switch on the con- troller, please only use a safety relay that functions when connecting the input to the one end of the 2 sys- tems (i.e. QS90SR2SP (Manufacture: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation)).

4) The emergency stop input detection relay (internal relay) uses the controllers internal safety relay control. If the emergency stop input detection relay is switched OFF, emergency stop is detected and the safety relay is also switched OFF.

5) When connecting emergency stop switch output to an exterior safety relay, please take note of the polarity and make sure that the electrical current flows in the same direction as indicated by the dotted arrows in the two places in the diagram. If the polarity is setup incorrectly this function will not operate correctly. Please connect 20/19 terminal to 24V.

ex) 0SR2SP (Mitsubishi

Electric Corporation)

Safety input 1

Safety input 2

Input detection

circuit

Input detection

circuit

6Safety

Safety 6-226

(3) External emergency stop connection [supplementary explanation]

(1) Use a 2-contact type switch for all switches. (2) Install a limit switch on the safety fence's door. With a constantly open contact (normal open), wire to the

door switch input terminal so that the switch turns ON (is conducted) when the door is closed, and turns OFF (is opened) when the door is open.

(3) Use a manual-return type of normal close which have two lines for the emergency stop switch. (4) Classify the faults into minor faults (faults that are easily restored and that do not have a great effect) and

major faults (faults that cause the entire system to stop immediately, and that require care in restoration), and wire accordingly.

[Caution] The emergency stop input (terminal block) on the user wiring in the controller can be used for safety measures as shown in figure above. Note that there are limits to the No. of switch contacts, capacity and cable length, so refer to the following and install.

Switch contact ..........................Prepare a 2-contact type.*1)

Switch contact capacity........Use a normal open contact that operates with a switch contact

capacity of approx. 1mA to 100mA/24V. *1)

If you connect the relay etc., rated current of the coil should use the relay which is 100mA/24V or less. (Refer to Fig. 6-12, Fig. 6-11)

Cable length................................The length of the wire between the switch and terminal block must be max. 15m or less. Please use the shield line, in case of the cable may receive the noise etc. by other equipment, such as servo amplifier. And, since the ferrite core is attached as noise measures parts, please utilize. The size of the wire that fits to use is shown below. CR750 controller................................... CNUSR11/12/13 connector:

AWG #26 to #16 (0.14mm2 to 1.5mm2) CR750 controller................................... CNUSR2 connector:

AWG #30 to #24 (0.05mm2 to 0.2mm2) CR751 controller................................... CNUSR1/2 connector:

AWG #30 to #24 (0.05mm2 to 0.2mm2) Electric specification of the emergency stop related output circuit is 100mA/24V or less. Don't connect the equipment except for this range.

*1) The minimum load electric current of the switch is more than 5mA/24V.

6-227 Safety

6Safety

Fig.6-11 Limitations when connecting the relay etc. (CR750)

Fig.6-12 Limitations when connecting the relay etc. (CR751)

24V

Power supply in the robot controller

10F

Input detection

circuit

Safety relay

Internal emergency stop circuit

Not connected

Emergency stop output

Mode output

Error output

Door switch input

Safety fence door

Emergency stop switch (2-contact type)

Peripheral equipment

Power supply 24V

OP emergency stop switch

TB emergency stop switch

CNUSR11/12

CNUSR2

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

13

14

11

12

41/42

16/17

1

Enabling device

Robot controller

Circuit

F1

F2

Monitor

Monitor

Relay Rated-current is 100mA or less

Internal fuse

Note)

The electric-current value limitation when connecting the coils, such as the Relays (CR750 controller)

Note) If you connect the relay etc., rated current of the coil

should use the relay which is 100mA/24V or less.

If the electric current of the further flows, internal fuse 1

may cut. And, although the example of the connection

which uses the external power source is shown in the

figure, if the coil is connected using the internal power

supply of the robot controller, internal fuse 2 may cut.

24V

Power supply in the robot controller

10F

Input detection

circuit

Safety relay

Internal emergency stop circuit

Not connected

Emergency stop output

Mode output

Error output

Door switch input

Safety fence door

Emergency stop switch (2-contact type)

Peripheral equipment

Power supply 24V

TB emergency stop switch

Enabling device

Robot controller

Circuit

F1

F2

Monitor

Monitor

Relay Rated-current is 100mA or less

Internal fuse

Note)

CNUSR1

CNUSR2

26/31

2/ 7

27/32

3 /8

28/33

4/ 9

29/34

5/10

30/35

20/19

45/44

18/17

43/42

41/42

16/17

1/ 6

The electric-current value limitation when connecting the coils, such as the Relays (CR751 controller)

Note) If you connect the relay etc., rated current of the coil

should use the relay which is 100mA/24V or less.

If the electric current of the further flows, internal fuse 1

may cut. And, although the example of the connection

which uses the external power source is shown in the

figure, if the coil is connected using the internal power

supply of the robot controller, internal fuse 2 may cut.

6Safety

Safety 6-228

[Supplementary explanation regarding emergency stop circuit] The controllers internal circuit is as shown in the below diagram. Be sure to build a circuit that properly

shuts off the emergency stop detection relay when the emergency stop switch is pressed.

Fig.6-13 Internal circuit of controller

Be sure to perform wiring correctly. If there are mistakes in the wiring, the robot may not stop when the emergency stop switch is pressed and there will be a risk of damage or personal injury occurring. After wiring, be sure to press each of the installed emergency stop switches and check whether the emergency stop circuit works properly.

Be sure to duplicate connection of the emergency stop, door switch and enabling switch. If not duplicated, these functions may fail due to a broken relay used by customer, etc.

OP

24V DCTB

+

-

OP

TB

24G

Safety relay

Input

Emergency stop detection relay

TB emergency stop

OP emergency stop

OP emergency stop detection

TB emergency stop detection

External emergency stop detection

CAUTION

CAUTION

6-229 Working environment

6Safety

6.2 Working environment

Avoid installation in the following places as the equipment's life and operation will be affected by the ambient environment conditions. When using in the following conditions, the customer must pay special attention to the preventive measures.

(1) Power supply Where the voltage fluctuation will exceed the input voltage range. Where a momentary power failure exceeding 20ms may occur. Where the power capacity cannot be sufficiently secured.

Please use the controller with an input power supply voltage fluctuation rate of 10% or less. In the case of 200 VAC input, for example, if the controller is used with 180 VAC during the day and 220 VAC during the night, turn the servo off once and then on again.

If this is not performed, an excessive regeneration or overvoltage error may occur.

(2) Noise Where a surge voltage exceeding 2000V, 5kHz (equivalent to EN61000-4-4) may be applied on the primary volt- age. Near large inverters, high output frequency oscillator, large contactors and welding machines. Static noise may enter the lines when this product is used near radios or televisions. Keep the robot away from these items.

(3) Temperature and humidity Where the atmospheric temperature exceeds 40 degree , lower than 0 degree. Where the relative humidity exceeds 85%, lower than 45%, and where dew may condense. Where the robot will be subject to direct sunlight or near heat generating sources such as heaters.

(4) Vibration Where excessive vibration or impact may be applied. (Use in an environment of 34m/s2 or less during transpor- tation and 5m/s2 or less during operation.)

(5) Installation environment Where strong electric fields or magnetic fields are generated. Where the installation surface is rough. (Avoid installing the robot on a bumpy or inclined floor.) Where there is heavy powder dust and oil mist present.

6.3 Precautions for handling (1) This robot has brakes on J3 axes. The precision of the robot may drop, looseness may occur and the reduction

gears may be damaged if the robot is moved with force with the brakes applied. (2) Avoid moving the robot arm by hand. When unavoidable, gradually move the arm. If moved suddenly, the accu-

racy may drop due to an excessive backlash, or the backed up data may be destroyed. (3) Note that depending on the posture, even when within the movement range, the shaft section could interfere

with the base section. Take care to prevent interference during jog. *1)

(4) The robot arm consists of precision parts such as bearing. Lubricants such as grease are also applied on the moving parts to keep the mechanical accuracy. In a cold start under low temperature or in the first start after being stored for one month or longer, lubricants may not be spread enough. Such condition may lower the positioning accuracy, cause servo and overload alarms, and early wearing of the moving parts. To avoid such situation, perform warm-up operation of the machine at a low speed (at about 20% of normal operation speed). Move the robot arm from the lower to the upper limit of the movable range with the 30 degree joint angle or more for about 10 minutes (RH-3FHR series: for about 30 minutes). After that, speed up the operation gradu- ally. Please use the warm-up operation. (About the details of the warm-up operation, refer to "INSTRUCTION MANUAL/Detailed explanations of functions and operations".)

*1) Jog operation refers to operating the robot manually using the teaching pendant.

CAUTION

6Safety

Precautions for handling 6-230

(5) When the air hoses and cables are used inside the shaft (J3 axis), the grease for cable protection may ooze out or abrasion powders may be generated from the tip of the shaft while the robot is moving. However, move- ments and performance of the robot are not affected. Wipe off the grease or powders as required.

(6) The robot arm and controller must be grounded with 100 or less (class D grounding) to secure the noise resistance and to prevent electric shocks.

(7) The items described in these specifications are conditions for carrying out the periodic maintenance and inspections described in the instruction manual.

(8) When using the robot arm on a mobile axis or elevating table, the machine cables enclosed as standard config- uration may break due to the fixed installation specifications. In this case, use "the machine cable extension (for flexed)" factory shipment special specifications or options.

(9) If this robot interferes with the workpiece or peripheral devices during operation, the position may deviate, etc. Take care to prevent interference with the workpiece or peripheral devices during operation.

(10) Do not attach a tape or a label to the robot arm and the controller. If a tape or a label with strong adhesive power, such as a packaging tape, is attached to the coated surfaces of the robot arm and controller, the coated surface may be damaged when such tape or label is peeled off.

(11) If the robot is operated with a heavy load and at a high speed, the surface of the robot arm gets very hot. It would not result in burns, however, it may cause secondary accidents if touched carelessly.

(12) Do not shut down the input power supply to stop the robot. If the power supply is frequently shut down during a heavy load or high-speed operation, the speed reducer may be damaged, backlash may occur, and the pro- gram data may be destroyed.

(13) During the robot's automatic operation, a break is applied to the robot arm when the input power supply is shut down by a power failure, for instance. When a break is applied, the arm may deviate from the operation path predetermined by automatic operation and, as a result, it may interfere with the mechanical stopper depending on the operation at shutdown. In such a case, take an appropriate measure in advance to prevent any dangerous situation from occurring due to the interference between the arm and peripheral devices. Example) Installing a UPS (uninterruptible power supply unit) to the primary power source in order to reduce

interference.

(14) Do not conduct an insulated voltage test. If conducted by mistake, it may result in a breakdown. (15) Fretting may occur on the axis which moving angle or moving distance move minutely, or not moves. Fretting

is that the required oil film becomes hard to be formed if the moving angle is small, and wear occurs. The axis which not moved is moving slightly by vibration etc. To make no fretting recommends to move these axes about once every day the 30 degree or more, or the 20mm or more.

(16) The United Nations Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods must be observed for trans- border transportation of lithium batteries by air, sea, and land. The lithium batteries (ER6V, Q6BAT) used in Mitsubishi industrial robots contain lithium and fall under the definition. When the lithium batteries are shipped for storage, etc., they will be classified as Class 9: Miscellaneous dan- gerous substances and articles. Please contact your transportation company and must provide appropriate transport safety measures as the customers consignor.

(17) If the air supply temperature (primary piping) used for the tool etc. is lower than ambient air temperature, the dew condensation may occur on the coupling or the hose surface.

(18) Collision detection function is valid condition for both of automatic and jog operation at shipping. So, the robot stops immediately if the robot's tool or arm interferes with a peripheral device, minimizing dam- age. Therefore, please use in the valid condition.

(19) When fumigants that contain halogen materials such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine are used for dis- infecting and protecting wooden packaging from insects, they cause malfunction when entering our products. Please take necessary precautions to ensure that remaining materials from fumigant do not enter our prod- ucts, or treat packaging with methods other than fumigation (heat method). Additionally, disinfect and protect wood from insects before packing products.

6-231 EMC installation guideline

6Safety

6.4 EMC installation guideline

6.4.1 Outlines Industrial robots are one of the components of automation systems as well as main components. This section introduces methods and parts to ensure electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) in automation systems.

We test for EMC in the environment described in this manual, but the noise level varies depending on device types, layout, control panel structure, and wiring, etc. Please make final checks for EMC.

6.4.2 EMC This technical standard regulates the following two items.

(1) Emission (EMI Electromagnetic Interference) ............. The capacity not to generate the disturbance noise which has a bad influence outside.

(2) Immunity (EMS Electromagnetic Susceptibility)......... The capacity which does not malfunction for the dis- turbance noise from the outside.

Each contents are shown below.

Item Name Contents Testing technical-

standard number

Emission

(EMI)

Radiative noise disturbance The electromagnetic noise etc. which are emitted to

environs.

EN61000-6-2 2005

EN61000-6-4 2007

EN62061:2005(Annex E) Electrical-conduction noise disturbance The electromagnetism noise etc. which flow out of

the power-supply line.

Immunity

(EMS)

Electrostatic discharge immunity test The noise from the electrified human body.

Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic

field immunity test susceptibility test

The electromagnetism noise from the transceiver,

the broadcasting station, etc.

Electrical fast transient burst immunity

test

The relay noise or the electromagnetism noise etc.

which are caused in power-supply ON/OFF.

Immunity to conducted distrurbances

induced radio-frequency fields

The electromagnetism noise etc. which flow in

through the power source wire and the grounding

wire.

Power frequency magnetic field immunity

test

The electromagnetism noise with a power supply

frequency of 50/60 Hz etc.

Voltage dips, short interruptions and

voltage variations immunity test

The noise in the variation of the source voltage of

the power dispatching, etc.

Surge immunity test The electromagnetism noise by the thunderbolt, etc.

6Safety

EMC installation guideline 6-232

6.4.3 EMC measures There are mainly following items in the EMC measures.

(1) Store into the sealed metal board. (2) Grounding all the conductor that have floated electrically (makes the impedance low). (3) Wiring so that the power source wire and signal wire are separated. (4) Use the shield cable for the cable which wired outside of the metal board. (5) Install the noise filter.

To suppress the noise emitted out of the board, be careful of the following item.

(1) Ensure grounding of the equipment. (2) Use the shield cable. (3) Separate the metal board electrically. Narrows the distance/hole.

The strength of electromagnetic noise emitted to environment is changed a lot by the shielding efficiency of cable and the distance of metal board, so it should be careful.

6.4.4 Component parts for EMC measures (1) Ferrite core

The ferrite core is mounted by the plastics case as one. It can attach by the one-touch, without cutting the cable. This has the effect in the common-mode noise. The measures against the noise are made not influential in the quality of the signal.

There are the following as an example.

(2) Line noise filter Type FR-BLF Mitsubishi Electric Corp.

Maker: SEIWA ELECTRIC MFG. Co.,Ltd.

Type

Outside dimension (mm) Diameter of the

adaptation cable

[max] (mm)A B C D

E04SR401938 61 38 19 40 19.0

E04SR301334 39 34 13 30 13.0

Maker: TAKACHI ELECTRONICS ENCLOSURE CO., LTD.

Type

Outside dimension (mm) Diameter of the

adaptation cable

[max] (mm)A B C D

TFT-274015S 43.8 27.4 20.7 - 26.5

Appendix-233 Classification of functions using external input/output signals

7Appendix

7 Appendix

Appendix 1 Classification of functions using external input/output signals

Before using the functions, note the following.

Table 7-1 Classification of functions using external input/output signals

Classification Function Description

Safety signal Emergency stop input Detects emergency stop inputs.

This function meets the requirements of category 3 and PL d.

Door switch input Receives the status of the switch installed on the door of the safety fence to

detect the opening of the door.

Enabling device input This function checks the state of the switch on the enabling device.

Non-safety signal Mode changeover switch input Switches the controller mode between MANUAL and AUTOMATIC.

Emergency stop output Monitors whether the robot is in the emergency stop state.

Mode output Monitors whether the robot operates in MANUAL or AUTOMATIC mode.

Robot error output Monitors the error status of the robot.

Magnet contactor control

connector output for addition

axes

Synchronizes the state of the additional axes (servo ON/OFF) with that of the

robot arm.

For details, refer to Page 163, "3.9 Magnet contactor control connector output

(AXMC) for addition axes".

7Appendix

Origin position adjustment of J2 axis Appendix-234

Appendix 2 Origin position adjustment of J2 axis

When a calculated point is used for a robot's work point, the accuracy of J2 axis is important. This paragraph "Appendix 2 Origin position adjustment of J2 axis" gives the details of an origin position adjustment by the con- figuration flag (RIGHT/LEFT).

Fig.7-1 Origin position adjustment

For the origin position adjustment, a reference point is an axis center of a shaft. When a center of the hand is off- set from a center of the shaft, the hand must be removed before the origin position adjustment.

Origin position adjustment procedure

1) Designate any point as an origin position.

2) Match the center of the shaft with the origin position in a right hand coordinate system.

3) Perform teaching work to the joint variables JR.

4) Match the center of the shaft with the origin position in a left hand coordinate system.

5) Perform teaching work to the joint variables JL.

6) Execute the following commands in the order presented.

7) Move J2 axis to 0 degrees, and check the robot position.

MDJNT_J2=(JR.J2+JL.J2)/2

JDJNT_Data=(0,0,0,0,0,0)

JDJNT_Data.J2=JDJNT_Data.J2-(MDJNT_J2)

PrmWrite 1,"DJNT",JDJNT_Data

After the origin position adjustment, an adjusted value is stored in the parameter DJNT.

For another origin position adjustment with retaining an earlier adjusted value after the first adjustment is finished, change "JDJNT_- Data=(0,0,0,0,0,0)" into "PrmRead 1,"DJNT",JDJNT_Data" before command execution.

As a repeat of command execution causes an accumulation of the adjusted values, clear the parameter DJNT back to 0 before another

origin position adjustment.

Appendix-235 Specifications discussion material (RH-6FH series: Floor installation type)

7Appendix

Appendix 3 Specifications discussion material (RH-6FH series: Floor installation type)

Customer information

Purchased model

Shipping special specifications

Options (Installable after shipment)

Maintenance parts (Consumable parts)

Company name Name

Address Telephone

Item Type Arm length Stroke Controller

General specification RH-6FH -D 350 450 550 200 340

CR750-06HD-1

RH-6FH -1D CR751-06HD-0

Clean specification RH-6FH C-D 350 450 550 200 340

CR750-06HD-1

RH-6FH C-1D CR751-06HD-0

Oil mist specification RH-6FH M-D 350 450 550 200 340

CR750-06HD-1

RH-6FH M-1D CR751-06HD-0

Item Standard specification Special shipping specifications

Robot arm Machine cable 5m fixed type 2m fixed type: 1S-02UCBL-01 (For CR750 controller) 1F-02UCBL-02 (For CR751 controller)

CE Marking specification Not conforming with EMC directive.

Not provided -S13

Item Type Provision, and specifications when provided.

R o bo

t ar

m

J1 axis operating range change 1F-DH-01 Not provided Provided

Machine cable extension

(extension type)

1S- CBL-01 Fixed type (For CR750 controller): Not provide 5m 10m 15m

1S- LCBL-01 Flexed type (For CR750 controller): Not provide 5m 10m 15m

Machine cable extension

(direct type)

1S- LUCBL-01 Flexed type (For CR750 controller): Not provide 5m 10m 15m

1F- UCBL-02 Fixed type (For CR751 controller): Not provide 10m 15m 20m

1F- LUCBL-02 Flexed type ((For CR751 controller): Not provide 10m 15m 20m

Solenoid valve set 1F-VD0 -01 1F-VD0 E-01

Not provide 1F-VD0 -01 (Sink type): 1set 2set 3set 4set 1F-VD0 E-01 (Source type): 1set 2set 3set 4set

Hand input cable 1F-HC35C-01 Not provided Provided

Hand output cable 1F-GR60S-01 Not provided Provided

Hand curl tube 1E-ST0408C-300 Not provided Provided

External Wiring/Piping box 1F-UT-BOX Not provided Provided

Internal Wiring/Piping for hand 1F-HS408S-01 Not provided Provided (For 200mm stroke)

1F-HS408S-02 Not provided Provided (For 340mm stroke)

C o n tr

o lle

r Simple teaching pendant R32TB-

R33TB- Not provided R32TB (CR750 controller): 7m 15m

R33TB (CR751 controller): 7m 15m

Highly efficient teaching pendant R56TB-

R57TB- Not provided R56TB (CR750 controller): 7m 15m

R57TB (CR751 controller): 7m 15m

Parallel I/O interface 2D-TZ368/ 2D-TZ378

Not provided 2D-TZ368(Sink type)/ -1pc. -2pc. 2D-TZ378(Source type)/ -1pc. -2pc.

External I/O cable (For parallel I/O interface)

2D-CBL (2D-TZ368/TZ378)

Not provided 5m-( )pc. 15m-( )pc.

Parallel I/O unit 2A-RZ361/ 2A-RZ371

Not provided 2A-RZ361(Sink type)/( ) unit 2A-RZ371(Source type)/( ) unit

External I/O cable (For Parallel I/O unit)

2A-CBL (2A-RZ361/RZ371)

Not provided 5m-( )pc. 15m-( )pc.

CC-Link interface 2D-TZ576 Not provided Provided

Controller protection box CR750-MB For CR750 controller: Not provided Provided

CR751-MB For CR751 controller: Not provided Provided

RT ToolBox2 3D-11C-WINE Not provided Windows XP/Vista/7/8/8.1/10 English CD-ROM

RT ToolBox2 mini 3D-12C-WINE Not provided Windows XP/Vista/7/8/8.1/10 English CD-ROM

MELFA-3D Vision 3.0 3F-53U-WINM Not provided Provided

Instructions manual 5F-FB01-PE01 Not provided Provided ( ) sets

Maintenance parts Backup batteries ER6V ( ) pcs. Backup batteries Q6BAT ( ) pcs. Grease ( ) cans

7Appendix

Specifications discussion material (RH-6FH series: Floor installation type) Appendix-236

Robot selection check list Work description Material handling Assembly Machining L/UL Sealing Testing and inspection Other ( )

Workpiece mass ( ) Hand mass ( )

Atmosphere General environment Clean Oil mist:

Confirm oil proof request (Oil name: )/not request Note1) Dusts (Please take measures such as a jacket.), Chemicals (Please consult), Other ( )

Note1) Refer to Page 38, "2.2.8 Protection specifications" about oil resistance.

Remarks

Appendix-237 Specifications discussion material (RH-12FH series: Floor installation type)

7Appendix

Appendix 4 Specifications discussion material (RH-12FH series: Floor installation type)

Customer information

Purchased model

Shipping special specifications

Options (Installable after shipment)

Maintenance parts (Consumable parts)

Company name Name

Address Telephone

Item Type Arm length Stroke Controller

General specification RH-12FH -D 550 700 850 350 450

CR750-12HD-1

RH-12FH -1D CR751-12HD-0

Clean specification RH-12FH C-D 550 700 850 350 450

CR750-12HD-1

RH-12FH C-1D CR751-12HD-0

Oil mist specification RH-12FH M-D 550 700 850 350 450

CR750-12HD-1

RH-12FH M-1D CR751-12HD-0

Item Standard specification Special shipping specifications

Robot arm Machine cable 5m fixed type 2m fixed type: 1S-02UCBL-01 (For CR750 controller) 1F-02UCBL-02 (For CR751 controller)

CE Marking specification Not conforming with EMC directive.

Not provided -S15

item Type Provision, and specifications when provided.

R o bo

t ar

m

J1 axis operating range change 1F-DH-02 Not provided Provided

Machine cable extension 1S- CBL-01 Fixed type (For CR750 controller): Not provide 5m 10m 15m

1S- LCBL-01 Flexed type (For CR750 controller): Not provide 5m 10m 15m

1F- UCBL-02 Fixed type (For CR751 controller): Not provide 10m 15m 20m

1F- LUCBL-02 Flexed type ((For CR751 controller): Not provide 10m 15m 20m

Solenoid valve set 1S-VD0 -01 1S-VD0 E-01

Not provide 1S-VD0 -01 (Sink type): 1set 2set 3set 4set 1S-VD0 E-01 (Source type): 1set 2set 3set 4set

Hand input cable 1F-HC35C-02 Not provided Provided

Hand output cable 1F-GR60S-01 Not provided Provided

Hand curl tube 1N-ST0608C-01 Not provided Provided

External Wiring/Piping box 1F-UT-BOX-01 Not provided Provided

Internal Wiring/Piping for hand 1F-HS604S-01 Not provided Provided (For 350mm stroke)

1F-HS604S-02 Not provided Provided (For 450mm stroke)

C o n tr

o lle

r Simple teaching pendant R32TB-

R33TB-

Not provided R32TB (CR750 ): 7m 15m R33TB (CR751 ): 7m 15m

Highly efficient teaching pen- dant

R56TB-

R57TB-

Not provided R56TB (CR750 ): 7m 15m R57TB (CR751 ): 7m 15m

Parallel I/O interface 2D-TZ368/

2D-TZ378

Not provided 2D-TZ368(Sink type)/ -1pc. -2pc. 2D-TZ378(Source type)/ -1pc. -2pc.

External I/O cable

(For parallel I/O interface)

2D-CBL (2D-TZ368/TZ378)

Not provided 5m-( )pc. 15m-( )pc.

Parallel I/O unit 2A-RZ361/

2A-RZ371

Not provided 2A-RZ361(Sink type)/( ) unit

2A-RZ371(Source type)/( ) unit

External I/O cable

(For Parallel I/O unit)

2A-CBL (2A-RZ361/RZ371)

Not provided 5m-( )pc. 15m-( )pc.

CC-Link interface 2D-TZ576 Not provided Provided

Controller protection box CR750-MB CR750 : Not provided Provided

CR751-MB CR751 : Not provided Provided

RT ToolBox2 3D-11C-WINE Not provided Windows XP/Vista/7/8/8.1/10 English CD-ROM

RT ToolBox2 mini 3D-12C-WINE Not provided Windows XP/Vista/7/8/8.1/10 English CD-ROM

MELFA-3D Vision 3.0 3F-53U-WINM Not provided Provided

Instructions manual 5F-FB01-PE01 Not provided Provided ( ) sets

Maintenance parts Backup batteries ER6V ( ) pcs. Backup batteries Q6BAT ( ) pcs. Grease ( ) cans

7Appendix

Specifications discussion material (RH-12FH series: Floor installation type) Appendix-238

Robot selection check list Work description Material handling Assembly Machining L/UL Sealing Testing and inspection Other ( )

Workpiece mass ( ) Hand mass ( )

Atmosphere General environment, Clean Oil mist:

Confirm oil proof request (Oil name: )/ not requestNote1) Dusts (Please take measures such as a jacket.), Chemicals (Please consult), Other ( )

Note1) Refer to Page 38, "2.2.8 Protection specifications" about oil resistance.

Remarks

Appendix-239 Specifications discussion material (RH-20FH series: Floor installation type)

7Appendix

Appendix 5 Specifications discussion material (RH-20FH series: Floor installation type)

Customer information

Purchased model

Shipping special specifications

Options (Installable after shipment)

Maintenance parts (Consumable parts)

Company name Name

Address Telephone

Item Type Arm length Stroke Controller

General specification RH-20FH -D 850 1000 350 450

CR750-20HD-1

RH-20FH -1D CR751-20HD-0

Clean specification RH-20FH C-D 850 1000 350 450

CR750-20HD-1

RH-20FH C-1D CR751-20HD-0

Oil mist specification RH-20FH M-D 850 1000 350 450

CR750-20HD-1

RH-20FH M-1D CR751-20HD-0

Item Standard specification Special shipping specifications

Robot arm Machine cable 5m fixed type 2m fixed type: 1S-02UCBL-01 (For CR750 controller) 1F-02UCBL-02 (For CR751 controller)

CE Marking specification Not conforming with EMC directive.

Not provided -S15

item Type Provision, and specifications when provided.

R o bo

t ar

m

J1 axis operating range change 1F-DH-02 Not provided Provided

Machine cable extension 1S- CBL-01 Fixed type (For CR750 controller): Not provide 5m 10m 15m

1S- LCBL-01 Flexed type (For CR750 controller): Not provide 5m 10m 15m

1F- UCBL-02 Fixed type (For CR751 controller): Not provide 10m 15m 20m

1F- LUCBL-02 Flexed type ((For CR751 controller): Not provide 10m 15m 20m

Solenoid valve set 1S-VD0 -01 1S-VD0 E-01

Not provide 1S-VD0 -01 (Sink type): 1set 2set 3set 4set 1S-VD0 E-01 (Source type): 1set 2set 3set 4set

Hand input cable 1F-HC35C-02 Not provided Provided

Hand output cable 1F-GR60S-01 Not provided Provided

Hand curl tube 1N-ST0608C-01 Not provided Provided

External Wiring/Piping box 1F-UT-BOX-01 Not provided Provided

Internal Wiring/Piping for hand 1F-HS604S-01 Not provided Provided (For 350mm stroke)

1F-HS604S-02 Not provided Provided (For 450mm stroke)

C o n tr

o lle

r Simple teaching pendant R32TB-

R33TB-

Not provided R32TB (CR750 ): 7m 15m R33TB (CR751 ): 7m 15m

Highly efficient teaching pen- dant

R56TB-

R57TB-

Not provided R56TB (CR750 ): 7m 15m R57TB (CR751 ): 7m 15m

Parallel I/O interface 2D-TZ368/

2D-TZ378

Not provided 2D-TZ368(Sink type)/ -1pc. -2pc. 2D-TZ378(Source type)/ -1pc. -2pc.

External I/O cable

(For parallel I/O interface)

2D-CBL (2D-TZ368/TZ378)

Not provided 5m-( )pc. 15m-( )pc.

Parallel I/O unit 2A-RZ361/

2A-RZ371

Not provided 2A-RZ361(Sink type)/( ) unit

2A-RZ371(Source type)/( ) unit

External I/O cable

(For Parallel I/O unit)

2A-CBL (2A-RZ361/RZ371)

Not provided 5m-( )pc. 15m-( )pc.

CC-Link interface 2D-TZ576 Not provided Provided

Controller protection box CR750-MB CR750 : Not provided Provided

CR751-MB CR751 : Not provided Provided

RT ToolBox2 3D-11C-WINE Not provided Windows XP/Vista/7/8/8.1/10 English CD-ROM

RT ToolBox2 mini 3D-12C-WINE Not provided Windows XP/Vista/7/8/8.1/10 English CD-ROM

MELFA-3D Vision 3.0 3F-53U-WINM Not provided Provided

Instructions manual 5F-FB01-PE01 Not provided Provided ( ) sets

Maintenance parts Backup batteries ER6V ( ) pcs. Backup batteries Q6BAT ( ) pcs. Grease ( ) cans

7Appendix

Specifications discussion material (RH-20FH series: Floor installation type) Appendix-240

Robot selection check list Work description Material handling Assembly Machining L/UL Sealing Testing and inspection Other ( )

Workpiece mass ( ) Hand mass ( )

Atmosphere General environment, Clean Oil mist:

Confirm oil proof request (Oil name: )/ not requestNote1) Dusts (Please take measures such as a jacket.), Chemicals (Please consult), Other ( )

Note1) Refer to Page 38, "2.2.8 Protection specifications" about oil resistance.

Remarks

Appendix-241 Specifications discussion material (RH-3FHR series: Hanging installation type)

7Appendix

Appendix 6 Specifications discussion material (RH-3FHR series: Hanging installation type)

Customer information

Purchased model

Shipping special specifications

Options (Installable after shipment)

Maintenance parts (Consumable parts)

Robot selection check list

Company name Name

Address Telephone

Item Type Arm length Stroke Controller

General specification RH-3FHR3515-D

350

150 CR750-03HRD-1

RH-3FHR3515-1D CR751-03HRD-0

Clean specification RH-3FHR3512C-D

120

CR750-03HRD-1

RH-3FHR3512C-1D CR751-03HRD-0

Oil mist specification RH-3FHR3512W-D CR750-03HRD-1

RH-3FHR3512W-1D CR751-03HRD-0

Item Standard specification Special shipping specifications

Robot arm Machine cable 5m fixed type 2m fixed type: 1S-02UCBL-01 (For CR750 controller) 1F-02UCBL-02 (For CR751 controller)

item Type Provision, and specifications when provided.

R o bo

t ar

m

Stopper for changing the oper- ating range

1S-DH-05J1 Not provided Provided

1S-DH-05J2 Not provided Provided

Machine cable extension 1S- CBL-01 Fixed type (For CR750 controller): Not provide 5m 10m 15m

1S- LCBL-01 Flexed type (For CR750 controller): Not provide 5m 10m 15m

1F- UCBL-02 Fixed type (For CR751 controller): Not provide 10m 15m 20m

1F- LUCBL-02 Flexed type ((For CR751 controller): Not provide 10m 15m 20m

Solenoid valve set 1S-VD04-05 1S-VD04E-05

Standard specification: Not provide 1S-VD04-05 (Sink type) 1S-VD04E-05(Source type)

1S-VD04W-05 1S-VD04WE-05

Clean/Waterproof specification: Not provide 1S-VD04W-05 (Sink type) 1S-VD04WE-05(Source type)

Hand input cable 1S-HC00S-01 Not provided Provided

Hand output cable 1S-GR35S-02 Not provided Provided

Hand tube 1S-ST0304S Not provided Provided

C o n tr

o lle

r Simple teaching pendant R32TB-

R33TB-

Not provided R32TB (CR750 ): 7m 15m R33TB (CR751 ): 7m 15m

Highly efficient teaching pen- dant

R56TB-

R57TB-

Not provided R56TB (CR750 ): 7m 15m R57TB (CR751 ): 7m 15m

Parallel I/O interface 2D-TZ368/

2D-TZ378

Not provided

2D-TZ368(Sink type): -1pc. -2pc.

2D-TZ378(Source type)/ -1pc. -2pc.

External I/O cable

(For parallel I/O interface)

2D-CBL (2D-TZ368/TZ378)

Not provided 5m-( )pc. 15m-( )pc.

Parallel I/O unit 2A-RZ361/

2A-RZ371

Not provided 2A-RZ361(Sink type)/( ) unit

2A-RZ371(Source type)/( ) unit

External I/O cable

(For Parallel I/O unit)

2A-CBL (2A-RZ361/RZ371)

Not provided 5m-( )pc. 15m-( )pc.

CC-Link interface 2D-TZ576 Not provided Provided

Controller protection box CR750-MB CR750 : Not provided Provided

CR751-MB CR751 : Not provided Provided

RT ToolBox2 3D-11C-WINE Not provided Windows XP/Vista/7/8/8.1/10 English CD-ROM

RT ToolBox2 mini 3D-12C-WINE Not provided Windows XP/Vista/7/8/8.1/10 English CD-ROM

MELFA-3D Vision 3.0 3F-53U-WINM Not provided Provided

Instructions manual 5F-FP01-PE01 Not provided Provided ( ) sets

Maintenance parts Backup batteries ER6V ( ) pcs. Backup batteries Q6BAT ( ) pcs. Grease ( ) cans

Work description Material handling Assembly Machining L/UL Sealing Testing and inspection Other ( )

Workpiece mass ( ) Hand mass ( )

Atmosphere General environment, Clean Oil mist:

Confirm oil proof request (Oil name: )/ not requestNote1) Dusts (Please take measures such as a jacket.), Chemicals (Please consult), Other ( )

Note1) Refer to Page 38, "2.2.8 Protection specifications" about oil resistance.

Remarks

HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS: 5-1-14, YADA-MINAMI, HIGASHI-KU NAGOYA 461-8670, JAPAN Authorised representative:

Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. FA - European Business Group Mitsubishi-Electric-Platz 1, D-40882 Ratingen, Germany Tel: +49(0)2102-4860

Jan. 2022 MEE Printed in Japan on recycled paper.

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Melfa Mitsubishi Electric works, you can view and download the Mitsubishi Electric Melfa RH6FHD,12FHD Series Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Specifications Manual for Mitsubishi Electric Melfa as well as other Mitsubishi Electric manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Specifications Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mitsubishi Electric Melfa. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mitsubishi Electric Melfa RH6FHD,12FHD Series Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mitsubishi Electric Melfa RH6FHD,12FHD Series Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mitsubishi Electric Melfa RH6FHD,12FHD Series Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mitsubishi Electric Melfa RH6FHD,12FHD Series Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mitsubishi Electric Melfa RH6FHD,12FHD Series Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.